System manual

.

System Manual

R&S®NH8606C ATV TransmitterTransmitter Series Nx8600

Only skilled personnel may perform the operations of the described instrument that are necessary for installing and putting it into operation as well as maintaining, trou-bleshooting and servicing it.

Printed in Germany

2101.5345.72-01 -0.1-

Certificate of quality Certificat de qualite

Sehr geehrter Kunde,Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines Rohde&Schwarz-Produktes ent-schieden. Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt. Es wurde nach den Regeln unseres Qualitätsmanage-mentsystems entwickelt, gefertigt und geprüft. Das Rohde&Schwarz-Qualitätsmanagementsystem ist u.a. nach IS09001 und IS014001 zertifiziert.

Der Umwelt verpflichteti Energie-effiziente,

RoHS-konforme Produkte i Kontinuierliche Weiterentwicklung

nachhaltiger Umweltkonzepte i IS014001-zertifiziertes

Umweltmanagementsystem

Dear Customer,You have decided to buy a Rohde&Schwarz product. You are thus assured of receiving a product that is manufactured using the most modern methods available. This product was developed, manufactured and tested in compliance with our quality management System Stan-dards. The Rohde&Schwarz quality management System is certified according to Standards such äs IS09001 and IS014001.

Environmental commitmenti Energy-efficient products i Continuous improvement inenvironmental sustainability i

IS014001-certified environmentalmanagement System

Cher client,Vous avez choisi d'acheter un pro-duit Rohde&Schwarz. Vous disposez donc d'un produit fabrique d'apres les methodes les plus avancees. Le deve-loppement, la fabrication et les tests respectent nos normes de gestion qualite. Le Systeme de gestion qualite de Rohde&Schwarz a ete homologue, entre autres, conformement aux nor-mes IS09001 et IS014001.

Engagement ecologiquei Produits ä efficience energetique i Amelioration continue de la durabiliteenvironnementale i Systeme de

gestion de l'environne-ment certifie selon IS014001

Technical support - where and when you need itFor quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the Operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz equipment.

Up-to-date Information and UpgradesTo keep your Instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your Instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your Instrument and your wish. We will take care that you will get the right information.

Für Betrieb im Europäischen Wirtschaftsraum (EWR)und zivilem Einsatz.

Hinweis gemäß dem Gesetz über "Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsend-einrichtungen" (FTEG) und der Europäischen Richtlinie 1999/5/EG:

Dieses Produkt darf innerhalb des EWR nicht uneingeschränkt betrieben werden, da der verwendete Frequenzbereich auf nicht harmonisierten Bändern erfolgt. Nationale Vorschriften / Genehmigungen sind zu beachten.Das Gerät ist 4 Wochen vor Inverkehrbringen bei der jeweils zuständigen nationalen Behörde für die Frequenzhoheit zu notifizieren. Informationen hierzu im Internet unter folgender Adresse:

For Operation in the European Economic Area (EEA)and civil use.

Note pursuant to the German Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equip-ment Directive (FTEG) and the European R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:

Operation of this product within the EEA is subject to restrictions since the frequencybands used are not harmonised. National provisions / authorizations shall be com-plied with.The product shall be notified to the competent national frequency managementauthority four weeks before the product is put on the market.For more information refer to: http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/rtte/spectr.htm

NH8606C CONTENTS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1

DESIGN AND CHARACTERISTICS 2

INSTALLATION 3

COMMISSIONING 4

OPERATING 5

MAINTENANCE 6

TROUBLESHOOTING 7

SERVICE 8

ANNEX 9

CHAPTER 1

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Kundeninformation zur Batterieverordnung (BattV)

Dieses Gerät enthält eine schadstoffhaltige Batterie. Diese darf nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden.Nach Ende der Lebensdauer darf die Entsorgung nur über eine Rohde&Schwarz-Kundendienststelle oder eine geeignete Sammelstelle erfolgen.

Safety Regulations for Batteries (according to BattV)

This equipment houses a battery containing harmful substances that must not be disposed of äs normal household waste. After its useful life, the battery may only be disposed of at a Rohde & Schwarz service center or at a suitable depot.

Normas de Seguridad para Baterias (Segün BattV)

Este equipo lleva una bateria que contiene sustancias perjudiciales,que no se debe desechar en los contenedores de basuradomesticos.Despues de la vida ütil, la bateria solo se podrä eliminar en uncentro de servicio de Rohde & Schwarz o en un depösito apropiado.

Consignes de securite pour batteries (selon BattV)

Cet appareil est equipe d'une pile comprenant des substancesnocives. Ne jamais la jeter dans une poubelle pour orduresmenageres.Une pile usagee doit uniquement etre eliminee par un centre deservice dient de Rohde & Schwarz ou peut etre collectee pour etretraitee specialement comme dechets dangereux.

About this Manual

This manual is part of the documentation for the NX8000 family of transmitters from Rohde & Schwarz. Each transmitter and each transmitter component is described in a separate manual. The individual manuals of the family of transmitters are modular in structure and complement each other.

Structure

Each transmitter component is described in a separate manual and can thus be used as an individual component (where practical). The transmitter manual is the main document for the entire set of documentation. It describes all steps that are necessary to install a trans-mitter, put it into operation, operate and maintain it. Where applicable, the transmitter man-ual refers to the individual manuals for the various components. The component manuals, in turn, also refer to the transmitter manual whenever the component is to be used as a transmitter module.

Contents

The manuals for the family of transmitters describe all steps required to install the transmit-ter or one of its components, put them into operation, operate and maintain them, trouble-shoot and service them. The Annex includes interface descriptions plus technical documents.

For convenience, all manuals are structured identically. Sections that are not relevant to the manual at hand are also included but are left blank.

Safety

All skilled personnel working with a transmitter or its components must read all relevant manuals and comply with the safety measures that are detailed in the chapter about safety and in the applicable sections in the manual. The transmitter and the individual transmitter components must be used only for their intended purpose. All operations involving the transmitter or individual transmitter components must be performed by skilled personnel. The manual will point out specifically if additional qualifications are required.

Symbols and Layout

The triangular warning symbol indicates danger. In addition to the triangular warning sym-bol, different key words indicate the level of potential danger.

Instructions are given in numbered steps or indicated by an "index finger" symbol to the left of the instruction text. The results of the performed instructions are indented.

The key word "Note" precedes notes. Notes contain additional information and tips to help facilitate the work at hand.

All other formatting options add structure to the text and are self-explanatory.

2 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Instruments

ATTENTION!

The safety instructions provided in this manual must be complied with!

Pay special attention to the following points:

O Only skilled personnel may perform electrical installation and electrical connection tasks.

O Always follow the relevant national and international safety rules and regulations when equipping operating areas and when setting up and operating electrical equipment.

These rules and regulations include for example:

- Protective measures to prevent accidents

- Protective measures to prevent overvoltage

- Insulation status of electrical equipment

- Grounding of electrical equipment

- Physical properties and laying of electric lines and cables

- Regulations applying to industrial premises and areas as well as to special facilities.

O When setting up the rack, observe the country-specific rules for accident prevention, for example with regard to:

- Risk of getting crushed when working with loads suspended in the air

- Risk of falling off ladders

- Risk of injury when lifting heavy objects.

O Use your personal protective equipment for installation and repair work, i.e. wear pro-tective clothing such as helmets, safety gloves and eye protection, depending on the task at hand.

O Operate the equipment and systems only when the cabinet is closed. If you have to open the cabinet for maintenance and repair work, comply with the applicable safety instruc-tions.

O If the equipment and systems are removed from the AC power supply, all poles must be disconnected. Check for and remove any external power supply, i.e. all measuring ca-bles, extension cables, multiple socket outlets (except for special service sockets). Wait for five minutes to ensure that any and all capacitors are sufficiently discharged.

O Additionally with liquid-cooled transmitters:When filling and installing the cooling system (pump unit and heat-exchanger unit), observe the rules for handling hazardous sub-stances (cooling agents); see section "safety data sheets about hazardous substances" under "EU safety data sheet in accordance with 2001/58/EC Antifrogen".

3 General Safety Instructions

This section contains general safety instructions that apply to all products manufactured or distributed by Rohde & Schwarz.

In accordance with IEC 215 and EN 60215, transmitters and their auxiliary equipment must be operated only under the responsibility of skilled personnel. The EN 60215 standard ("Safety requirements for radio transmitting equipment") defines the minimum requirements for skilled electrical personnel.

Complying with all statutory provisions is a precondition for operating radiocommunications systems and equipment. The operator or the operator's authorized representative is re-sponsible for ensuring compliance with these guidelines. They must also ensure that the operating personnel meets the applicable country-specific training requirements. These re-quirements also include any periodic training that is necessary.

Basic Safety Instructions

Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!

All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in accordance with the attached EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer's plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.

Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the product is used for any intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.

The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.

Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories.


Tags and their meaning

The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers.

indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

indicates the possibility of incorrect operation which can result in damage tothe product.In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.

These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The use of tags in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage.

Operating states and operating positions

The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed.

1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, pollutionseverity 2, overvoltage category 2, use only indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level,max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea level. A tolerance of ±10 % shall apply to the nominalvoltage and ±5 % to the nominal frequency.

2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stabilityare unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions wheninstalling the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installationthat is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury ordeath.

3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambienttemperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or inthe data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury ordeath.


Electrical safety

If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all to the extent necessary, electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.

1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the productmatches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the powerfuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.

2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation ispermitted only on sockets with an earthing contact and protective earth connection.

3. Intentionally breaking the protective earth connection either in the feed line or in the product itself isnot permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extensioncords or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure thatthey are safe to use.

4. If the product does not have a power switch for disconnection from the AC supply network, the plug ofthe connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device. In such cases, always ensure that thepower plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times (corresponding to the length of connectingcable, approx. 2 m). Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection fromthe AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems, adisconnecting device must be provided at the system level.

5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cable on a regular basis toensure that it is in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and carefullylaying the power cable, you can ensure that the cable will not be damaged and that no one can behurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.

6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fused with max. 16 A (higher fuseonly after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).

7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into thesocket. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.

8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electricshocks.

9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriatemeasuring equipment, fusing, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be taken toavoid any hazards.

10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrialcomputers, comply with the IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 or IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1 standards that applyin each case.

11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is inoperation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to theproduct.

12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the PE terminal on site and theproduct's PE conductor must be made first before any other connection is made. The product may beinstalled and connected only by a licensed electrician.

13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protectivedevices, the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that anyone who has access to the product, aswell as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.

1171.0000.42-05.00 Page 3


14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt oflightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to thedanger of an electric shock.

15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for thispurpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.

16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states andoperating positions", item 1. Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration byliquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the productitself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.

17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on theproduct, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by waterincreases the risk of electric shock.

18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply networkor battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents suchas alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.

Operation

1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that personswho use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuriesor material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitablepersonnel for operating the products.

2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".

3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as askin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarzproduct, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems orstress.

4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, besure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal", item 1.

5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevatedlevel of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also beexposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaceswhere there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert thepotential danger.

6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that cancause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks andprotective clothing must be worn.

7. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely noother settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation. The objective is toprevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).

1171.0000.42-05.00 Page 4


Repair and service

1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work isperformed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supplynetwork. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.

2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electricalexperts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevantto safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performedafter parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, PE conductor test, insulationresistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure thecontinued safety of the product.

Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells

If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.

1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.

2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.

3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in adrawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by otherconductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until theyare ready to be used.

4. Keep cells and batteries out of the hands of children. If a cell or a battery has been swallowed, seekmedical aid immediately.

5. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.

6. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. Ifcontact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.

7. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (seeparts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.

8. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteriesand normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe thenational regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.

Transport

1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases, the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid back or other physical injuries.

Informaciones elementales de seguridad

2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It istherefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such ascranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on themeans of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means oftransport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.

3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safelyand properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use theproduct in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure theproduct in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.

Waste disposal

1. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goesbeyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trainedpersonnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposalregulations must be observed.

2. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a specialway, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of themanufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposalregulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the productdocumentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problemsand lead to environmental damage.


Es imprescindible leery observer las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!

El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al dfa con los estandares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el maximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados segun las normas de seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garantla de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado segun el certificado de conformidad adjunto de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable segun los estandares tecnicos de seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario debera atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz esta siempre a su disposition en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad.

Ademas queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto esta destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera debera ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona/cosa pueda sufrir dano. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.

1171.0000.42-05.00 Page 6


Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentacion del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido (ver hoja de datos, documentacion, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos tecnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingles. Por eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontrarfa la informacion debida en la documentacion del producto en el capitulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, asi como la documentacion del producto, y entreguelas a usuarios posteriores.

Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o danos por peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del producto. Deberan tenerse en cuenta todas las demas informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las referentes a la proteccion de personas, que encontraran en el capftulo correspondiente de la documentacion del producto y que tambien son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denomination de "producto", entre ellos tambien aparatos, instalaciones asi como toda clase de accesorios.

• «


Palabras de serial y su significado

En la documentacion del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de serial con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros.

PELIGRO identifica un peligro inminente con riesgo elevado que provocara muerte o lesiones graves si no se evita.

ADVERTENCIA identifica un posible peligro con riesgo medio de provocar muerte o lesiones (graves) si no se evita.

ATENCION identifica un peligro con riesgo reducido de provocar lesiones leves o moderadas si no se evita.

AVISO indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y, como consecuencia, danarlo.En la documentacion del producto se emplea de forma sinonima el termino CUIDADO.

Las palabras de serial corresponden a la definicion habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el area economica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definicion en otras areas economicas o en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se debera tener en cuenta que las palabras de serial aqui descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinacion con la correspondiente documentacion del producto y solamente en combinacion con el producto correspondiente. La utilizacion de las palabras de serial en combinacion con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia darios en personas u objetos.

Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento

El producto solamente debe ser utilizado segun lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilacion. Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse cheques electricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos deberan ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevencion de accidentes.

1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz valido lo que sigue:como posicion de funcionamiento se define por principio la posicion con el suelo de la caja paraabajo, modo de proteccion IP 2X, grado de suciedad 2, categorla de sobrecarga electrica 2, usosolamente en estancias interiores, utilizacion hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicara una tolerancia de ±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal.

2. No situe el producto encima de superficies, vehlculos, estantes o mesas, que por sus caracterlsticasde peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para el. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalacion delfabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Sise realiza la instalacion de modo distinto al indicado en la documentacion del producto, puedencausarse lesiones o incluso la muerte.

3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). Latemperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura maxima especificada en la documentacion delproducto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirsecheques electricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.

1171.0000.42-05.00 Page 8


Seguridad electrica

Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad electrica, pueden producirse choques electricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.

1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberä comprobar siempre que la tensiönpreseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaciön electrica. Si es necesariomodificar el ajuste de tensiön, tambien se deberän cambiar en caso dado los fusiblescorrespondientes del producto.

2. Los productos de la clase de protecciön l con alimentaciön mövil y enchufe individual solamentepodrän enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protecciönconectado.

3. Queda prohibida la interrupciön intencionada del conductor de protecciön, tanto en la toma decorriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupciön puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo deque el producto sea fuente de choques electricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas deenchufe, deberä garantizarse la realizaciön de un examen regulär de los mismos en cuanto a suestado tecnico de seguridad.

4. Si el producto no estä equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se deberä considerarel enchufe del cable de conexiön como interruptor. En estos casos se deberä asegurar que el enchufesiempre sea de fäcil acceso (de acuerdo con la longitud del cable de conexiön, aproximadamente2 m). Los interruptores de funciön o electrönicos no son aptos para el corte de la red electrica. Si los productos sin interruptor estän integrados en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberä colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaciön.

5. No utilice nunca el producto si estä danado el cable de conexiön a red. Compruebe regularmente elcorrecto estado de los cables de conexiön a red. Asegürese, mediante las medidas de protecciön yde instalaciön adecuadas, de que el cable de conexiön a red no pueda ser danado o de que nadiepueda ser danado por el, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque electrico.

6. Solamente estä permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentaciön TN/TT aseguradas con fusiblesde 16 A como mäximo (utilizaciön de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo deempresas Rohde & Schwarz).

7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe porcompleto y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observaciön de estas medidas puede provocarchispas, fuego y/o lesiones.

8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que estopodrfa causar fuego o choques electricos.

9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensiön Ueff > 30 V se deberän tomar las medidasapropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de mediciön adecuados, seguros, limitaciönde tensiön, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).

10. Para la conexiön con dispositivos informäticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debecomprobarse que estos cumplan los eständares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1välidos en cada caso.

11. A menos que este permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasamientras el producto este en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes electricos ypuede causar lesiones, fuego o danos en el producto.

1171.0000.42-05.00 Page 9


12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberä primero conectar el conductor de protecciön fijocon el conductor de protecciön del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexiön. La instalaciön yla conexiön deberän ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.

13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no esten provistos de fusibles, interruptor automätico ni otrosmecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentaciön debe estar protegido de modo quetodas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, asl como el producto mismo, esten a salvo deposibles danos.

14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensiön (debida p. ej. a una caida del rayo) mediantelos correspondientes sistemas de protecciön. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedarä expuesto alpeligro de choque electrico.

15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningün objeto que no este destinado a ello.Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques electricos, fuego olesiones.

16. Salvo indicaciön contraria, los productos no estän impermeabilizados (vertambien el capitulo"Estados operatives y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar lasmedidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de Ifquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choqueelectrico para el usuario o de danos en el producto, que tambien pueden redundar en peligro para laspersonas.

17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producidocondensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de este, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frfo aotro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque electrico.

18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaciön de tensiön (p. ej. red dealimentaciön o baterla). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pano suave, que no se deshilache.No utilice bajo ningün concepto productos de limpieza quimicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentespara lacas nitrocelulösicas.

Funcionamiento

1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraciön durante el manejo.Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto esten a la altura de los requerimientosnecesarios en cuanto a aptitudes fisicas, pslquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no sepueden excluir lesiones o danos de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionarel personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.

2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capitulo "Transporte".

3. Como con todo producto de fabricaciön industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidadde que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados, los llamados alergenos(p. ej. el nlquel). Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen reaccionesalergicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutäneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva odificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un medico para investigar las causas yevitar cualquier molestia o dano a la salud.

4. Antes de la manipulaciön mecänica y/o termica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuentaimprescindiblemente el capi'tulo "Eliminaciön", punto 1.

1171.0000.42-05.00 Page 10


5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicaciön RF, pueden a causa de sufunciön natural, emitir una radiaciön electromagnetica aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidasnecesarias para la protecciön de las mujeres embarazadas. Tambien las personas con marcapasospueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaciön electromagnetica. El empresario/operador tiene laobligaciön de evaluar y senalizar las äreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado deexposiciön a radiaciones.

6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias töxicas(gases, llquidos etc.) que pueden generar danos a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio debenusarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. mäscaras antigäs e indumentaria de protecciön.

7. En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto läser (p. ej. un lector deCD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuraciön o funciön aparte de las descritas en ladocumentaciön del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiaciön läser).

Reparaciön y mantenimiento

1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizaciön para ello. Antesde manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensiön de alimentaciön, paraevitar toda posibilidad de choque electrico.

2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparaciön deberän ser efectuadas solamentepor electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para losaspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrän sersustituidos por partes originales. Despues de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridaddeberä realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor deprotecciön, mediciön de resistencia de aislamiento, mediciön de la corriente de fuga, control defuncionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.

Baterias y acumuladores o celdas

Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterias y acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de baterias y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de litio) debe seguir el eständar EN 62133.

1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.

2. Las celdas o baterias no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luzdirecta del sol. Las celdas y baterias deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexionessucias con un pano seco y limpio.

3. Las celdas o baterias no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterias enestuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto reciproco o por contacto conotros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o baterias de sus embalajes originaleshasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.

4. Mantener baterias y celdas fuera del alcance de los ninos. En caso de ingestiön de una celda obateria, avisar inmediatamente a un medico.

5. Las celdas o baterias no deben someterse a impactos mecänicos fuertes indebidos.

1171.0000.42-05.00 Page 11


6. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el Kquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con lapiel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a unmedico.

7. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o baterfas que contienen electrolitos alcalinos(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas obaterias solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista derecambios).

8. Las baterlas y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura domestica. Las baterias oacumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.Respete en esta relaciön las normas nacionales de eliminaciön y reciclaje.

Transporte

1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo conprecauciön y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevaciön adecuado (p. ej. una carretillaelevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros danos personales.

2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto porpersonas. Por eso no estä permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeciön en o sobre medios de transportecomo p. ej. grüas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar losproductos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevaciön. Para evitar danos personales odanos en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte oelevaciön utilizado.

3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehfculo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor laresponsabilidad de conducir el vehlculo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumiräninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de unvehiculo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehlculodebidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de danos.

Eliminaciön

1. Si se trabaja de manera mecänica y/o termica cualquier producto o componente mäs allä delfuncionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metalespesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o niquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado porpersonal especializado con formaciön adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar danospara la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminaciön deresiduos.

2. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles quedeban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos decambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichassustancias y las normas regionales de eliminaciön de residuos. Tenga en cuenta tambien en casonecesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentaciön del producto. Laeliminaciön incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar danos a la salud odanos al medio ambiente.

1171.0000.42-05.00 Page 12

The German Electrical and Electronic Equipment (ElektroG) Act is an implementation of the following EC directives:

• 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) and• 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in

electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS).

Once the lifetime of a product has ended, this product must not be disposed of in the Standard domestic refuse. Even disposal via the municipal collection points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted.

Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG has developed a disposal concept for the environmental-friendly disposal or recycling of waste material and fully assumes its Obligation äs a producer to take back and dispose of electrical and electronic waste in accordance with the ElektroG Act.

Please contact your local service representative to dispose of the product.

• <

4 Special Danger Warnings

4.1 Hazards due to AC Supply Voltage

There is a risk of electric shock with any Vrms > 30 VAC or V > 60 V DC voltage. Appropriate measures must be taken to prevent exposure to any danger when working with voltages that bear the risk of electric shock. Never work on live parts unless specifically required and only if the special safety precautions are complied with.

4.1.1 AC Power Supply

O Before connecting the AC power supply, it is important to ensure that the power supply specifications given for the system or instruments match the nominal specifications for the local power supply network. The power supply circuit must be protected by means of fuses in order to prevent overloads and short-circuits.

O Miniature modules have neutral conductor fuses. As a result, the power supply may still be connected even after interruption of the circuit by a fuse.

It is quite possible for a transmitter to have several separate electric circuits. Each of these circuits is subject to the following requirements:

O All electrical connections between the transmitter and the AC power supply must comply with the following conditions:

- The transmitter can be disconnected at any time.

- The transmitter can be prevented from being switched back on.

- The transmitter is terminated with a fully protected power cable matched to the powerconsumption.1

- Ensure that phase rotation is correct (direction of rotation of fans!).

Service sockets

It is common practice to equip transmitters with a connector that carries voltage even when the transmitter is turned off and that allows power to be supplied to test equipment or a sol-dering iron. These connectors are identified, e.g. by an LED, and may only be used for the aforementioned purposes.

The intended purpose of the sockets means that they have only a limited power output. The connector is not suitable for supplying power to heating equipment or large test sets.

O The transmitter operator is responsible for providing the correct fuse protection (the maximum value is specified on the socket).

O In the case of accessory parts that are not connected to the main transmitter, the transmitter operator is responsible for taking appropriate measures to ensure that the installation is safe in the respective switching state.

1 Obtain the specifications from this documentation and also adhere to the breaking capacity limits of the fusesand circuit breakers in the transmitter.

2101.4290.72 - 1 . 4 - E-2

4.1.2 Replacing Fuses

O Replace the safety fuses accessible in the operator area only if no voltage is being ap-plied to the instruments. The safety fuses may be replaced only by fuses with identical electric data, identical switching characteristics and identical switch-off capacity.

O Motor and line circuit breakers accessible in the transmitter's operator area may be op-erated. If their response range is selectable, do not change the settings made by the manufacturer. If the settings are accidentally changed, reset them by using the correct values specified in this documentation.

4.1.3 Emergency-Off Equipment

O If the customer requests, the transmitters are equipped with emergency keys. When the transmitters are supplied, these keys have basically no function. The transmitter opera-tor is responsible for ensuring that these emergency keys function safely and to inte-grate them into the emergency-off system of the operator area in accordance with the regulations. If you subsequently decide not to use the emergency keys as an emergen-cy-off system, you must remove them.

O Extremely important! A transmitter normally has several AC supply circuits that are independent from each other, such as main AC supply circuit, AC current supply for ac-cessory equipment (main control unit, antenna switch, etc) or AC current supply for a disabled socket.

The transmitter operator is responsible for making sure that all these circuits are inte-grated correctly into the emergency-off system. Circuits not integrated have to be la-beled accordingly.

O Never set up a transmitter that is equipped with disabled emergency-off equipment.

4.1.4 Opening the Transmitter

O When you open the transmitter to carry out mechanical/electrical tasks (e.g. cleaning, repair, etc) always follow the five basic rules for working with electrical systems:

- Disconnect the transmitter from the power supply

- Secure it against inadvertent switch-on

- Verify safe isolation from any power

- Ground or short-circuit it2

- Cover adjacent active circuits.

O Extremely important! A transmitter normally has several AC supply circuits that are in-dependent from each other, such as main AC supply circuit, AC current supply for ac-cessory equipment (main control unit, antenna switch, etc) or AC current supply for a disabled socket.

Prior to performing any work, check the current status of the circuits. Also disconnect adjacent circuits to prevent inadvertent contact.

2 Not all transmitter types can be grounded or short-circuited by using a grounding or short-circuit switch. If a suitable device for grounding or short-circuiting is not available, the skilled personnel must take appropriate measures as deemed necessary.

2101.4290.72 - 1 . 5 - E-2

O If you have to perform any work on the RF circuit, isolate the antenna connector as well.

Caution! If other transmitters, etc, are in operation that are coupled to the same antenna via RF filters, energy from them can be fed back via the antenna cable.

O Never open a disconnected transmitter without taking protective measures against touching voltage-carrying parts.

O Due to the risk of electric shock from the AC supply voltage, never perform any electrical operations when doors are open, front panels are unscrewed, plug-ins are withdrawn, etc.

O When electrical operations of the transmitter are performed for the purpose of internal measurements or repair, label the workplace accordingly and provide warning about the potential hazards in accordance with the basic rules of electrical engineering.

Appropriate measures have to be taken to prevent unauthorized persons from access-ing this area.

After completing your work, close the transmitter and restore all safety measures for pre-venting electric shock that have been provided by the manufacturer. Immediately make sure that protective equipment (e.g. locks) is effective.

4.2 Hazards due to High-Energy Circuits

The instruments include low-voltage circuits which can be fed from an extremely low-imped-ance voltage source(e.g. amplifier operating voltage). These circuits conduct dangerously large amounts of energy. We handle these circuits in the same manner as circuits with volt-ages that bear the risk of electric shock. They are usually covered and thus protected against accidental contact. The cover comes with a warning label.

If you remove the cover of a transmitter that is in operation, there is the risk of both voltage poles being short-circuited. Short circuits create an electric arc and thus can cause burns, damage to the eyes as well as further injuries due to the state of shock response.

Practical experience has repeatedly shown that a short circuit caused by metal tools can cause severe burns. For safety reasons, high-energy circuits are protected by covers and are thus not accessible within the operator area of the instruments.

O If you need to measure low-impedance voltages, during repair work or to optimize the power consumption of the transmitter for example, exercise the same caution as when measuring operating voltages that bear the risk of electric shock.

Wear protective clothing if necessary.

O Before you open an instrument or remove its cover, switch off the operating voltage and wait for five minutes to ensure that any and all capacitors are sufficiently discharged.

O Do not short-ciruit capacitors to discharge them.

4.3 RF Hazards

4.3.1 Mandatory Training

O Operators must instruct their personnel on how to use this transmitter or instrument in accordance with EN 60215 and IEC 215. This periodic training must cover the radio-fre-

2101.4290.72 -1.6- E-2

quency hazards of the individual transmitter or instrument. Only after such training has been provided and documented may the operating personnel handle switching and op-erating tasks.

High-energy RF circuits within the transmitter or the instrument are routed via conventional detachable RF connectors (e.g. N). Depending on the output power, the transmitter or in-strument outputs come with screw-in or pluggable RF lines or ducts.

If RF lines or modules conduct high power, the connection point or the entire module is marked with the standard warning symbol (yellow triangle with black exclamation mark).

4.3.2 RF Shielding

Transmitters and instruments from Rohde & Schwarz are shielded in such a manner that RF radiation does not pose any danger even in the immediate vicinity if all RF lines are closed. This statement is based on the ordinance for electromagnetic fields as defined in German law:

The 26th ordinance for the Federal Emission Protection Law dated December 16, 1996 de-fines limit values for radio-frequency equipment for electric and magnetic field strengths.

4.3.3 Rules for Operating the Transmitter

Opening RF lines during operation may cause electric arcs. This can cause burns and eye injuries.

O Operate the transmitter system only if an antenna or dummy antenna is connected.

O Never undo RF lines during transmitter operation.

O Never open modules during transmitter operation.

O Never put transmitters into operation if RF lines are open. 3

O When disconnecting a transmitter, always disconnect the antenna connector as well. If other transmitters, etc, are in operation that are coupled to the same antenna via RF fil -ters, energy from them can be fed back via the antenna cable.

4.3.4 Rules for Working with an Open Transmitter

If you switch on an open transmitter and remove covers and shielding that carry the general warning symbol of RF modules, dangerous RF levels will be radiated .

The transmitter operator is responsible for strict compliance with the necessary safety pre-cautions when someone is working with or located near an open transmitter that is switched on.

Necessary safety regulations include:

3 If you try to put the transmitter into operation, RF power is transmitted. If RF lines are open, the transmitter switches off the RF again. This attempt to transmit RF can lead to the above mentioned risks of injury even if - as is the case with Rohde & Schwarz transmitters - the RF flow is limited and transient due to technical measures.

2101.4290.72 - 1 . 7 - E-2

< <

O Labeling the workplace as subject to RF hazards

O Wearing RF protective cloth

O Taking special safety precautions for persons with implants such as metal parts, pace-makers, etc, since they are particularly susceptible to injury.

4.4 Fire Hazards

Every electric circuit containing sufficient energy and to which voltage is applied poses fire hazards. This also applies to radio transmitters. For transmitter radio systems, it is therefore necessary to create a safety plan for the event of fire.

Operating personnel must be trained on how to proceed in the case of fire in areas contain-ing electrical systems; training must be repeated at regular intervals. Personnel should be trained on the basis of the VDE 0132 standard and in agreement with the local fire depart-ment.

The following statement applies in Germany. Preventive measures at the site in question can largely eliminate the risk of fire or prevent its spread as far as possible.

Prevention and fire-fighting

O When setting up the transmitter, the operator must ensure that no inflammable materials are located below or above the cable entry nor attached to it.

Make sure that openings to adjacent spaces are closed in a flame-retardant manner.

O Fire-fighting is only allowed with special equipment even if the flames are insignificant or have no effect at all (e.g. breathing mask with air bottle).

O For fire-fighting, only suitable fire extinguishers (e.g. CO2 extinguishers) may be used.

One reason for requiring special equipment is the fact that extremely poisonous and imper-ceptible carbon monoxide is released during every fire. Another reason is that the materials contained in the instruments and systems emit poisonous vapors, gases and dust such as sulfuric acid and hydrogen sulfide, hydrochloric acid, dioxin, hydrofluoric acid and beryllium oxide dust when they are exposed to external flame and heat.

The following materials can be affected:

- Rubber in cables, cable bushings, vibration absorbers and instrument feet

- PVC in cables and lines

- PUR (foam) in insulators, molded parts, sealing mats and insulating strips

- Teflon in cables, lines, insulation material and printed boards

- Beryllium oxide ceramics in power transistors

4.5 Hazards due to Beryllium Oxide (BeO) Ceramics

Instruments and modules with components containing beryllium oxide (BeO) ceramics are marked accordingly. The following applies:

2101.4290.72 -1.8- E-2

If handled correctly, parts or components containing BeO ceramics are not hazardous to health.

If used improperly, however, BeO dust may be released. BeO dust causes chronic lung dis-ease (berylliosis); inhaling large amounts over an extended period of time is toxic, causing respiratory paralysis and death.

4.5.1 Rules for Handling BeO Ceramics

O Parts or components containing BeO ceramics must not be opened, mechanically pro-cessed or destroyed.

O Above all, these parts or components must not be scratched, broken, ground, tempered and sandblasted, not even under exhaust hoods.

4.5.2 Marking Parts or Components Containing BeO Ceramics

Rohde & Schwarz marks all parts or components containing BeO ceramics in the electric parts list, the circuit diagram and the transmitter.

The electric parts list contains the following text:

Beryllium oxide Hinweise beachten Observe instructions

The circuit diagram includes the full warning:

Achtung! Hinweise zur Sicherheit beim Umgang mit Teilen aus Berylliumoxid-Keramik beachten! Attention! Observe safety instructions for handling parts made from beryllium oxide ceramics!

In the transmitter, all components containing parts made from beryllium oxide ceramics are marked with a warning symbol and a label:

BERYLLIUMOXID / BERYLLIUM OXIDE

Sicherheitshinweise beachten Observe safety instructions

4.5.3 Measures in Case of Breakage and Waste Disposal

If BeO dust has been caused by breakage or other mechanical or electrical destruction, wipe away the dust using moist cloths and seal them in plastic bags together with the bro-ken pieces. Wear protective gloves.

Mark the bags with the danger symbol and text:

Berylliumoxid-Staub Beryllium oxide dust

Skull and crossbones danger symbol

The bags must be disposed of separately in accordance with national waste disposal laws.

Desoldered components containing BeO ceramics must also be disposed of in this way. All manufacturers of parts or components containing BeO ceramics that are known to Rohde & Schwarz gladly take back defective parts free of charge.

< «

5 Safety Data Sheets for Hazardous Materials

This section contains the following safety data sheets in accordance with guideline 91/155/ EEC:

- EC safety data sheet for coolant (Antifrogen N water mixture)

- EC safety data sheet for heat-conductive paste

Note on the cooling medium

The statutory provisions or approval regulations in some countries allow you to use cooling agents other than Antifrogen N in transmitter systems. For more information, please contact your Rohde & Schwarz representative.

Safety data sheet in accordance with 2001/58/ECANTIFROGEN N WATER-MIXTURE 39% Page 2

Substance key: SXR089061 Revision Date: 24.03.2004Version : 2 - 26 / EU Date of printing : 03.03.2008

After contact with skinIn case of contact with skin wash off immediately with plenty of water

After contact with eyesIn case of contact with eyes rinse thoroughly with plenty of water and seek medical advice

After ingestionSummon a doctor immediately.

5. Fire-fighting measures _______________________________________________

Suitable extinguishing mediaProduct itself is non-combustible; Fire extinguishing method of surrounding areas must be discussed.

Special hazards from the substance itself, its combustion products or from its vapoursIn case of fires, hazardous combustion gases are formed: Carbon monoxide (CO)

Special protective equipment for firefightingUse self-contained breathing apparatus

6. Accidental release measures __________________________________________

Personal precautionsEnsure adequate ventilation.Wear suitable personal protective equipment.

Environmental precautionsDo not allow to enter drains or waterways

Methods for cleaning up/taking upPick up with absorbent material (eg sand, kieselgur, acid binder, universal binder, sawdust). Dispose of as prescribed

7. Handling and storage ________________________________________________

Advice on safe handlingOpen and handle container with care. Ensure adequate ventilation.

Advice on protection against fire and explosionThe product is not combustible

Storage stabilityStorage time: > 24 months

8. Exposure controls/personal protection __________________________________

Ingredients with occupational exposure limits to be monitored



ETHYLENE GLYCOLCAS number: 107-21-1EU. Indicative Exposure and Directives relating to the protection of risks related to workexposure to chemical, physical, and biological agents.EU Exposure Limit Values DataRevision : 07 2000Time Weighted Average (TWA):

Values: 52 mg/m3 20 ppm

ETHYLENE GLYCOLCAS number: 107-21-1EU. Indicative Exposure and Directives relating to the protection of risks related to workexposure to chemical, physical, and biological agents.EU Exposure Limit Values DataRevision : 07 2000Skin designation:Can be absorbed through the skin.

ETHYLENE GLYCOLCAS number: 107-21-1EU. Indicative Exposure and Directives relating to the protection of risks related to workexposure to chemical, physical, and biological agents.EU Exposure Limit Values DataRevision : 07 2000Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL):

Values: 104mg/m3 40 ppm

General protective measuresDo not inhale vapours

Hygiene measuresKeep away from foodstuffs and beverages.

Respiratory protection : Use respiratory protection in case of insufficient exhaustventilation or prolonged exposure Full mask to standard DIN EN 136Filter A (organic gases and vapours) to standard DIN EN 141 The use of filter apparatus presupposes that the environment atmosphere contains at least 17% oxygen by volume, and does not exceed the maximum gas concentration, usually 0.5% by volume. Relevant guidelines to be considered include EN 136/141/143/371/372 as well as other national regulations.

Hand protection : For long-term exposure:Butyl rubber glovesMinimum breakthrough time / gloves : 480 min Minimum thickness / gloves 0,7 mm

For short-term exposure (splash protection): Nitrile rubber gloves.Minimum breakthrough time / gloves : 30 min Minimum thickness / gloves 0,4 mm



These types of protective gloves are offered by various manufacturers. Please note the manufacturers' detailed statements, especially about the minimum thickness and the minimum breakthrough time. Consider also the particular working conditions under which the gloves are being used.

Eye protection : safety glasses

9. Physical and chemical properties ______________________________________

Form : Liquid

Colour: light yellow

Odour: perceptible

Freezing point: approx. -25 °CMethod : ASTM D 1177

Boiling temperature : approx. 106 °C ( 1.013mbar)

Method : ASTM D 1120

Flash point: None

Ignition temperature : None

Oxidizing properties : Not applicable

Self-ignition temperature : Not applicable

Lower explosion limit: not determined

Upper explosion limit: not determined

Evaporation rate : not determined

Vapour pressure : < 0,1 mbar (20 °C)Method : Calculated by Syracuse.

Density : approx. 1,07 g/cm3 (20 °C)Method : DIN 51757

Bulk density : Not applicable

Vapour density in relation to not determined air:

Solubility in water : (20 °C)miscible in all proportions

Soluble in ... : fatnot determined

pH value : 7,8 - 8,3 (20 °C)Method : DIN EN 1262

Octanol/water partition not determinedcoefficient (log Row):

Viscosity (kinematic): approx. 3,1 mm2/s ( 20 °C)Method : DIN 51562



Combustion number : Not applicable

10. Stability and reactivity _______________________________________________

Thermal decomposition : > 200 °CMethod : DSC Source : Analogy

Hazardous reactionsIncompatible with oxidizing materials.

11. Toxicological information ____________________________________________

Acute oral toxicity : LD50 4.000 mg/kg (rat)Source : IUCLID Information based on the main component.

Acute inhalation toxicity : not determined

Acute dermal toxicity : not determined

Irritant effect on skin : non-irritant

Irritant effect on eyes : slightly irritant

Sensitization : not determined

Mutagenicity : not determined

RemarksVapours and mists cause irritation/burns to eyes and the respiratory tractThere is a possibility of kidney damagePoisoning affects the central nervous systemThe data on toxicology refer to the active ingredient.

12. Ecological information _______________________________________________

Biodegradability : 90 %good degradabilityMethod : Zahn-Wellens test

Fish toxicity : LC50 1.500 mg/l (golden orfe)

RemarksIf handled correctly it causes no disturbance in treatment plants. The ecological number information is based on the undiluted product.

13. Disposal considerations _____________________________________________

ProductIn accordance with local authority regulations, take to special waste incineration plant



14. Transport information _______________________________________________

ADR not restricted

ADNR not restricted

RID not restricted

I AT A not restricted

IMDG not restricted

15. Regulatory information ______________________________________________

Labelling in accordance with EC-Directiveshazard warning labelling compulsoryClassification according to the calculation procedure of the Dangerous Preparations Directive(1999/45/EC).

Hazard symbolsXn Harmful

Hazardous component(s) to be indicated on labelEthanediol

R phrases22 Harmful if swallowed.

S phrases26 In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water and

seek medical advice.28.2 After contact with skin, wash immediately with water and soap.37/39 Wear suitable gloves and eye/face protection.

16. Other information ___________________________________________________

Text of the R-phrases which are allocated to the ingredients/components mentioned in section 2 of this Safety Data Sheet.

22 Harmful if swallowed.25 Toxic if swallowed.50 Very toxic to aquatic organisms.8 Contact with combustible material may cause fire.

The data are based on the current state of our knowledge, and are intended to describe the product with regard to the requirements of safety. The data should not be taken to imply any guarantee of a particular or general specification. It is the responsibility of the user of the product to ensure to his satisfaction that the product is suitable for the intended purpose and method of use. We do not accept responsibility for any harm caused by the use of this information. In all cases, our general conditions of sale apply.

1, Chemical Product Company Information

1.1 Product identifierHeat Sink Compound 70-xx xx - packing identification

1.2 Manufacturer's andAOS Thermal Compounds22 Meridian Road, Suit 6Eatontown, New Jersey 07724 / USAPhone 001(732)389-5514

1.2 SupplierGLT Gesellschaft fur Lottechnik mbHHabermehistr, 50D-75172 PforzheimPhone +49(0)7231/9209-0 Fax +49(0)7231/9209-39 www.git~pforzheim.de [email protected]

2. Product Use:Heat sink compound

2.1 INGREDIENTS 1 % or greaterZinc Oxide EG# 215-222-5 CAS# 1314-13-2 > 70 % / Gew.others -. - Trade SecretBased on the data to the manufacturer, this product is not considered a hazard under OSHA Hazard Communication Stndard 29 CFR1910.1200, The Zinc Oxide in this product is in paste form and will not pose a dust hazard.

2.2 Hazardous ingredientsUnder normal conditions this material is not harmful.

3. IDENTIFICATION3.1 Hazards

Eye contact: May cause mild eye irritation. Skin contact: May cause mild skin irritation. Inhalation: Unknown Ingestion: Unknown

3.2 SAFETY RISK'SThere are no safety risks know.

3.3 EnvironmentKeep out of waterways.

3.4 CopiousUnder normal conditions this material is not harmful.

4. FIRST AID4.1 Inhalation

This product has a low vapor pressure and is not exprected to present an inhalation exposure.4.2 Skin Contact

Wash affected area with plenty of warm, soapy water. If irritation develops, seek medical attention.4.3 Eye Contact

Remove contact lenses. Immediately flush with copius amounts of water for at least 15 minutes.Seek medical attention.

4.4 INGESTIONDo not induce vomitting due to aspiration hazard. Seek immediate medical attention.

5. FIRE FIGHTING5.1 Extinguish Means:

Foarn, Dry Chemical, CO2

5.2 Unsuitable extinguisher media:Water

5.3 Hazardous Decombosition Products:None known

5.4 Firefighting EquipmentIf large quantities are on fire self-contained breathing apparatus should be used for enclosed or confined areas.

5.5 Unusual Fire and Explosions Hazards:None known

6. Accidental Release Measures6.1 Steps to be taken if material is spilled or released:

Scoop up paste and deposit in appropriate and properly labeled waste containers.6.2 Environment

Keep away from waterways.7. Handling and Storage7.1 Handling

Keep it away from sewage system, waters and soil. Keep containers closed. Avoid inhalation of fumes and vapor, contact with eyes, skin and clothing.

2093.8468.72 - 1 - E-1

Material Safety Data SheetAccording to 91/155 EEC

Printing date 07.04.2005 Reviewed on 24.03.2005

1 Identification of the substance/preparation and of the company)undertaking _________________________________

• Product details

Trade name: WOLFRASYN ULAF

Article number: 003001• Application of the substance / the preparation Grease

• Manufacturer/Supplier:KLUBER LUBRICATION MUNCHEN KG Geisenhausenerstrasse 7 D-81379 Munchen Tel.: 0049(0)897876-0 Fax: 0049(0)897876-333 Notfallauskunft: 0049 (0) 897876-700

• Further information obtainable from: Material Compliance Management

2 Composition/information on ingredients ___________________________

• Chemical characterizationDescription:polyalkylene glycol oil solid lubricant




(Contd. of page 1)

• Classification system:The classification is according to the latest editions of the EU-lists, and extended by company and literature data.

4 First-aid measures ______________________________________________

• After inhalation: Supply fresh air; consult doctor in case of complaints.After skin contact:Wash off with soap and plenty of water. If skin irritation continues, consult a doctor.

• After eye contact:Rinse opened eye for several minutes under running water. If symptoms persist, consult a doctor.

• After swallowing: If symptoms persist consult doctor.

5 Fire-fighting measures __________________________________________

Suitable extinguishing agents:Water hazeFoamFire-extinguishing powderCarbon dioxide

• For safety reasons unsuitable extinguishing agents: Water with full jet• Special hazards caused by the substance, its products of combustion or resulting

gases:In case of fire, the following can be released:Carbon monoxide (CO)Hydrocarbons

• Protective equipment:Do not inhale explosion gases or combustion gases. Standard procedure for chemical fires.

• Additional informationCool endangered receptacles with water spray.Dispose of fire debris and contaminated fire fighting water in accordance with officialregulations.

6 Accidental release measures ______________

• Person-related safety precautions: Not required.Measures for environmental protection:Do not allow to enter sewers/ surface or ground water.

• Measures for cleaning/collecting:Pick up mechanically.Dispose of the material collected according to regulations.

7 Handling and storage ______________________ ______________________

Handling:Information for safe handling: No special measures required.

(Contd. on page 3)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------GB —



(Contd. of page 2)

• Information about fire -and explosion protection: No special measures required.

• Storage:• Requirements to be met by storerooms and receptacles:

Store in cool, dry conditions in well sealed receptacles.• Information about storage in one common storage facility:

Store away from foodstuffs.Store away from oxidizing agents.Further information about storage conditions: None.

8 Exposure controls/personal protection _____________________________

Additional information about design of technical facilities: No further data; see item 7.

• Ingredients with limit values that require monitoring at the workplace:The product does not contain any relevant quantities of materials with critical values that have to be monitored at the workplace.

• Additional information: The lists valid during the making were used as basis.

Personal protective equipment:General protective and hygienic measures:Immediately remove all soiled and contaminated clothingAvoid contact with the skin.Be sure to clean skin thoroughly after work and before breaks.

• Respiratory protection: Not required.• Protection of hands: Oil resistant gloves• Material of gloves

The selection of the suitable gloves does not only depend on the material, but also on further marks of quality and varies from manufacturer to manufacturer. As the product is a preparation of several substances, the resistance of the glove material can not be calculated in advance and has therefore to be checked prior to the application.

• Penetration time of glove materialThe exact break trough time has to be found out by the manufacturer of the protective gloves and has to be observed.

• Eye protection: Not required.

9 Physical and chemical properties __________________________

• General Information

Form: PastyColour: BlackOdour: Product specific

• Change in condition

Drip point: -°C (DIN ISO 2176)

• Flash point: Not applicable.

• Danger of explosion: Product does not present an explosion hazard.

Density at 20°C: ~ 1.45 g/cm3

(Contd. on page 4)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------GB —

/5




(Contd. of page 3)

Solubility in / Miscibility withwater: Insoluble.

10 Stability and reactivity ___________________________________________

Thermal decomposition / conditions to be avoided:No decomposition if used and stored according to specifications.

• Materials to be avoided: oxidizing agents• Dangerous reactions No dangerous reactions known.• Dangerous decomposition products: none under normal use

11 Toxicological information ____________________________________

• Acute toxicity:• Sensitization: Sensitization possible through skin contact.

Additional toxicological information:The product shows the following dangers according to the calculation method of the GeneralEU Classification Guidelines for Preparations as issued in the latest version:IrritantProlonged skin contact may cause skin irritation and/or dermatitis.

12 Ecological information ______________________

• Ecotoxical effects:• Behaviour in sewage processing plants: The product can be mechanically separated.• General notes:

Harmful to aquatic organismsDo not allow product to reach ground water, water course or sewage system.

13 Disposal considerations __________________________________

• Product:• Recommendation Can be incinerated in accordance with local and national regulations.• Waste disposal key:

For this product no waste disposal key according the European Waste Catalogue (EWC) can be determined, as only the purpose of application defined by the user enables an allocation. The waste code number has to be determined in accordance with the local waste disposer.

Uncleaned packaging:• Recommendation:

Empty contaminated packagings thoroughly. They may be recycled after thorough and proper cleaning.

14 Transport information ___________ ......

Land transport ADR/RID (cross-border) ADR/RID class: -

(Contd. on page 5)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------GB —

CHAPTER 2

DESIGN AND CHARACTERISTICS

CONTENTS

1 DESIGN AND FUNCTION.................................................................11.1 Power Distribution...........................................................................................5

1.1.1 Main Switch (Power Supply Terminal) .......................................................6

1.1.2 Motor Protection Switches.........................................................................7

1.1.3 Automatic Line Fuses................................................................................7

1.1.4 Power Distribution Board...........................................................................8

1.1.5 Auxiliary Power Supply..............................................................................9

1.1.6 Optional Socket......................................................................................10

1.1.7 Grounding Bolt .......................................................................................10

1.2 Transmitter Control Unit..............................................................................111.2.1 R&S NetCCU800...................................................................................11

1.2.2 Rack Controller.......................................................................................12

1.3 Connection Panel ...........................................................................................13

1.4 Exciter unit.......................................................................................................151.4.1 Exciter ...................................................................................................15

1.4.2 Exciter Switch.........................................................................................15

1.5 Output Stage Unit.........................................................................................161.5.1 Amplifier ................................................................................................18

1.5.2 6-way Combiner Unit...............................................................................181.5.2.1 Splitter Function Module....................................................................................191.5.2.2 6-way Combiner Function Module....................................................................191.5.2.3 Power Absorber Function Module.....................................................................20

1.6 Directional Coupler Lightning Protection System .....................................211.6.1 Lightning Protection.................................................................................21

1.6.2 Directional Coupler.................................................................................22

1.7 Harmonics Filter..............................................................................................23

1.8 Bandpass Filter...............................................................................................24

1.9 RF Connector..................................................................................................25

1.10 Cooling System in the Transmitter.............................................................26

1.10.1 Coolant Inlet/Outlet.................................................................................27

1.10.2 Coolant Distributor/Coolant Collector.......................................................28

1.10.3 Amplifier Coolant Inlet/Outlet...................................................................29

1.10.4 Temperature Sensors..............................................................................30

1.10.5 Ventilation Unit .......................................................................................30

2 SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................312.1 Transmitting System in General .................................................................31

2.2 Transmitting System - Specifically NH8606XC ...........................................33

• 4

1 Design and Function

The liquid-cooled R&S NH8600 transmitter family is designed for transmitting analog TV signals in the I/V and V frequency bands (UHF). The following standards can be transmit-ted.

O Analog TV standards (G / K / I / I+ / N and M)

O Color transmission systems (SECAM, PAL, NTSC)

O Sound modulation methods (FM single-sound, FM dual-sound in accordance with IRT standard, NICAM dual-sound).

LDMOS transistor-based amplifiers ensure high output power while requiring only minimum space.

The type designation of the transmitter depends on the number of built-in amplifiers.

R&S NH8606XC

Number of amplifiers.................................6

Output power at transmitter output with 4-cavity coaxial channel bandpass filter (standard):

Psync screen power.................................10000 W

Sound power on single-sound..............-10 dB

Sound power on dual-sound ................-13 dB/-20 dB

Output power at transmitter output with 6-cavity coaxial channel bandpass filter:

Psync screen power..............................9700 W

Sound power on single-sound..............-10 dB

Sound power on dual-sound ................-13 dB/-20 dB

This chapter describes the transmitter's design and the functions of its components.

• «

3) Transmitter control unit4) Output stage5) Power distribution6) RF connector7) Directional coupler lightning protection system (measurement coupler)8) Combiner unit9) Harmonics filter10) Coolant inlet11) Coolant outlet12) Coolant distributor13) Amplifier coolant inlet14) Amplifier coolant outlet15) Coolant collector16) Ventilation unit

The R&S NH8606 transmitter consists of the following units and modules:

O Power distribution

- Main switch

- Motor protection switches

- Automatic line fuses

- Power distribution board

- Auxiliary power supply

- Optional socket

- Grounding bolt

O Transmitter control unit components

- R&SNetCCU800

- Rack controller

O Connection panel

O Exciter unit

- Exciters (1 or 2)

- Exciter switch (for exciter standby)

O Output stage unit

- Amplifiers

- Multiple combiner unit consisting of:

Splitter function module

Multiple combiner function module

Power absorber function module

O Harmonics filter

O Bandpass filter (4-cavity/6-cavity - optional) O Directional coupler

lightning protection system (measurement coupler)

- Lightning arrester

- Directional coupler

- Unassigned test point

O RF connector

O Cooling system

- Coolant inlet/outlet

- Coolant distributor

- Amplifier coolant inlet and coolant outlet

- Coolant collector

- Temperature sensors (2)

- Ventilation unit

O Transformer (optional)

1.1 Power Distribution

1) Main switch (power supply terminal)2) Motor protection switches3) Automatic line fuse4) Power distribution board5) Auxiliary power supply6) Grounding bolt

The power distribution module is designed for a maximum current load of 100 A and con-tains the following components:

O Main switch (power supply terminal)

O Motor protection switches

O Automatic line fuses

O Power distribution board

O Auxiliary power supply unit

O Optional socket

O Grounding bolt

1.1.1 Main Switch (Power Supply Terminal)

The main switch fully disconnects the transmitter rack from the AC power supply. It is con-nected to three-phase alternating current and a neutral conductor. The size of the main switch installed depends on the transmitter power.

Note The main switch can be locked with a padlock to prevent it from being switched on/off byunauthorized persons.

Motor protection switches act as overload protection for the downstream supply cables and amplifiers, and are used for disconnecting the amplifiers from the power supply. As shipped from the factory, the number of motor protection switches matches the number of built-in amplifiers. The arrangement of amplifiers and motor protection switches is shown on the front panel.

The thermally activated overcurrent release of the motor protection switches is factory-set.

1.1.3 Automatic Line Fuses

The automatic line fuses are used to protect the power lines, e.g. in the event of a short-circuit, and to disconnect the following units from the AC supply:

O R&SNetCCU800(F1)

O EXCITER A/B (F2/F3)

O Optional add-on equipment (F4)

O Auxiliary power supply unit (F5)

O Pump unit (F6)

O Cooler (F7)

O Control unit (F8)

- External cooling system

- Control unit for dummy antennas

1.1.2 Motor Protection Switches

The power distribution board is directly connected to the automatic line fuses and contains both transmitter-internal cables (hardwired) and transmitter-external interfaces (to which external units can be connected).

Note The appropriate unequipped plugs are part of the transmitter and are located at the as-

signed positions.

The following unit are or can be connected to the power distribution board:

O R&SNetCCU800

O R&S SX800 (A/B) exciter

O Auxiliary power supply unit

O Optional multipoint connector for add-on equipment

O Pump unit

O Cooler

O External cooling system (optional, via switched phase)

O External dummy antenna (optional, via switched phase)

O Continuous power supply for external absorber fan

O RF interlock loop

O Signal inputs for rack/system absorber faults

O Signal input for external cooling fault

O Rack controller connection

1.1.4 Power Distribution Board

The primary task of the auxiliary power supply unit (+12 V) is to provide a redundant power supply to additional control components in the transmitter. The necessary redundancy for this auxiliary voltage is generated by the exciters, which also supply +12 V voltage.

The following modules are powered by the auxiliary power supply unit:

O Rack controllerO CAN-bus interface of amplifiersO Switching relay in power distributionO RF rectifier/directional coupler with active transmitter standby

1.1.5 Auxiliary Power Supply

The optional socket is not connected with the transmitter network and must be supplied by means of a separate power lead.

1.1.7 Grounding Bolt

The grounding bolt connects the rack with the station's main grounding terminal.

Note The rack must be connected to the main grounding terminal in all cases.

1.1.6 Optional Socket

Fig. 12 Units used for transmitter control

1) R&SNetCCU8002) Rack controller

The transmitter control unit contains the following components:

O R&SNetCCU800 O

Rack controller

They monitor and control the transmitter to ensure that it functions properly.

1.2.1 R&S NetCCU800

The R&S NetCCU800 transmitter control unit handles internal and external communica-tions, including all control functions. The R&S NetCCU800 shows the current status of the transmitter system on a straightforward color display.

Note For detailed information on the R&S NetCCU800, refer to the R&S NetCCU800 manual.

1 -2 Transmitter Control Unit

The rack controller monitors, controls, and protects the transmitter rack. It performs the fol-lowing functions:

O Ensures uninterrupted transmitter operation if the R&S NetCCU800 fails

O Controls data exchange between the R&S NetCCU800 and other components via CAN bus

O Monitors the outlet temperature of the coolant

O Records measured values for coolant inlet/outlet temperature

O Monitors the pump unit and cooler fans

O Transfers messages

O Receives and sends rack commands (e.g. transmitter ON -> amplifier ON, cooling sys-tem ON)

O Configures the test points (mode-dependent)

O Switches off the rack if a malfunction occurs (e.g. failure of the cooling system)

The following units and modules can be connected to the rack controller:

O R&S NetCCU800 via CAN bus

O Exciters (1-2)

O External cooling system

O Amplifiers


O Temperature sensors

O Power test points

Note The rack controller cannot be operated directly. It is operated via the R&S NetCCU800.

1.2.2 Rack Controller

The following table lists all the connectors that you may need to assign.

Connector Description

CANBUS X101A CAN bus data connection for additional racks or output stage A

CANBUS X101B CAN bus data connection for additional racks or output stage B

CANBUS X103A CAN bus data connection for external pump in the case of high-power transmitters

CANBUS X103B CAN bus data connection for further racks (external pump on a number of racks) or on single-rack transmitters, CAN bus termination

RS232 X232 Data connection for external BITBUS interface

ETHERNET (X100A) Remote LAN connector or system LAN connector, e.g. for N+1

SYNC EXTERN 1 Input for external sync signal (for encryption)


TS1 / TS2 Transport stream inputs (digital TV)

TS3 / TS4 Additional connectors to TS1 and TS2 in the case of hierarchical coding

AF1 MONITORING Test output for measuring the input signal at input AF1



AF1 Audio input for sound 1


AF3 Broadband audio input for TV standard NTSC

10 MHz REF INPUT Input for 10 MHz reference for synchronizing the output signal

1PPS MONITORING Test output 1PPS (1PPS = 1 pulse per second)

1PPS EXT INPUT Input for 1 PPS signal, reference signal for DVB-T in SFN mode

NICAM DATA INPUT ATV digital sound information for second sound channel

NICAM IF INPUT Intermediate frequency input for NICAM

TS1/2 MONITORING Monitor output for selected TS signal of inputs 1 and 2


VF INMONITORING Test output for measuring the signal at VF1

VF1 Video input

VF2 Video input, low priority

Fig. 16 Exciter unit equipment

1) SX 800 exciter2) Exciter switch (exciter standby only)

The exciter unit contains the following components:

O Exciter

O Exciter switch (in case of exciter standby)

1.4.1 Exciter

The SX800 exciter is responsible for all signal processing from the video/audio input signal up to a standard-compliant RF output signal.

Note For detailed information about the exciter, refer to the exciter manual.

1.4.2 Exciter Switch

1.4 Exciter unit

• 4

Note In transmitters with the exciter standby option (two exciters), the exciter switch is located

behind the two exciters.

The exciter switch switches to the standby exciter in the following cases:

O When the main exciter malfunctions

O On manual switchover via the R&S NetCCU800

The exciter switch is controlled by the R&S NetCCU800.

1.5 Output Stage Unit

Fig. 19 Modules of output stage unit

1) Amplifiers2) Splitter3) Combiner4) Load-balancing resistors

The output stage unit contains the following components:

• «

O Amplifier

O 6-way combiner unit consisting of:

- Splitter function module

- 6-way combiner function module

- Power absorber function module

The diagram below shows the entire RF path from X.E. (splitter input) up to X.A. (combiner output).

The R&S VH8600A1 liquid-cooled amplifier operates in the broadband range from 470 MHz to 862 MHz (UHF bands IV/V) and is suitable for both analog and digital signals without needing to be adjusted.

The amplifiers boost the signals from the exciter that are divided by the splitter. The inputs of the downstream multiple combiner are connected directly to the amplifier outputs and merge the amplifier output power signals. The amplifiers in a transmitter rack are controlled by the rack controller. Measured values and status information are recorded by the rack controller via CAN bus and forwarded to the R&S NetCCU800 transmitter control unit.

Note Detailed information about the amplifier can be found in the amplifier manual.

1.5.2 6-way Combiner Unit

1.5.1 Amplifier

Fig. 22 Modules of combiner unit

1) Splitter2) Combiner3) Load-balancing resistors

• 4

The 6-way combiner unit contains the following function modules:

O Splitter

O Combiner

O Load-balancing resistors (power absorbers)

The function modules listed above are built into or on the 6-way combiner.

1.5.2.1 Splitter Function Module

The splitter distributes the output signal from the exciter to the individual amplifiers. In ad-dition, an integrated attenuator that is dependent on the number of outputs ensures that the RF signal is output at the right power level.

The splitter is a broadband unit that operates in the frequency range 470 MHz to 862 MHz.

The number of splitter outputs depends on the number of amplifiers.

1.5.2.2 6-way Combiner Function Module

The RF power produced by the amplifiers is merged by the combiner such that the phase is correct.

The combiner consists of a cascade of 90° couplers which are fitted in a common housing.

Fig. 23 Power absorber function module

1) Power absorber2) Absorber resistor3) Additional absorber on power coupler rear panel

The power absorber function module is located on the coolant collector together with the load balancing resistors for the 6-way combiner unit. When the combiner is being operated in unbalanced mode (e.g. with one or more amplifiers disabled or removed) the non-com-binable component of the RF power is expelled as additional heat energy via the coolant collector.

The power absorber function module comprises, as well as the load balancing resistors, a liquid-cooled absorber located on the power coupler rear panel. This additional absorber acts as a load balancing resistor for the last switching stage. The coolant flow through the absorber is 2 l/min.

1.5.2.3 Power Absorber Function Module

The GD858 directional coupler/lightning protection system (combined lightning protection with test points) is located upstream of the RF output of the transmitter and contains the following components:

O Lightning protection

O Directional coupler with N connector

O Directional coupler with SMA connector

O Directional coupler/rectifier unit for forward and reflected power

1.6.1 Lightning Protection

The lightning protection protects the transmitter from damage caused by a lightning strike.

1.6 Directional Coupler Lightning Protection System

The forward and reflected power are detected at the transmitter output by means of the fre-quency-compensated directional couplers P14A (forward) and P14B (reflected). The fre-quency-compensated directional couplers output a power-proportional DC voltage to the R&S NetCCU800 transmitter control unit via the integrated rectifier circuit. The DC voltages for forward and reflected power are displayed in the R&S NetCCU800 and also used as an S measurement for VSWR monitoring (reflection from the antenna).

Directional coupler P14C is an unassigned test point that can be used either as a forward or reflected power test point.

The P14D directional coupler is used in analog TV transmitters for monitoring and display-ing the screen power and sound power. For this purpose, the test signal decoupled from the directional coupler is fed back to the RF monitor in the R&S SX800 exciter.

Note The transmitter is switched off due to reflection if the reflected value exceeds 2 % of theforward value after being checked three times.

1.6.2 Directional Coupler

1.7 Harmonics Filter

The R&S FD845 harmonics filter suppresses harmonic oscillations. It is a 23rd order Che-byshev filter which uses coaxial technology so that it is suitable for the rigid line system. The diameter of the filter depends on the transmitter power. In the signal path, the harmonics filter is located directly after the combiner.

Note The harmonics filter is varnished to reduce the surface temperature.

A UHF channel bandpass filter is provided downstream of the amplifiers to reduce out-of-band interference. In the signal path, the bandpass filter is located before the harmonics filter.

1.9 RF Connector

The RF connector is on the transmitter roof (alternatively, it can also be positioned at the bottom of the transmitter). The size (i.e. diameter) of the RF connector depends on the transmitter power and is 31/8 EIA at the transmitter.

Fig. 29 Cooling system in the transmitter

1) Coolant inlet2) Coolant distributor3) Amplifier coolant inlet4) Amplifier coolant outlet5) Coolant collector6) Temperature sensors (2)7) Ventilation unit8) Coolant outlet

High-power transmitters are cooled with a mixture of Antifrogen N and water (39 % and 61 % respectively). The coolant flow rate is at least 6.5 l/min (with DVB-T) and 9.0 l/min (with ATV/ATSC) per amplifier.

Note The coolant provides antifreeze protection down to -25°C; the volume of Antifrogen Nshould be increased if the equipment is to be subjected to lower temperatures.

1.10 Cooling System in the

• «

The coolant entering from the inlet pipe is distributed to the amplifier inlets by the coolant distributor. Each amplifier inlet and outlet has a stopcock to allow the coolant to be shut off. The amplifier coolant inlet and outlet are connected using quick-release couplers and are self-sealing. The coolant distributor and inlets ensure that enough coolant is supplied to each amplifier. The heated coolant is fed to the coolant collector via the outlets.

The cooling system prevents the transmitter from overheating and contains the following components:

O Coolant inlet/outlet

O Coolant distributor

O Amplifier coolant inlet and coolant outlet

O Coolant collector

O Temperature sensors (2)

O Ventilation unit

1.10.1 Coolant Inlet/Outlet

The coolant inlet and outlet are hose nozzles (11/2". The coolant hose can be directly at-tached to the hose nozzle. To allow this, the coolant inlet and outlet have an integrated hose clamp fitting.

The coolant entering from the inlet pipe is fed to the individual amplifier coolant inlets by the coolant distributor. The amplifier coolant inlets supply each amplifier with the required amount of coolant. The heated coolant is routed to the coolant collector on the opposite site of the amplifier and expelled via the coolant outlet.

Note The coolant inlets/outlets are at the top or bottom of the rack (depending on the customerorder).

1.10.2 Coolant Distributor/Coolant Collector

Fig. 31 Coolant distributor (1) and coolant collector (2)

The coolant distributor and coolant collector can serve up to 13 coolant outlets/inlets. Un-used outlets/inlets are sealed using stopper plugs. In addition, a stopcock with hose nozzle is fitted at the last outlet and inlet. This stopcock functions as a drainage tap.

Fig. 32 Amplifier coolant inlet/outlet

1) Amplifier coolant inlet2) Amplifier coolant outlet3) Stopcock

The coolant entering from the inlet pipe is distributed to the amplifier inlets by the coolant distributor. Each amplifier inlet and outlet has a stopcock to allow the coolant to be shut off. The amplifier coolant inlet and outlet are connected using quick-release couplers and are self-sealing.

1.10.3 Amplifier Coolant Inlet/Outlet

The temperature sensors measure the absolute coolant inlet and outlet temperature in °C. The temperature is displayed on the R&S NetCCU800and used for monitoring purposes in the rack controller.

Note If the coolant outlet temperature is higher than 62 °C, the rack controller switches off therack to prevent overheating.

1.10.5 Ventilation Unit

Fig. 34 Bleeder unit

There is also a bleeder unit on top of the coolant collector. The bleeder unit is used for au-tomatic bleeding of the coolant.

1.10.4 Temperature

• 4

Parallel remote-control interface............Floating contacts for messages and commands (optional)

BIT bus................................................Bus interface in accordance with IEC 864-2(optional)

Video transmission

Group delay..............................................±30 ns up to 4.8 MHz

Receiver pre-equalization..........................In accordance with CCIR Rep. 624-4, bridge-able

Impulse response

Field-bar tilt at 50 Hz ........................... < 2%

Field-bar tilt at 15 Hz ........................... <2%

2T amplitude........................................ < 2%

2TKfactor........................................... <2%

C/L amplitude ...................................... < 2%

Nonlinearity

Luminance........................................... < 10%

Carrier phase

Picture area........................................<1°

Sync pulse range................................ < 2°

Diff. gain in accordance with CCIR330 . < 5%

Diff. phase in accordance with CCIR330 ± 3°

AM S/N ratio (10/75)

Unweighted ......................................... ≥56dB

Weighted ............................................. ≥63dB

Hurrippup to 1 kHz.....................................≥46dB

Intercarrier S/N ratio (500 Hz ref. to 30 kHz deviation /10/75)

Sine 100kHz.......................................≥46dB

SW picture, H+V..................................≥54 dB

FBuK test pattern.................................≥ 50 dB

Audio transmission

Frequency response 30 Hz to 15 kHz ....... ± 0.3 dB

Total harmonic distortion 30 Hz to 15 kHz . < 0.3%

(ref. to 30 kHz deviation)

FM S/N (ref. to 30 kHz deviation)

Unweighted...........................................> 56 dB

Weighted .............................................. ≥60dB

AM S/N

Synchronous AM .................................. ≥ 40 dB (typ. for dual sound)

Residual AM ......................................... ≥48dB

Spurious frequencies

Harmonic emissions .................................. ≥70dB

Noise power ratio....................................... ≥ 130 dBc

2.2 Transmitting System - Specifically NH8606XC

Number of amplifiers..................................6

Output power at transmitter output (with bandpass filter)

Psync with 4-cavity coaxial channel bandpass filter

..................................................................10000W,single sound (-10 dB) / dual sound (-13/-20 dB)


.................................................................9700 W,

single sound (-10 dB) / dual sound (-13/-20 dB)

Power consumption of transmitter typ. 24 kW

Power consumption of cooling system

Pump unit .............................................approx. 200 W

Cooler...................................................approx. 600 W

Recommended transmitter protection/supply cable

NH fuse, gG..........................................3x 80 A

Line cross-section.................................5x 25 mm2

Siemens automatic power cutout .........3x 80 A

(e.g. type 3VL2705-1DC33-....)

Overload trip setting .............................70 A

Short-circuit trip setting..........................800 A

Line cross-section.................................5x 16 mm2

Coolant flow rate........................................approx. 56 l/min

Heat dissipation at typical power consumption

To surrounding air.................................approx. 800 W

Fed to outside.......................................approx. 16 kW

Dimensions (Wx H x D) ............................600 mm x 2000 mm x 1100 mm

Total weight (approx.) ................................540 kg (without transport packaging and cooling system)

RF output connector..................................31/8" EIA

RF test-point connector..............................N

CHAPTER 3

INSTALLATION

CONTENTS

1 Equipment Supplied - R&S NH8606XC .......................................1

1.1 Integrated Transmitter Components .............................................................1

1.2 Transmitter Components Supplied Separately ............................................3

1.3 Accessories ..................................................................................................3

2 Overview......................................................................................4

3 Required Tools.............................................................................5

4 R&S NH8606 Transmitter - General Information .........................6

5 Setting Up Transmitter.................................................................7

5.1 Preparations................................................................................................7

5.1.1 Checking General Suitability of Location....................................................7

5.1.2 Preparing Floor Openings (only if Feed and Return pass through Floor) ....7

5.1.3 Arranging Connections on Transmitter Top ...............................................9

5.2 Erecting Transmitter Rack...........................................................................11

5.3 Aligning Transmitter Rack..........................................................................11

5.4 Removing Front Panels/Rear Panel............................................................11

5.5 Unpacking Components..............................................................................12

6 Optional Rack Components.......................................................13

6.1 Installing AC transformer .........................................................................13

7 Installing UHF Channel Bandpass Filter ...................................14

8 Cooling Circuit (Transmitter Rack) ............................................17

8.1 Connecting Coolant Hose to Transmitter ..................................................17

8.2 Connecting R&S ZK810 Pump Unit to Transmitter Rack (Power and DataConnection)...............................................................................................18

8.3 Connecting Cooler to Transmitter Rack.....................................................21

9 AC Power Supply.......................................................................23

9.1 Connecting Transmitter Ground ................................................................24

9.2 Connecting supply cable............................................................................24

• <

9.3 Connecting External Equipment..................................................................26

10 Amplifiers ....................................................................................28

10.1Preparing to Install Amplifiers .......................................................................28

10.2 Installing Amplifiers .....................................................................................29

11 RF Output .................................................................................................31

11.1 Connecting Antenna .................................................................................31

11.2 Connecting Dummy Antenna ...................................................................32

12 Connection Panel ........................................................................34

1 Equipment Supplied - R&S NH8606XC

Transmitters in the R&S NH8600EC/VC transmitter family are differentiated by the version type or model type of the following kits:

O NX8600 power kit O

Power distribution kit O

RF power kit

1.1 Integrated Transmitter Components

In the case of R&S NH8606 transmitters, the following units and modules are already in-stalled in the rack (depending on the options):

Quan-tity

Part name Type ID

1 R&S NetCCU800 R&S NetCCU800 2095.8007.02

1 -2 TV exciter SX800 R&S SC800 2095.1502.20

Transmitter type:R&S NH8606EC R&S NH8606VC

Quantity of R&S SC8001 2

1 Installation kit SX800 R&S ZR800T1 2099.1007.22

1 NX8600 power kit consisting of:

R&S ZR810S1 2098.5109.26

Basic rack R&S KG860H1 2096.0800.02

6-way combiner R&S BV8606H1 2101.2000.77

Rack controller ------ 2096.4505.02

1 Power distribution kit consisting of:

R&S ZR810S2 2098.5209.16

Auxiliary power supply ------ 1081.0254.00

Power distribution board N ------ 2096.3550.02

Various power distribution compo-nents

1 RF power kit a) consisting of:

R&S ZR810R1 2098.5250.30

Harmonics filter R&S FD845 2100.4500.03

RL58 directional coupler R&S GD858 2102.6000.44

Quan-tity

Part name Type ID

Various RF brackets, rigid lines and couplers

1 RF filter bank b)

consisting of: R&SZR810F1 2103.4000.30

RL77 trimming line 2100.4851.02

Harmonics filter R&S FD845HP 2100.4500.02

Directional coupler R&S GD858 2102.6000.44

Various RF brackets, rigid lines and couplers

1 SX800 exciter kit c) R&S ZR800V1 2099.1507.03

Enclosed loose

1 Strain relief for AC supply feed

2 Installation kit for DN40 coolant hose

------ 3559.6073.00

Options

1 Hazard button kit (emergency OFF) VAR: 11 = 1 button on front VAR: 12 = Button on front and rear VAR: 13 = Button on rear

R&S ZR800N1 2099.4506.VAR

1 Parallel remote control interface R&S ZR800F1 3562.4210.02

1 External socket kit R&S ZR800Z1 2099.3000.02

1 Internal socket kit VAR: 02 = Triple grounding-type connector VAR: 04 = Quadruple grounding-type connector

R&S ZR800Z2 2099.31 OO.VAR

1 TS distributor kit VAR: 10 = 1 ASI distributor VAR: 20 = 2 ASI distributors (TS3/4)

R&S ZR800Z4 2099.3300.VAR

a) With external RF bandpass onlyb) With internal RF bandpass onlyc) With exciter reserve only

Note Cable sets, mechanical brackets, coolant distributors, coolant hoses and small mechanicalparts are not listed in the table.

1.2 Transmitter Components Supplied Separately

The transmitter contains the following components that must be installed in the rack after delivery.

Quan-tity Part name Type ID

6 UHF amplifier R&S VH8600A1 2100.6002.02

Options

1 UHF channel bandpass filter 10 kW R&S FH8075A4 2103.4575.00

1.3 Accessories

The RF components in the accessory list are used as measurement adapters for trouble-shooting and when putting units into operation.

Quan-tity Designation Type ID

1 Accessories for NX86XX consisting of:

ZR810-Z 2099.5102.00

2 Anti-topple attachment (rack con-nector)

-------- 6132.6184.00

4 Spacer ring -------- 6135.9410.00

2 Drain hose reinforcing piece 1 m -------- 2099.2161.00

1 RL58M-7/16 Bu coupler -------- 2094.1109.00

1 RL58 rigid line (external conductor) -------- 2052.3090.12

1 RL58 rigid line (internal conductor) -------- 2052.3090.13

1 RL58M/RL77M coupler -------- 2073.0703.00

1 Rigid line kit for ZR704B -------- 2089.4990.00

2 Overview

The transmitter can be installed by following the basic sequence given below:

O Set up transmitter

- Check general suitability of location

- Prepare floor openings (only if feed and return pass through floor)

- Arrange connections on transmitter top

- Erect transmitter rack

- Align transmitter rack

- Remove front panels and rear panel

- Unpack components

O Install AC transformer (optional, possible with external channel bandpass filter only) O

Install UHF channel bandpass filter O Cooling circuit (transmitter rack)

- Connect the coolant hoses to the transmitter rack

- Connect the electrical connections (power and data connections) to the R&S ZK810pump unit

- Connect the electrical connections (power and data connections) to the cooler unit

O AC power supply

- Connect transmitter ground

- Connect supply cable

- Connect external equipment

O Amplifiers

- Prepare to install amplifiers

- Install amplifiers

O RF output

- Connect antenna

- Connect dummy antenna

O Connect the modulation/reference signals

O Connect the telecontrol system to the transmitter system

/Vote Detailed information on the transmitter installation procedure can be found in the followingchapters and in the description of the R&S ZK810 pump unit.

3 Required Tools

You will need the following tools to install the transmitter:

Tool Type Size

Screwdriver Torx No. 8



Screwdriver Philips No. 1

Screwdriver Flat-tipped No. 1

Screwdriver Flat-tipped No. 3

Hexagon socket No. 3

Hexagon socket No. 5

Open-end wrench Width across flats 13mm (2 pcs)

Open-end wrench Width across flats 10 mm

Spirit level

Metal cutting saw (to cut coolant hose to size)

Note The table lists the basic tools required for installation of the transmitter rack (not for flooropenings, base frame, and so on).

4 R&S NH8606 Transmitter- General Information

Number of amplifiers.................................6

Output power at transmitter output (with bandpass filter)


..................................................................10000W,single sound (-10 dB) / dual sound (-13/-20 dB)

Psync witn 6-cavity coaxial channel bandpass filter

..................................................................9700 W,

single sound (-10 dB)/dual sound (-13/-20 dB)

Power consumption of transmitter typ. 24 kW

Power consumption of cooling system

Pump unit ...........................................approx. 200 W

Cooler.................................................approx. 600 W


NH fuse, gG.........................................3x 80 A

Line cross-section................................5x 25 mm2

Siemens automatic power cutout .........3x 80 A

(e.g. type 3VL2705-1DC33-....)

Overload trip setting ............................70 A

Short-circuit trip setting........................800 A


Coolant flow rate.......................................approx. 56 l/min

Heat dissipation at typical power consumption

To surrounding air................................approx. 800 W

Fed to outside......................................approx. 16 kW

Dimensions (W x H x D) .........................600 mm x 2000 mm x 1100 mm

Total weight (approx.) ...............................540 kg (without transport packaging and cooling system)

RF output connector.................................31/8" EIA

RF test-point connector.............................N

5 Setting Up Transmitter

5.1 Preparations

Before setting up and installing the transmitter, you must make the following preparations:

O Check the structure, flatness and general suitability of the installation surface O

Prepare any openings required in the floor

5.1.1 Checking General Suitability of Location

Before installing the transmitter you must check whether the floor of the building in which the transmitter is to be operated has an adequate weight to floor-area ratio.

The total weight of a transmitter rack can be as much as 640 kg when fully equipped with plug-in units (type: R&S NH8610). This results in a weight to floor-area ratio of at least 800 kg/m2.

Note The exact weight of your transmitter is given in the specifications.

The installation surface should be flat (i.e. horizontal along all axes) and measure 600 mm x 1100 mm to accommodate the transmitter rack.

Note During installation, the transmitter must be easily accessible from the front and rear. Aclearance space of at least 1.2 m is necessary in order to install all components.

*Check the structure, flatness and general suitability of the chosen installation location.

5.1.2 Preparing Floor Openings (only if Feed and Return passthrough Floor)

If cables (RF cables, control lines, etc) and the coolant hoses are to be connected to the transmitter from below, you must make appropriate floor openings in the building in which the transmitter is to be operated.

Note Further details and dimensions can be found in the drawing 2101.4503.01 DF in AppendixA "Wiring Diagrams".

5) Cooling system - inlet (bottom)6) Cooling system - outlet (bottom)

5.1.3 Arranging Connections on Transmitter Top

When making preparations for installing the station, please observe the following drawing of the transmitter roof.

Fig. 2 Transmitter roof (dimensioning drawing - viewed from above)

1) Cooling system - inlet (top)2) Cooling system - outlet (top)3) RF output (top)4) Remote-control interface (optional)5) Transmitter connection panel6) ASI distributor (optional)

• «

5.2 Erecting Transmitter Rack

The transmitter rack can be set up using lift equipment (crane). Lifting eyes are attached to the rack roof for this purpose.

WARNING!Do not stand under suspended racks, otherwise you could be crushed.Take the relevant safety precautions when climbing ladders, otherwise you could fall.

5.3 Aligning Transmitter Rack

The rack must be aligned vertically and horizontally in order to prevent distortion caused by shearing forces.

«• Use a spirit level to align the rack.Using the height-adjustable rack feet, align the rack such that it is vertical and horizontal along all axes.

5.4 Removing Front Panels/Rear Panel

Before you start installing the individual units, make sure that you have easy access to all units, connectors and interfaces needed.

•»• Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove all front panels and the rear panel from the rack. This allows you to reach all the necessary units, connectors and interfaces.

Note Pay attention to the ground connections when removing and fitting the front panels and therear panel.

5.5 Unpacking Components

Each transmitter component is packaged separately.

^ Remove the packaging and arrange all equipment so that it is ready for installation.

6 Optional Rack Components

6.1 Installing AC transformer

Note For more information about the transformer, refer to the manual on the optional AC supplytransformer.

• <

7 Installing UHF Channel Bandpass Filter

WARNING!

Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any installa-tion work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid damage to the instruments.

1. On every rigid line holder loosen the cable gland for the rigid line clamps, and the rigidline clamp fastening (hexagon socket No. 3 and Torx screwdriver No. 20).

2. Open out the RF bracket at the power coupler output. To do this, loosen the clamp usinga hexagon socket No. 5.

3. Remove the RF bracket power-coupler side and rotate it 90°.

The complete rigid line can now be slid vertically.

Fig. 5 Bandpass filter installation

4. Rotate the connector bracket for the RF bandpass filter outward.

4. Lay the RF bandpass filter on the supporting rails and slide it into the rack.

Mount it loosely on the fastening points.

6. Rotate the RF connector bracket for the RF rigid line (bandpass-side) inward until itreaches the insertion plane.

7. Slide the RF rigid line downward until the RF bracket can be engaged with the bandpassfilter.

8. Reengage the RF bracket with the combiner output. To do this, move the bracket intothe insertion plane and slide the complete rigid line assembly horizontally inward.

9. Tighten all rigid line clamps and bracket clamps.

10. Retighten all rigid line fastenings.

• «

8 Cooling Circuit (Transmitter Rack)

Note The coolant distribution system inside the transmitter is preinstalled.

8.1 Connecting Coolant Hose to Transmitter

To allow the hoses for the cooling system to be connected, an installation kit (DN40, ID No. 3559.6073.00) is supplied for each connection.

Fig. 6 Installation kit for DN40 coolant hoses

1) Shell halves (1x)2) Hexagon socket screw M6x35 (4x)3) Spacer rings (4x)4) Self-locking nut M6 (4x)5) Hexagon socket wrench No. 5 (1x)

Attach the hoses to the free end of the connecting piece as follows.

1. Push the preassembled clamp onto the end of the hose.

2. Push the end of the hose all the way onto the pipe of the connecting piece.

3. Push the clamp all the way onto the connecting piece until it engages in the groove.

4. Tighten the four M6x35 screws in a crosswise sequence.

Fig. 7 Connecting coolant hose

1) Hose2) Clamp3) Connecting piece4) Groove

8.2 Connecting R&S ZK810 Pump Unit to Transmitter Rack (Power and Data Connection)

The R&S ZK810 pump unit is supplied with power from the transmitter power supply. For this purpose, a switched 230 V output to the R&S ZK810 pump unit is provided in the trans-mitter power distribution.

Switched phase for R&S ZK810 pump unit:

X31.1 ....................................................L2 (with 10 A line fuse)

X31.2 ....................................................Neutral conductor

X31.3 ....................................................PE conductor

Recommended power cable:......................3 x 1.5 mm2

A CAN bus connection ensures reliable actuation of the R&S ZK810 pump unit. A CAN bus connector X103A is provided on the transmitter roof for this purpose.

^ Install the control and signal lines between the power distribution in the transmitter rack, the transmitter roof and the control unit in the R&S ZK810 pump unit in the way shown in the diagram below.

Fig. 8 Circuit diagram: R&S ZK810 pump unit - transmitter (AC power supply)

1) From transmitter power distribution2) Cooling pump3) Switching power supply4) Pump control unit5) Pump unit

Fig. 9 Circuit diagram: R&S ZK810 pump unit- transmitter (control lines)

1) To transmitter2) To second pump (optional)3) To cooler4) Emergency OFF switch fault5) Cooling system fault6) Pressure fault7) Ext. ON8) Pump control unit9) Pump unit10) Fault11) Pressure warning12) Shield GND13) Pressure fault14) Not used15) REP. switch ON

8.3 Connecting Cooler to Transmitter Rack

The cooler is supplied with power from the transmitter power supply. For this purpose, a switched 230 V output to the cooler is provided in the transmitter power distribution.

Switched phase for R&S ZK810 pump unit:

X32.1 ....................................................L3 (with 10 A line fuse)

X32.2 ....................................................Neutral conductor

X32.3 ....................................................PE conductor

Recommended power cable:......................3 x 1.5 mm2

A serial data connection ensures reliable actuation of the cooler. A serial data connector X13 is provided on the R&S ZK810 pump unit for this purpose.

^ Install the control and signal lines between the power distribution in the transmitter rack, the transmitter roof and the control unit of the cooler in the way shown in the diagram below.

Fig. 10 Circuit diagram: cooler - transmitter/R&S ZK810 pump unit

1) From transmitter power distribution2) Additional potential equalization3) From pump unit4) Emergency OFF switch fault

1) Cooling system fault2) Fan

• «

9 AC Power Supply

The standard components of the R&S NH8600 transmitter family are fully cabled together. Thus the rack simply needs to be connected to an AC power supply.

DANGER!Before you connect the transmitter, disconnect the power supply cable from the supply.

General requirements

The AC power load of the transmitter is determined primarily by the number of amplifiers and their output power. Furthermore, there is also a relationship between AC power con-sumption and transmission frequency.

AC supply voltage - three-phase current 230 V/400 V ± 15%

AC supply frequency 47 - 63 Hz

WARNING!Make sure that the AC supply voltage is within the specified range and check all power cables for possible damage.

R&S NH8606EC/VC

Power consumption approx.:.....................24 kW


NH fuse, gG.........................................3x 80 A


Siemens automatic power cutout ........3x 80 A

(e.g. type 3VL2705-1DC33-....)

Overload trip setting ............................70 A

Short-circuit trip setting.........................800 A


Note The recommended fuse ratings specified here apply to a power cable length of 20 m, amaximum ambient temperature of 45 °C and a minimum undervoltage of 320 V. The default setting of 10 A for the overcurrent tripping element at the motor protection switch MUST be observed.

9.1 Connecting Transmitter Ground

WARNING!The rack must be connected to the station's main ground terminal.

A grounding bolt is located on the bottom of the transmitter rack, well accessible from the front.

•»• Secure the external ground conductor (separate cable for the PE conductor connection: 1x 25 mm2) to the grounding bolt using the M8 nut.

9.2 Connecting supply cable

The external power supply cable is connected directly to the transmitter main switch. The transmitter main switch fully disconnects the rack from the power supply (L1 to L3 and N).

You should use a 5-core cable (3 phases, neutral conductor and PE conductor).

AC power supply

Main switch Q1

L1 Q1.2

L2 Q1.4

L3 Q1.6

N Q1.8

• 4

The protective earth conductor (PE) is connected to the terminal X.PE1. The PE conductor terminal is to the right of the main switch.

1. With multi-core sheathed cables, strip approx. 200 mm of the outer insulation from thecable.

2. Strip approx. 15 mm from the ends of the individual conductors; with flexible strandedconductors, you should also attach an end sleeve.

3. Attach the supplied strain relief below the main switch.

4. Insert the power cable through the strain relief up to the beginning of the outer insulation.

5. Attach the power cable securely to the strain relief.

6. Insert the individual conductors into the openings provided (see the illustration). Start onthe left (L1) and continue to the right in ascending order up to the neutral conductor.

• <

1) Openings for cable conductors

7. Secure the individual conductors using a hexagon socket wrench No. 5.

8. Check the direction of rotation with the transmitter main switch switched off (clockwise).

If the direction of phase rotation is correct, proceed to the next installation step; if it is incorrect, swap over two conductors of the cable and measure the direction of phase ro-tation again.

The main switch can be locked using a padlock to prevent it from being switched on by un-authorized persons.

«° Set the rotary knob to the OFF position, pull the green safety lever forward and attach the padlock.

9.3 Connecting External Equipment

You can connect the following units to the power distribution board of the transmitter:

O External cooling system for dummy antenna at X33 (see the section "Connecting Dum-my Antenna")

The appropriate unequipped connector is already fitted at the connector X33.

Switched phase L3: ..................................X33.4 (3 A line fuse)

Neutral conductor: ....................................X33.5

• 4

Protective earth conductor (PE): ...............X33.6

1.Remove the required unequipped connector from the power distribution board.

2.Connect the cables for the dummy antenna external cooling system to the connector.

3.Reinsert the connector into the power distribution board.

10 Amplifiers

When the transmitter is delivered, one or two exciters and an R&S NetCCU800 are already mounted in the rack. The amplifiers, however, are not and must be retrofitted in the rack.

10.1 Preparing to Install Amplifiers

WARNING!Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any installa-tion work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury caused by electric shock and damage to the units.

You must perform the following tasks before installing the amplifiers:

1. Open the coolant inlet and outlet taps for the respective slot. To do so, slide the lock up-ward.

2. Carefully remove the amplifier from its packaging.

3. Select the installation position provided for the amplifier in the transmitter rack.

10.2 Installing Amplifiers

WARNING!Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any installa tion work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury caused by electric shock and damage to the units.

CAUTION!Always install the amplifiers with the aid of a second person (the units weigh approx. 25 kg).

Note It is advisable to install the amplifiers in sequence starting at the top and working down tothe bottom.

Install the amplifiers as follows:

1. Prepare the rack and amplifier for installation. (See "Making Preparations for InstallingAmplifiers".)

2. Place the amplifier on the guide rails and slide it carefully into the rack as far as it will go.

The amplifier is guided onto the connections by means of guide pins on the rear panel.

3. Secure the amplifier in place using the two screws of the two front brackets on the rack(Torx screwdriver No. 20).

3. To install additional amplifiers, repeat steps 1 to 3.

• 4

11 RF Output

The output to the main antenna is a 3 1/8" EIA connector. It is on the left-hand side of the transmitter roof, next to the directional coupler and connecting panel.

11.1 Connecting Antenna

Connect the antenna as follows:

• »

•*• Using the 6 screws (M10, 35 mm), fasten the station-assembled coaxial cable to the EIA flange of the transmitter RF output. To prevent the screw connection from loosening, in-sert a plain washer and a spring-lock washer.

Note In regions with high humidity, the supplied rubber ring can be inserted into the groove be-tween the two EIA flanges.

11.2 Connecting Dummy Antenna

The dummy antenna is only connected when putting the system into operation or for main-tenance and repair purposes.

With some dummy antennas that have coolant monitoring and overtemperature monitoring, the monitoring equipment can be connected to the transmitter. The main protection loop (X41.1 and X41.2 in the power distribution) can be used here as a temporary measure (e.g. while the unit is being put into operation).

1. To connect the main protection loop, use the inserted jumper plug and remove the jumper.

2. Connect the monitoring cable in place of the jumper.

If you are using an RF patch panel that allows you to switch between the antenna and dum-my antenna by means of an RF U-link connector (permanent installation), you should con-nect the dummy antenna monitoring unit to the standby protection loop (X41.3 and X41.4 in the power distribution). This requires that the messages from the patch panel also be

• 4

connected to the R&S NetCCU800 transmitter control unit. Activation of the dummy antenna (via X33 in the power distribution) is then also active.

12 Connection Panel

The following table lists all the connectors that you may need to assign.


CANBUS X101A CAN bus data connection for additional racks or output stage A

CANBUS X101B CAN bus data connection for additional racks or output stage B

CANBUS X103A CAN bus data connection for external pump in the case of high-power transmitters

CANBUS X103B CAN bus data connection for further racks (external pump on a number of racks) or on single-rack transmitters, CAN bus termination

RS232 X232 Data connection for external BITBUS interface

ETHERNET (X100A) Remote LAN connector or system LAN connector, e.g. for N+1



TS1 / TS2 Transport stream inputs (digital TV)

TS3 / TS4 Additional connectors to TS1 and TS2 in the case of hierarchical coding






AF3 Broadband audio input for TV standard NTSC

10 MHz REF INPUT Input for 10 MHz reference for synchronizing the output signal

1PPS MONITORING Test output 1PPS (1PPS = 1 pulse per second)

1PPS EXT INPUT Input for 1 PPS signal, reference signal for DVB-T in SFN mode

NICAM DATA INPUT ATV digital sound information for second sound channel

NICAM IF INPUT Intermediate frequency input for NICAM



VF INMONITORING Test output for measuring the signal at VF1

VF1 Video input


VF2 Video input, low priority

CHAPTER 4

COMMISSIONING

CONTENTS

1 General Information.......................................................................5

1.1 Preparations.......................................................................................................5

1.2 Requirements.....................................................................................................6

1.3 Operating the R&S NetCCU800 .........................................................................6

2 Preparing to Put a Transmitter into Operation ............................7

2.1 Preparing for Local Operation.........................................................................7

2.2 Checking and Setting System and Operating Parameters ...........................7

2.3 R&S NetCCU800 ...........................................................................................................7

2.3.1 Switching On R&S NetCCU800 .....................................................................7

2.3.2 Changing User Type ....................................................................................7

2.3.3 Entering Basic Settings ................................................................................8

2.3.4 Setting Date and Time..................................................................................9

2.3.5 Adjusting Network Settings ........................................................................102.3.5.1 Front Ethernet Interface ....................................................................................10

2.3.5.2 Rear Ethernet Interface (NETLINK) ..................................................................11

2.4 Setting Transmitter and Amplifier Type .......................................................13

2.5 Entering Exciter Settings...............................................................................15

2.5.1 Setting TV Standard ...................................................................................15

2.5.2 Entering Video Settings...............................................................................16

2.5.3 Performing Video Control............................................................................16

2.5.4 Setting White Limiter ..................................................................................18

2.5.5 Setting Sync Pulse .....................................................................................18

2.5.6 Performing Receiver Pre-Equalization and Diplexer Peaking .....................19

2.5.7 Entering Sound Settings..............................................................................20

2.5.8 Entering Coder Settings .............................................................................21

2.5.9 Setting Sound Carrier/Nominal Deviation and Deviation Limiter..................22

2.5.10 Entering Settings for NI CAM ......................................................................24

2.5.11 Switching Off Precorrector .........................................................................25

2.5.12 Setting Transmitter Frequency ...................................................................26

2.5.13 Adjusting I/Q Modulator..............................................................................27

2.5.14 Setting RF Output.......................................................................................28

2.6 Entering Output Stage Settings ..................................................................29

2.6.1 Setting Up the Output Stage ......................................................................29

2.6.2 Setting Up Pump Unit.................................................................................31

2.7 Setting Nominal Values.................................................................................32

2.7.1 Entering Nominal Value for Vision Forward Power ....................................32

2.7.2 Entering Nominal Value for Sound Forward Power......................................33

2.8 Setting Transmitter Output Power.................................................................34

2.9 Checking and Correcting Vision/Sound Offsets ..........................................35

2.10 Calibrating Power Displays ..........................................................................36

2.10.1 Calibrating Forward and Reflected Power Displays ...................................36

2.10.2 Calibrating Vision Display...........................................................................39

2.10.3 Calibrating Sound Display...........................................................................40

3 Completion of Procedure for Putting Transmitter intoOperation.........................................................................................41

3.1 Final Steps .....................................................................................................41

3.1.1 Checking the R&S NetCCU800 Status Display............................................41

3.1.2 Checking the Exciter Status Display ..........................................................42

3.1.3 Checking the Output Stage Status Display ................................................42

3.1.4 Checking Pump Unit Status Display...........................................................44

3.2 Adjusting Amplifier Order Numbers to Installation Positions in Rack ....44

3.3 Clearing Event Memories................................................................................45

4 Precorrection .....................................................................................47

4.1 Functions of the Nonlinear Precorrector ...................................................47

4.1.1 General........................................................................................................47

4.1.2 Linear Basic Precorrection...........................................................................47

4.1.3 Nonlinear Frequency Responses ...............................................................48

4.1.4 Dynamic Precorrection (ATV Split only) .....................................................48

4.1.5 Audio Phase Precorrection (ATV Combined only) .....................................48

4.2 General Information on Operating the Precorrector....................................48

4.3 Performing Precorrection ..............................................................................48

4.3.1 General Requirements ...............................................................................49

4.3.2 Determining System Levels.........................................................................49

4.3.3 Procedure for Precorrecting a Single-Sound Transmitter ..........................50

4.3.3.1 Starting Precorrection........................................................................................504.3.3.2 Phase Precorrection ..........................................................................................524.3.3.3 Amplitude Precorrection ....................................................................................534.3.3.4 Frequency-Dependent Precorrection ................................................................544.3.3.5 Fine Adjustment Using an Existing or Preset Characteristic ............................564.3.3.6 Applying Phase Precorrection to FM Sound Subcarrier....................................57

4.3.4 Procedure for Precorrecting a Dual-Sound Transmitter..............................57

1 General Information

Transmitters are put into operation by means of the graphical user interface of the R&S NetC CU800.

1.1 Preparations

Before you can put a transmitter into operation, it must first have been fully installed. Check the following list to ensure that all connections have been correctly made:

^ Check whether all the modules delivered have been correctly installed and connected as necessary.

®° Check whether the transmitter has been correctly connected to the AC power supply. Please note:

O Connection in general

- Power feed, rack ground, cooling system, test load (dummy antenna) 50 Q in appropriate cases, power-handling capacity P > nominal transmitter power, directional-coupler filter, matrix or antenna

O Connections for RF interlock loops and fault messages

- Attach the following jumpers and make the following connections at connectors onthe power distribution board (the respective connector designation is printed on thePCB).

Main protection loop - X41 1-2Standby protection loop - X41 3-4Fault message for rack absorber - 1-2Fault message for system absorber - X42 3-4(With multi-rack transmitters, the overtemperature switches of the RF absorbers are

connected to the inputs for the respective absorber fault messages.)

Fault message for external cooling system - X44 1-2

If customer units with interlock circuit outputs such as control monitoring are present, you can loop in these units in place of the wire jumpers.

O Emergency OFF switch X7 (if fitted) O Motor

protection switches are set to 7 A

®° Check the phase-rotation direction of the AC supply voltage.

^ Switch off the main switch Q1 together with all motor protection switches and automatic line fuses.

«• Check that all screws and nuts are securely fastened, especially those on the transmitter RF output.

• «

1.2 Requirements

1. Before switching on the transmitter, check whether the exciter is set to the correct frequency (consistent with any diplexer or bandpass filter that may be connected).

If the transmission frequency is not yet known, the transmitter should remain switched off until the frequency is set.

2. Connect a dummy antenna to the RF output.

Before the transmitter is switched on to RF power, the coolant inlets and outlets of the am-plifiers and of the additional liquid-cooled absorber (= rack absorber; with 6 or more ampli-fiers in the rack) must be opened.

Switching on transmitter

Switch on the transmitter as follows:

1. Switch on the main switch (Q1).

2. Switch on the exciter (F1 or F2).

The exciter boots up.

3. Switch on the R&S NetCCU800(F3).

The R&S NetCCU800 boots up.

4. Switch on the auxiliary power supply unit (F5).

5. Switch on the pump unit (F6) and cooler (F7).

6. If necessary, switch on optional add-on equipment (F4) and the control unit for dummyantennas or for an external cooling system (F8).

1.3 Operating the R&S NetCCU800

Detailed information on operating the R&S NetCCU800 can be found in the chapter "Oper-ating".

2 Preparing to Put a Transmitter into Operation

Local operation of the R&S NetCCU800 includes all the information calls for the system pa-rameters and their settings, complete with intuitive graphical menus.

Remote operation via a web browser is possible only if a PC or notebook is connected to the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800.

2.1 Preparing for Local Operation

To prepare for local control, proceed as follows:

<»• Press the key on the R&S NetCCU800.

Its yellow LED should light up.

2.2 Checking and Setting System and Operating Parameters

In order to bring the transmitter into operation, you must check and set the following system and operating parameters.

2.3 R&S NetCCU800

2.3.1 Switching On R&S NetCCU800

«- Connect the R&S NetCCU800to the AC power supply.

After a few seconds, the unit boots up and the entry screen indicates when it is ready for use.

Local operation of the R&S NetCCU800 includes all the information calls for the system pa-rameters and their settings, complete with intuitive graphical menus.

Remote operation via a web browser is possible only if a PC or notebook is connected to the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800.

2.3.2 Changing User Type

To configure the transmitter by means of the R&S NetCCU800, you must have configuration rights.

• »

To log on with configuration rights under local control, proceed as follows:

1. From the context menu, select the menu item Change User.

The Logon window opens. The current user ID is displayed to the right of Select user from list.

2. Under Select user from list, select the user ID Configuration.

After confirming with OK, you are logged on again with configuration rights.

No password is required to change the user ID under local control (according to the factory default).

2.3.3 Entering Basic Settings

After switching on the R&S NetCCU800, the basic system settings can be entered.

1. Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Common.

The Common window opens.

2. Enter the basic settings as shown in the table below.

Function Explanation

Display Timeout Time in minutes after which the display switches off (standby)

LED Local Color of the Local LED on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 (yellow, green)

LED On Color of the ON LED on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800(yellow, green)

Fan Control Used to switch the fan monitoring function on and off; the fan monitoring function must be switched off for instruments without fans.

Tx Name User-definable name for the transmitter; is displayed in the login screen and in the browser window

2.3.4 Setting Date and Time

The date and precise time are required to make correct logbook entries. This information is supplied by the internal clock of the R&S NetCCU800 If necessary, the time and date can be corrected in the Date/Time menu window.

Using NTP

You can change directly to the NTP menu window from the context menu. With NTP, the local time is determined via NTP and a time set manually under Local Time is overwritten.


Setup NTP Used to change directly to the NTP menu window

2. Enter the basic settings as shown in the table below.

Setting item Explanation

Date Used to set the current date

Local Time Used to set the local time The local time is the time of day or zone time

applicable at the station.

Unlike universal time (UTC = universal time coordinated), there is a pos-itive offset for time zones east of Greenwich or a negative offset for time zones west of Greenwich. This offset is determined by the time zone and is always a multiple of a full hour or sometimes of a half hour.In some countries, the clock is set forward by 1 hour in summer (daylight saving time). The time offset relative to UTC then changes correspond-ingly.

UTC Time Offset Used to enter the time offset between local time and UTC

2.3.5 Adjusting Network Settings

In the windows of the Network menu, you can make network settings and obtain informa-tion about current settings.

2.3.5.1 Front Ethernet Interface

The ETHERNET interface on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 is used to connect aPC/laptop. Find out about the factory settings for this interface if you want to operate the transmitter "remotely" using a connected PC.

1. Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Date/Time.

The Date/Time window opens.

The Front Ethernet window displays the following network settings:

Display Explanation

IP Address IP address of the network card

Network Mask Subnet mask of the network card

Speed Mode Speed and duplex Factory setting: 1 0

Mbit / half duplex

Autosensing Autonegotiation ON/OFF Factory setting: On

Autonegotiation = Automatic determination of the settings for the net-work card

MAC Address Unique ID of the network card

Notes

All settings for the front Ethernet interface are preset. If a PC/laptop is to be connected, the network interface on the PC/laptop must be configured accordingly:

- IP address (PC): First three segments same as those for IP Address of the R&SNetCCU800 (see above); a value below 250 must be entered for the last segment

- Subnet mask (PC): Same settings as under Network Mask (see above)

2.3.5.2 Rear Ethernet Interface (NETLINK)

Configure the NETLINK interface (X5) on the rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800 if you wantto connect the transmitter to a LAN/WAN.

«• Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Network > Front Ethernet.

The Front Ethernet window opens.

2. Make the required settings:

Setting/display Explanation



Gateway Gateway address (specified by the network administrator)

DHCP Client Switch used to activate/deactivate the DHCP client:- On: The network settings for IP address, subnet mask and are retrieved automatically by a DHCP server - Off: The network settings for IP address, subnet mask and must be entered manually (see above)

gateway

gateway

Speed Mode a) Speed and duplex Factory setting: 1 00

Mbit / full duplex

Autosensing a) Autonegotiation ON/OFF Factory setting: On



a) Caution: Only change the settings for Speed Mode and Autosensing in exceptional cases where there are problems with the network connection.

1. Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Network > Rear Ethernet.

The Rear Ethernet window opens.

< «

Notes

- Manual settings for remote connection should only be entered in offline mode (contextmenu: Edit Offline) and then activated with Submit Changes (context menu).

- The IP address must not be in the same network as the front ETHERNET interface.

- To allow automatic integration in a network (DHCP Client activated), the network mustcontain a DHCP server.

2.4 Setting Transmitter and Amplifier Type

«- Select NetCCU > Setup > TX Setup.

The Tx Setup window opens.

In the Tx Setup window you can enter system-specific settings and define standby behav-ior.

The table below describes the user-selectable parameters:


TX Mode Used to select the transmitter standard - NoExciter: R&S NetCCU800 is operated as a standalone instrument (e.g. in combination with the DVB-T receiver module option) - Multi: Both exciters in a transmitter use different standards - FM: Analog sound broadcasting standard - ATV: Analog TV standard - ATSC: Digital TV standard (USA) - DAB: Digital audio broadcasting standard - DVB-T/H: Digital TV standard (Europe) - DTMB: Digital TV standard (South America, Asia, Europe) - MediaFLO: Digital TV standard (USA) - ISDB-T: Digital TV standard (Brazil, Japan)


ATV mode Selection only possible if ATV is set under Tx Mode - Split Single: Vision signal and sound signal are transmitted separately via one amplifier each (single = 1 sound carrier) - Comb Single: Vision signal and sound signal are transmitted via one amplifier (same channel) (single = 1 sound carrier) - Split Dual: Vision signal and sound signal are transmitted separately via one amplifier each (dual = 2 sound carriers) - Comb Dual: Vision signal and sound signal are transmitted via one amplifier (same channel) (dual = 2 sound carriers)

Power mode Used to set the power class - Low - Medium - High

Cooling system Used cooling systemThe following setting is preset for Power Mode "Low" or "Medium": - Air: Air coolingThe following settings can be selected for Power Mode "High": - Liquid: Transmitter is connected to an external cooling system which is used to cool the entire station - Liquid PUC: Transmitter has its own cooling system (R&S ZK810)

Tx Type Used to set the standby behavior: - Single Tx: Standby system (see below) - Dual Drive: Standby system (see below) - Passive PA: Standby system (see below) - Active PA: Standby system (see below)

Power Switch Used to set the hardware configuration for antenna switchover. The fol-lowing options are available: - "Manual" for manual antenna switchover - "Automatic" for electronic antenna switchover

Antenna type Country-specific setting for the antenna type; the default setting is Full

Amplifier type Setting the amplifier type (for Power Mode = "High" only) - Vx8000 Amplifier with CAN bus connection, e.g. R&S VH8600A1 Information about number and type of (active) amplifiers are read in via the CAN bus and transferred to the transmitter control unit. - VM6000: Amplifier without CAN bus connection, e.g. R&S VM602A1 Together with the setting Number of Amplifiers in the Outputstage > Setup > Rack Setup > Rack x > Rack Controller menu, the transmitter control unit receives the required information about type and number of (active!) amplifiers.With the information about type and number of active! amplifiers, the pump control unit (for Power Mode = "High") determines the rated flow.

If the "Cooling System" setting is changed, a second reboot is required. The R&S NetCCU800 menus (cooling system) are not activated until the second reboot.

To reboot from the Maintenance context menu run the Reboot command.

2.5 Entering Exciter Settings

2.5.1 Setting TV Standard

1. Select Exciter A > Setup > Common.

The Common window opens.

2. Enter the desired settings:

Setting item Description

TV Standard Selection of the TV standard

AF Mode Selection between dual-sound and triple-sound modeThis selection is available only if the second sound subcarrier is trans-mitted in accordance with NICAM and the coder mode is set under the Nicam mode.

Nicam Mode Selection of the NICAM mode: - Coder: AF signal supply of AF1 and AF2 via the AUDIO input with encoding and modulation in the exciter - Modulator: Signal supply as a NICAM728 data stream via the NICAM DATA IN digital input - External: Signal supply of a modulated NICAM sound subcarrier via the NICAM SC IN input

Nicam Rolloff Setting of the NICAM rolloff: - Auto: The NICAM rolloff is set automatically as the function of the selected TV standard and in compliance with the NICAM specifications (recommended setting!). - 40% / 100%: Manual setting of the NICAM rolloff

Sound Select Selection of the number of sound subcarriers: - Single Carrier: One sound subcarrier - Dual Carrier: Two sound subcarriers

2.5.2 Entering Video Settings

1. Select Exciter A > Vision > Input.

The Input window opens.



Input Selection of two identical video inputs VF 1 and VF 2 for further processing.In the Status > Input indicator, the currently selected (= active) video input is indicated.

Nominal Input Level Selection of the nominal input amplitude, either 0.7 Vpp or 1 Vpp at 75 Ω (common to both video inputs).

Input Limiter Switches the input limiter on or off.

Display Description

Clipping Status display for indicating clipping of the input signal; the indications are as follows: - No indication: The input signal is in the valid range (NO CLIPPING) - Yellow: The input signal is close to being clipped (NO HEADROOM) - Red: The input signal is clipped (CLIPPING)

2.5.3 Performing Video Control

1. Select Exciter A > Vision > White Control.

The White Control window opens.



Automatic Switches white control on or off.

Testline Selects the test line for the white pulse. The test line can be in the first or second field.

Gain Source Selection of the source for fixed video gain in case oifailure of the white pulse with white control simultaneously switched on. The options are as follows: - MANUAL: For the gain, the manual settings under Manual Gain apply. - MEMORY: The gain uses the most recently saved value for white control.

Manual Gain Manual setting of the video gain The value which is set is the gain of the actuator as a percentage referred to gain 1 .

Display Description

Memory Gain Display of the last value saved by the white control which can be used for fixed video gain. The value which is displayed is the gain of the actuator as a percentage referred to gain 1.

Current Gain Source Display of the active source for the video gain: - Manual: Manual setting (see Gain Source) - Memory: Memory for the white control (see Gain Source) - Automatic: White control

White Amplitude Input

Measured value for the white amplitude input

White Amplitude Output Measured value for the white amplitude output

Display Description

White Pulse Monitoring Status display for the white pulse monitoring: - NONE: The test line with the white pulse was not found - OK: White pulse found and level OK - < -40% / < -30% / > +30% / > +40%: The level of the white pulse deviates from the nominal value by the displayed value.

2.5.4 Setting White Limiter

1. Select Exciter A > Vision > White Limiter.

The White Limiter window opens.



Limiter Switches the white limiter on or off.

Threshold Sets the threshold for the white limiter.

Display Description

Limiter Active Status display for indicating if the white limiter responds.

2.5.5 Setting Sync Pulse

1. Select Exciter A > Vision > Sync Pulse.

The Sync Pulse window opens.



Regeneration Switches sync pulse regeneration on or off.

Sync Amplitude Sets the amplitude of the regenerated sync switched on).

pulse (when regeneration

Display Description

Sync Monitoring Status display for the sync pulse monitoring of the input signal. The fol-lowing displays are possible: - OK: The input signal complies with the standard - no V: No V pulse frame detected - no H+V: No V and no H pulse frame detected - too low: This sync pulse amplitude is less than 50% of the nominal sync pulse amplitude, but the processed signal is still available at the encoder outputFor all of the indications except for OK, the Status > Video In status dis-play will appear in yellow.

Sync Amplitude Input Display of the measured input amplitude [mV] of the sync pulse. If the selected line is not found in the input signal, a measured value of 0 mV is displayed.

Sync Amplitude Out-put

Display of the measured output amplitude [mV] of the sync pulse.

2.5.6 Performing Receiver Pre-Equalization and Diplexer Peaking

Use of the diplexer peaking function is recommended only after level control has been com-pleted.



Diplexer Used to switch the diplexer pre-equalization (diplexer peaking) on or off

Diplexer Peaking Used to set the peaking in the range 0.1 dB to 2.5 dB at the band limit of the upper sideband

Receiver Pre-Equalization

Used to switch the receiver pre-equalization on or off

2.5.7 Entering Sound Settings

1. Select Exciter A > Sound > Input.

The Sound > Input window opens.

1. Select Exciter A > Vision > Equalizer.

The Equalizer window opens.


Nominal Level FM/ Nicam [AF1/AF2]

Sets the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 or AF2.

Gain Adjustment Nicam [AF1/AF2]

Adjusts the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 or AF2 which is fed to the integrated NICAM coder.

Preemphasis [FM] Switches the preemphasis required by the relevant television on or off (50 µs or 75 µs) for the FM audio.

standard

Preemphasis [Nicam] Switches the preemphasis required by the relevant television standard for the NICAM audio on or off.

Lowpass [FM] Switches a lowpass filter for the FM audio on or off.

Display Description

Current Input FM [AF1/AF2]

Display of the current input level at the analog audio encoder for the AF signal AF1 or AF2 as a percentage of the maximum drive level.

Current Input Nicam [AF1/AF2]

Display of the current input level at the NICAM coder for the AF signal AF1 or AF2 as a percentage of the maximum drive level.

Input Clipping FM [AF1/AF2]

If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 is amplified beyond the permissible input level at the analog audio coder, clipping of the amplitude will occur. This is indicated using the Input Clipping FM status display.

Input Clipping Nicam [AF1/AF2]

If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 is amplified beyond the permissible input level at the NICAM coder, clipping of the amplitude will occur. This is indicated using the Input Clipping Nicam status display.

2.5.8 Entering Coder Settings

1. Select Exciter A > Sound > FM Audio Mode.

The FM Audio Mode window opens.



Coder Mode Setting of the audio mode.The following settings are possible: Off, Mono, Stereo, Dual and Auto (Dataline). The selected TV standard determines the assignment of the audio inputs to the FM sound subcarriers.The following settings have a special meaning: - Off: Dual sound is set as the audio mode - Auto (Dataline): The audio mode is read from theaudio data line in the picture signal.

Dataline Selects the audio data line present in the picture signal; this is neces-sary for the Coder Mode > Auto setting.

Pilot Switches the pilot signal on or off; not active in conjunction with NICAM.

Pilot Gain Sets the level for the pilot signal; not active in conjunction with NICAM.

Display Description

Dataline Info Display of the indication of the audio mode present in the audio data line (N/A means there is no indication in the selected audio data line).

Current Audio Mode Display of the audio mode that is currently set.

Current Pilot Deviation

Display of the FM deviation for the pilot signal.

2.5.9 Setting Sound Carrier/Nominal Deviation and Deviation Limiter

1. Select Exciter A > Sound > FM Carrier. The

FM Carrier window opens.



Carrier 1 /Carrier 2 Used to set the mode for FM sound subcarrier 1 or 2; the following set-tings are possible: - Carrier OFF: Switches off the sound subcarrier - Modulation OFF: Switches on the sound subcarrier without modulation - ON: Switches on the sound subcarrier with modulation

Nom. Deviation [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2]

Used to set the nominal FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1 and 2

Deviation Limiter Used to switch the deviation limiter for the FM sound subcarrier on or off

Limiter Threshold Used to set a threshold at which the deviation limiter is triggered

Warning Above Used to set a threshold at which the deviation limiter warning is activatedIn most cases, it is recommendable for Limiter Threshold and Warning Above to have the same value.

Display Explanation

Current Deviation [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2]

Indicates the current FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1 and 2

Limitation [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2]

Status display which indicates whether the deviation limiter has trig-gered

2.5.10 Entering Settings for NICAM

NICAM audio mode

1. Select Exciter A > Sound > NICAM Audio Mode.

The NICAM Audio Mode window opens.



Audio Mode Determines the NICAM audio mode (possible only in the NICAM coder mode): - Equal FM Audio Mode: The NICAM audio mode is oriented towards the FM audio mode. - Mono/Data, Stereo and Dual Sound: These settings determine the NICAM audio mode regardless of the FM channel; the encoding takes place in accordance with the NICAM specifications.

Reserve Sound Switching Flag

This flag can be set (On) or not set (Off); possible only in the NICAM coder mode.

NICAM carrier

1. Select Exciter A > Sound > NICAM Carrier. The

NICAM Carrier window opens.


Setting item DescriptionCarrier Mode Sets the mode for the NICAM sound subcarrier; the following settings are possible: - Carrier OFF: Switches off the sound subcarrier. - Modulation OFF: Switches on the sound subcarrier without modulation. - ON: Switches on the sound subcarrier with modulation.Nicam Precorrection Switches the precorrection for the NICAM sound subcarrier on or off; the actual correction takes place using the precorrector GUI.

2.5.11 Switching Off Precorrector

1. Select Exciter A ATV > Precorrection.

The Precorrection window opens.

2. Switch all correctors off.

The corrector needs to be switched on again before precorrection is carried out.

The table below describes the variable parameters in detail:


Nonlinear Correction Switches the entire nonlinear correction on or off.

- Amplitude Switches the amplitude correction in the nonlinear corrector on or off.

- Phase Switches the phase correction in the nonlinear corrector on or off.

- Nonlinear Fre-quency

Switches the entire nonlinear frequency response correction on or off.

- Point 1 Switches the frequency response influence on branch 1 on or off (non-linear frequency response correction).


Linear Correction Switches the entire linear correction on or off.

- Amplitude Switches the amplitude frequency response correction in the linear cor-rector on or off.

- Group Delay Switches the group delay correction in the linear corrector on or off.

2.5.12 Setting Transmitter Frequency

1. Select Exciter A > RF > Synthesizer.

The Synthesizer window opens.



Frequency Sets the vision carrier frequency.


Reference Selection of the reference frequency source. The following settings are possible: - Internal: Operation without an external reference frequency source. - External 5 MHz: Operation with an external 5 MHz reference. - External 10 MHz: Operation with an external 10 MHz reference.

OCXO Adjust Setting for adjusting the internal OCXO frequency (for "Internal" mode).

Display Description

Frequency Offset Any offset is set directly on the vision carrier.

2.5.13 Adjusting I/Q Modulator

When delivered from the factory, the I/Q modulator is preadjusted so that no customer in-tervention is normally required.

If nonetheless an adjustment is necessary, proceed as follows:

1. Select Exciter ATV A > RF > IQ Adjust.

The IQ Adjust window opens.

2. For automatic I/Q adjustment go to Auto l/Q-Adjust and select the Start entry.

Automatic I/Q adjustment takes a few seconds, during which time the message Run-ning is displayed. Following successful adjustment the display changes to Adjusted.

The option for automatic I/Q adjustment will be implemented in a later software release. A guide to manual adjustment of the I/Q modulator can be found in the exciter manual.

2. Under Vision/Sound Carrier 1 and Vision/Sound Carrier 2, set sound carrier level 1and 2 referenced to the peak envelope power of the vision carrier.

3. Enter the other settings as shown in the table below as necessary.


RF Output Enables (On) or disables (Off) the RF output.

Regulation Activates (On) or deactivates (Off) the output level control. During trans-mission operation, control must be enabled.The current status of the related level adjuster is displayed as a percentage under RF > RF Monitor > AGС Exciter.

Manual RF Level Manual setting of the output level; the setting has an effect only if output level control is deactivated.The current status of the related level adjuster is displayed as a percentage under RF > RF Monitor > AGС Exciter.

Output Attenuation For level adaptation purposes, an integrated attenuator with a value of 3 dB, 6 dB or 9 dB can be connected. This does not have any influence on the level control!

RF Slope Correction of a slope of the amplitude frequency response in the spec-trum for equalizing subsequent components (output stage, filter).

Modulation Slope Correction of a curvature of the amplitude frequency response in the spectrum for equalizing subsequent components (output stage, filter).

Vision/Sound Carrier 1 12

Setting of the sound carrier level 1 or 2 referred to the sync peak power of the vision carrier.

2.5.14 Setting RF Output

1. Select Exciter A > RF > Output.

The Output window opens.


Residual Carrier Setting of the residual carrier as a percentage.The residual carrier is entered with reference to the amplitude of the video signal. In the case of the TV standard B/G, for example, it has a value of 11%.

2.6 Entering Output Stage Settings

2.6.1 Setting Up the Output Stage

In the OS Setup and Rack Controller windows, you can enter the basic settings for the output stage.

«• Select Outputstage A > Setup > OS Setup. The

OS Setup window opens.

The table below explains the user-selectable parameters in detail:

Setting Explanation

Racks per OS Number of racks belonging to the output stage

Outlet Temp. Fault Switch-off threshold with overtemperature If this threshold is exceeded, the rack controller shuts down the transmitter rack. Value: 45 °C to 62 °C Nominal value: 62 °C

Pump Units Number of pump units

Outlet Nominal Temp. Nominal temperature of the coolant Value: 25 °C to 57 °C Nominal value: 32 °C

Setting Description

RF event signalling - yes: If the limits are violated below or above (RF Fail Limit, RF Warning Limit) for the forward and return power at the rack test points, warnings or error messages are output (default setting).- no: Indication of RF warnings and error messages at the rack test points is suppressed.

General purpose input

Usage of a free line on the rack controller for customer-specific purposes: - unused: Line is not used. - door open: Line is reserved to indicate that door contacts were opened. - ext. cooling wng: Line is reserved for warnings about external cooling. - ext. cooling fit: Line is reserved for error messages about external cooling.

RFProbe present - yes: A test system is connected on the rack controller for the rack. This is the correct setting if the rack is the only one in the output stage.- no: No test system is connected on the rack controller for the rack. This is possible only in conjunction with multirack output stages.

2.6.2 Setting Up Pump Unit

In the PUC 1 > Configuration window you can change the default setting for the coolant flow and, if necessary, activate the Service mode.

«• Select Outputstage A > Pump Units > PUC 1 > Configuration.

The PUC 1 > Configuration window opens.

The table below explains the parameters in detail:

Setting Description

Liquid Flow Correction

Fine adjustment of the coolant flow above the nominal flow Value: +0 % to +20 % Nominal value: 0 %Fine adjustment of the coolant flow allows, for example, resonance along the coolant hoses to be suppressed.

Service Mode Pump service mode Value: On/Off Nominal value: OffThe pump unit must be switched to service mode if maintenance work is performed on the pump unit (e.g. pump replacement, filter cleaning). In service mode the fault and warning messages from the pump are sup-pressed. Caution: The pump unit automatically returns to normal operation after 2 hours.

Display Description

Number of Pumps Number of individual pumps in the pump unit (1 or 2)

Number of Fans Number of individual fans in the cooling system (1 to 4)

2.7 Setting Nominal Values

2.7.1 Entering Nominal Value for Vision Forward Power

1. Select NetCCU > RF Probe Antenna > RF Vision.

The RF Vision window opens.

2. Enter the nominal value according to the transmitter power class:

Transmitter type ATV nominal power Coupling attenuation at test point P14C

R&S NH8601 1800W 53.0 dB

R&S NH8602 3500 W 56.0 dB

R&S NH8603 5000 W 58.0 dB

R&S NH8604 6800 W 59.0 dB

R&S NH8605 8300 W 60.0dB

R&S NH8606 10000W 61.0 dB

R&S NH8608 13300W 62.0 dB

R&S NH8610 16300W 63.0 dB

R&S NH8612 20000 W 64.0 dB

R&S NH8616 25800 W 65.0 dB

R&S NH8620 32000 W 66.0 dB

Table 1 Nominal power and coupling attenuation at P14C

The nominal value must not exceed the nominal power which is characteristic of the trans-mitter type. Lower values are, however, permissible.

2.7.2 Entering Nominal Value for Sound Forward Power

1. Select NetCCU > RF Probe Antenna > RF Sound.

The RF Sound window opens.

2. Enter the nominal values Nom. Value Snd 1/2

Dual Sound Single Sound

Transmitter type Sound 1 (-13dB)

Sound 2 (-20 dB)

Sound 1 (-10dB)

R&S NH8601 90 18 180

R&S NH8602 175 35 350

R&S NH8603 250 50 500

R&S NH8604 340 68 680

R&S NH8605 415 83 830

R&S NH8606 500 100 1000

R&S NH8608 665 133 1330

R&S NH8610 815 163 1630

R&S NH8612 1000 200 2000

R&S NH8616 1290 258 2580

R&S NH8620 1600 320 3200

Table 2 Sound forward powers

If a value lower than the specified nominal power has been entered as the nominal value for vision forward power, the nominal values for sound forward power must also be reduced accordingly.

2.8 Setting Transmitter Output Power

Before the transmitter is switched on to RF power, the coolant inlets and outlets of the am-plifiers and of the additional liquid-cooled absorber (= rack absorber; with 6 or more ampli-fiers in the rack) must be opened.

1. Feed in a video signal with modulation APL 0 % using a video generator connected tothe transmitter input.

2. Connect a PEP (peak envelope power) power meter to the free test point PMC on theAVG forward power system.

1. Switch off all sound carriers in the exciter:

a) Select Exciter A > Sound > FM Carrier and switch off the FM sound subcarriersCarrier 1 and Carrier 2 by selecting Carrier OFF.

b) For NICAM modes, also select Exciter A > Sound > NICAM Carrier and switch offthe NICAM sound subcarrier by selecting Carrier Off.

5. Change the value under Ref. Voltage Vision until nominal power or the set nominal value for the vision forward power is measured on the power meter.

5. Set Ref. Voltage Vision Reduced to 0%.

6. Temporarily interrupt the video signal and under Ref. Voltage Vision Reduced set the

transmitter output power to Psync = PSync,nom - 2.5 dB.

8. Feed in the video signal again.

9. Switch all sound carriers in the exciter on again.

10.Remove the power meter from the test point PMC.

2.9 Checking and Correcting Vision/Sound Offsets

1. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the test point P14C and check the vision/sound offsets.

1. If the actual values do not match the nominal values, select Exciter A > RF > Outputand correct the vision/sound offsets under Vision/Sound Carrier 1 and 2.

2.10 Calibrating Power Displays

The coupling attenuation and display matching of test points have been factory calibrated.

2.10.1 Calibrating Forward and Reflected Power Displays

Forward power display

The transmitter must be operated at nominal power (set by means of a reference measure-ment).

1. Select NetCCU > RF Probe Antenna > RF Probe Forward.

The RF Probe Forward window opens.

2. Enter the nominal value for the vision power as specified in the table "Nominal powerand coupling attenuation at P14C".

3. Use Set Gain to measure and save the DC voltage of the forward-power test point atnominal output power.

To abort, exit the Trigger: Set info window by pressing To continue, confirm bypressing OK.

4. Switch off the transmitter.

5. Use Set Offset to measure and save the DC voltage of the forward-power test point at0 W output power.


6. Enter the other settings as shown in the table below:


Measured Values

Power Voltage

Measurement display Current forward power

Currently measured DC voltage of the test point

Configuration

Nominal Value RF Fail

Limit

RF Warning LimitTimeout RF Fail Con-trol

Definition and setting of a nominal value for forward power. Setting of upper and lower thresholds for forward power; warnings and fault mes-sages are issued if these thresholds are violated.Used to enter the nominal value, determined if necessary by external measurement of the forward powerUsed to select a dB value referenced to the set nominal power for for-ward power; a fault message is issued if the actual value drops below the nominal value.Used to select a dB value referenced to the set nominal power for for-ward power; a warning is issued if the actual value drops below the nominal valueUsed to select the time that the lower threshold for the forward power (specified as the RF Fail Limit) must be violated for before a fault mes-sage is output. For example, if a value of 3 dB has been entered as the RF Fail Limit and the actual value drops below that level for 8 seconds (typical setting for Timeout for RF Fail Control), a fault message will be output.

Calibration

Gain Offset

Set Gain

Set Offset

Execution of calibration and display of the results. Internal measurement

value of the nominal value Deviation from the zero value of the power

display

Used to calibrate the internal measurement system. Set Gain assigns the currently measured DC voltage to the nominal value for transmitter power.Used to calibrate the zero point as of which the externally measured power is displayed. Set Offset calibrates the zero point.

• »

Verification of the calibration

Calibration of the power indication was successful if the values displayed in the Calibration window area for Gain and Offset are not equal to zero.

Reflected power display

To allow calibration, the transmitter must be operated at the required transmitter power.

1. Select NetCCU > RF Probe Antenna > RF Probe Reflected.

The RF Probe Reflected window opens.

2. Use Set Gain to measure and save the DC voltage of the reflected-power test point atnominal output power.


3. Switch off the transmitter.

4. Use the Set Offset command to measure and save the DC voltage of the reflected-power test point at 0 W output power.


5. Enter the other settings as shown in the table below:


Measured Values

Power Voltage

Measurement display Current reflected power


ConfigurationNominal Value Setting of a warning threshold for the reflected power Forward

power/50 (corresponds to the maximum reflected power)

FunctionWarning Limit

ExplanationUsed to select a dB value for the warning threshold referenced to the reflection switch-off threshold which is at a return loss of -17 dB (corre-sponding to a reflected power/forward power ratio of 1/50)

Calibration

Gain Offset

Set Gain

Set Offset

Execution of calibration and display of the results Internal measurement


display

Used to calibrate the internal measurement system. Set Gain stores the internal measurement value for the entered (measured) nominal value.Used to calibrate the zero point as of which the externally measured power is displayed. Set Offset calibrates the zero point.

Verification of the calibration

Calibration of the power indication was successful if the values displayed in the Calibration window area for Gain and Offset are not equal to zero.

2.10.2 Calibrating Vision Display

1. Select Exciter A > RF > RF Monitor.

The RF Monitor window opens.

2. Change the correction value Common until the required nominal value is displayed un-der Program in the NetCCU > RF Probe Antenna > RF Vision window.

2.10.3 Calibrating Sound Display

1. Select Exciter A > RF > RF Monitor.

The RF Monitor window opens.

2. Change the correction values for Sound 1 and Sound 2 until the required nominal value is displayed under Sound 1 Program and Sound 2 Program in the NetCCU > RF Probe Antenna > RF Sound window.

• «

3 Completion of Procedure for Putting Transmit-ter into Operation

When the steps described in the above sections have been carried out, the transmitter is ready for operation. Each transmitter receives a test report from the final testing department complete with measurement data on every quality parameter. This means that on site com-pliance testing is only necessary at the customer's request.

3.1 Final Steps

3.1.1 Checking the R&S NetCCU800 Status Display

1. Select NetCCU > Status > Device Status.

The Device Status window opens.

2. Check the status of the warning and fault indicators.

If a transmitter is ready to operate, no warnings or faults will be signaled.

3. Select NetCCU > Status > RF Status.

The RF Status window opens.



5. Select NetCCU > Status > Tx Status.

The Tx Status window opens.

6. Check the status of the warning and fault indicators.If a transmitter is ready to operate, no warnings or faults will be signaled.

3.1.2 Checking the Exciter Status Display

1. Select Exciter A/B ATV > Status.

The Status window opens.

2. Check the status of the warning and fault indicators.If no warnings or errors are signaled, the transmitter is ready to operate.

3.1.3 Checking the Output Stage Status Display

1. Select Outputstage > Status > OS Status.

The OS Status window opens.



3. Select Outputstage > Status > Rack Status > Rack 1 > Rack Controller.

The Rack Status > Rack 1 > Rack Controller window opens.

4. Select Outputstage > Status > Rack Status > Rack 1 > Amplifier.

The Rack Status > Rack 1 > Amplifier window opens.


3.1.4 Checking Pump Unit Status Display

1. Select Outputstage > Pump Units > Status.

The Pump Units > Status window opens.



3. Select Outputstage > Pump Units > PUC 1 > Status.

The Pump Units > PUC 1 > Status window opens.


3.2 Adjusting Amplifier Order Numbers to Installation Positions in Rack

After the transmitter system has been put into operation, entries for the amplifiers (of a par-ticular rack) are displayed in the menu path for the output stage with consecutive numbering (Amplifier 1 to max. Amplifier 10). Since the numbering is derived from the chronological sequence in which the amplifiers can be detected on the CAN bus, it does not always cor-respond to the sequence in which the amplifiers are physically arranged from top (= 1) to bottom (= n) in the rack.

To make association between menu and amplifier easier, the entries can be sorted.

1. Select Outputstage A > Setup > Rack Setup > Rack 1 > Amplifier Order.

The Amplifier Order window opens.

2. In the Identify column, activate the function Start (starting with Device No. 1).

The LEDs on the associated amplifier flash. This identifies the amplifier with the (tem-porary) order number 1.

3. Under Device, change the order number according to the position of the identified amplifier in the rack.

4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for the other amplifiers in the rack.

The procedure is completed when each order number in the Device column correctly corresponds to the position of the associated amplifier in the rack.

3.3 Clearing Event Memories

There are four event memories for each of the R&S NetCCU800, exciter and OS (output stage) modules.

O Summary O

Status O

Warning O

Fault

These event memories need to be cleared for all the modules before the transmitter begins regular transmission.

1. Select NetCCU > Logbook > Status.

The Status window opens.

2. Select the Clear Logbook command in the context menu.

The entries are cleared.

3. Repeat the procedure for each of the event memories listed.

• 4

4 Precorrection

This section describes the non-linear precorrection sequence in manual mode.

4.1 Functions of the Nonlinear Precorrector

4.1.1 General

In the basic version, the graphical user interface of the non-linear precorrector for DTV and video signals consists of the Nonlinear control panel and the FreqCorrection control pan-el. In the case of ATV split, two further control panels are provided: Dynamic Control for the video precorrector and Nonlinear Audio for the audio signal. In combined mode an au-dio phase precorrector is also provided for audio.

4.1.2 Linear Basic Precorrection

The basic functions of the non-linear precorrector can be accessed via the Nonlinear and Nonlinear Audio control panels. Additional functions can be performed in the other control panels.

Every non-linear precorrector consists of an amplitude precorrector and a phase precorrec-tor, each independently affecting the phase distortion and amplitude distortion of the same signal. The setting of the characteristic is displayed in a graphic in which the X axis repre-sents the instantaneous signal amplitude. The figures 0% and 100% stand for no signal am-plitude and maximum amplitude respectively. The Y axis represent the effect and is scaled to ±50 % for amplitude precorrection and ±45° for phase precorrection. 50% means that at 100% amplitude the level is increased by 3 dB.

Every precorrector has a series of frequency reference points which are used to model the characteristic. Frequency reference points can be user-defined, shifted in the X and Y di-rections, be given a fixed or free slope and be deleted. In the X direction a frequency refer-ence point can only be shifted between the two adjacent reference points. The connections between frequency reference points are computed by means of spline functions.

Every characteristic consists of at least two points, one of which must be at 0% and the oth-er at 100%.

In the case of amplitude precorrection the first point is at [0%, 0%] and cannot be shifted. The second point is at 100% and can be shifted without restriction in the Y direction. A rising or falling straight line between the two points represents only an amplification or attenuation of the signal and does not create non-linear products.

In the case of phase precorrection the first point is at 0% and the second point is at 100%. Both points can be shifted without restriction in the Y direction. A straight line parallel to the amplitude axis creates only a signal phase shift and does not create non-linear products.

' *

4.1.3 Nonlinear Frequency Responses

As an additional function, the non-linear components of the DTV/video precorrection (am-plitude or phase precorrection) can be assigned a frequency response in the FreqCorrec-tion control panel, and the effect of the frequency response depends on the modulation.

If the amplitude precorrection or phase precorrection is affected by an amplitude frequency response, only the "individual" precorrection is affected. Amplitude precorrection and phase precorrection have no influence on one another.

If the amplitude precorrection or phase precorrection is affected by a phase frequency re-sponse, part of the "individual" precorrection affects the other precorrection. The amplitude precorrection and phase precorrection therefore have an influence on one another.

4.1.4 Dynamic Precorrection (ATV Split only)

In ATV split systems, the large fluctuations in the average value of the video signal brings about temperature changes in the output-stage transistor which lead to changes in the out-put stage characteristic as a function of the average value of the modulation. This error can be compensated for by dynamically modifying the characteristic as a function of the aver-age signal value.

4.1.5 Audio Phase Precorrection (ATV Combined only)

In ATV combined systems, the common amplification of video and audio causes the audio signal to be affected by the video signal. This effect can be minimized with the aid of an audio phase precorrector.

4.2 General Information on Operating the Precorrector

The precorrector is operated by means of a web browser. The R&S NetCCU800or exciter provides a JAVA applet which is launched by the web browser. This applet contains all of the elements needed to operate the precorrector.

Detailed information on operating the precorrector and configuring the graphical user inter-face can be found in the chapter "Operation" of the exciter manual.

4.3 Performing Precorrection

The objective of precorrection is for the precorrector to simulate the non-linear characteris-tic of the amplifier as accurately as possible in order to increase the linearity of the output signal.

However, the precorrection limit is tied to the overload capacity of the output stage. To ob-tain the greatest possible efficiency and lowest possible costs for a given transmitter, the output stages are set so as to achieve a transmitter output signal of the required quality.

< «

4.3.1 General Requirements

The following requirements should be fulfilled prior to precorrection:

O The transmitter must be operated at its nominal power output and the system level must be adjusted at all points.

O Precorrection must be on, for which the Nonlinear control panel must be selected in the precorrector graphical interface. A precorrection curve consisting of a straight line posi-tioned on the X axis must be set for the amplitude precorrection and another for the phase precorrection.

4.3.2 Determining System Levels

The graphical area contains lines representing distinctive signal levels such as all-white lev-el (Wht), all-black level (Blk) and sync pulse level (Sync), as well as sync pulse level (Sync/ Aud) in the case of ATV combined. In DVT the level lines indicate the peak level (Peak) and the average value (Avh). These marks indicate maximum level; the actual level may be dif-ferent.

Changes to the set curve that affect only the range above the system level have no effect on the signal or on precorrection of the signal.

The following method can be used to determine the actual values:

1. Use two interpolation points to determine the ends of the effective dynamic range in order to define the possible setting range of the precorrector:

a) Add two interpolation points to the amplitude precorrection graph in the area abovethe highest mark and set their slope.

You now have four points, consecutively numbered 1 to 4 from left to right. Points 2 and 3 are each indicated by an arrow.

b) Shift points 3 and 4 in the positive Y direction by +50%. Point 3 should then be immediately adjacent to point 2.

c) Use the Write button to write this curve to the precorrector.

2. Now use the Navigator window to reduce the position of interpolation points 2 and 3 together in steps of one percent. Observe the effect:

ATV Split In ATV split systems, the first effect is seen in the sync pulse length, whichcan be clearly observed on the TV demodulator (sync pulse length display) or the TV analyzer.

ATV Combined In ATV combined systems, the first effect is seen in the intermodulation products about the two sound carriers fTx ± default f(T2-T1)

DTV In DTV systems the effect is seen as a reduced shoulder distance

The upper of the two interpolation points thus represents the determined dynamic range limit.

3. Restore the original status.

4.3.3 Procedure for Precorrecting a Single-Sound Transmitter

4.3.3.1 Starting Precorrection

Requirements

The following requirements should be fulfilled prior to precorrection:

O The transmitter must be operated at its nominal power output and the system level must be adjusted at all points.

O A spectrum analyzer and TV demodulator must be connected to the transmitter output. A 4.43 MHz sinewave signal with a level value of 10/20 is used as the modulation con-tent.

O An oscilloscope for TV signals is connected to the demodulator. The modulation content must be continuously changed from all-black level to all-white level.

O Precorrection must be activated. The graphical area must contain two interpolation points each for the amplitude precorrection and the phase precorrection, the first at 0% level with magnitude 0% or 0° and the second at 100% level with magnitude 0% or 0°.

An intermodulation product (with the described modulation content) will be visible on the an-alyzer at 1.07 MHz from the vision carrier.

Fig. 5 Intermodulation product on the analyzer (single-sound transmitter)

1) Vision carrier2) Intermodulation product3) Intermodulation suppression4) Modulation frequency (picture content)5) Sound carrier

Start

1. Start precorrection with the phase precorrection.

2. Shift the 10/20 modulation back and forth between black and white as shown in Fig. 4 .

4.3.3.2 Phase Precorrection

Proceed as follows for phase precorrection:

1. First shift the 10/20 modulation into the white range.

2. Add in a reference point at about 10%.

This position corresponds to a lower modulation of the amplifier.

3. Shift the magnitude up or down in steps of 1 or smaller (+ oder -) until the intermodula-tion suppression can be seen on the analyzer.

4. Improve the intermodulation suppression on the analyzer until the optimum result is obtained.

5. Now shift the modulation towards the black range.

The intermodulation suppression will deteriorate again.

3. Set another point at about 20% in order to counteract the deterioration.

6. To compensate for the deterioration of the intermodulation suppression in the whiterange, shift the picture content back into the white range and check the result.

If necessary use the first interpolation point to correct the result.

Four interpolation points are generally needed in order to bring the modulation frequency to the lowest black point and obtain uniformly satisfactory intermodulation suppression be-tween black and white.

Shift the points in small steps, otherwise the optimum precorrection may not be found. The position of the last point is not higher than the limit already found.

8. Repeat the described procedures alternately until no further improvement can be obtained.

The result should be a uniformly satisfactory intermodulation suppression of better than 60 dB between black and white.

9. Now increase the modulation to the full-scale value of 10/75.

10.Carefully shift each interpolation point in turn so as to improve the intermodulation sup-pression again.

If this brings no improvement it will be necessary to seek the help of amplitude precor-rection.

4.3.3.3 Amplitude Precorrection

The procedure for amplitude precorrection is the same as that for phase precorrection. The modulation stays at 10/75.

If the first interpolation point brings about an improvement, deal similarly with the other in-terpolation points.

1. Set the interpolation points more or less at the positions of the phase values.

2. Set all magnitudes to zero.

3. Starting with the interpolation point for the white level (low), change the magnitude (insteps of ± 0.5 or smaller) in order to find the precorrection.

4. Now set the modulation to 50/90 (synchronous range).

5. Optimize the intermodulation suppression again at 1.07 MHz at all interpolation points,in particular by shifting each interpolation point 100%.

6. If necessary correct the intermodulation product at 10/75 level.

4.3.3.4 Frequency-Dependent Precorrection

Background

The FreqCorrection control panel can be used to influence the characteristic by means of an amplitude and/or phase frequency response, the effect of which is dependent on the level.

A set frequency response is applied to all signal components having a level greater than the selected threshold. On the other hand lesser signal components are unaffected.

An amplitude frequency response (Amplitude Slope Amplitude 1/2 or Amplitude Slope Phase 1/2) and a phase frequency response (Phase Slope Amplitude 1/2 or Phase SlopePhase 1/2) can be applied to the amplitude characteristic and the phase characteristic in-dependently of one another. Two independent thresholds are available (Position Point 1 or Position Point 2). The position of the thresholds (1 or 2) and their effect (A or P) are symbolically represented in the graphic.

From here on it is a prerequisite that the precorrection for phase and amplitude has been optimized at all interpolation points.

< «

Optimizing the intermodulation suppression (IM)

1. First use the the Curve Data Amplitude Read and Curve Data Phase Read buttons inthe Nonlinear control panel to read off the characteristics currently set in the precorrec-tor.

The characteristics are displayed in the display part of the graphic.

2. Go to the FreqCorrection control panel.

The characteristics can be seen in the graphic.

3. Set the modulation frequency to 0.75 MHz and the level value to 10/75.

The analyzer shows the intermodulation product +4.75 MHz on the vision carrier.

4. In the precorrector graphical user interface, switch Correction to ON and also activateCorrection Point 1, Amplitude Slope Point 1 and Phase Slope Point 1. Set PositionPoint 1 to 5%.

Fig. 8 The FreqCorrection user interface with an onset point at 5%

5. Now minimize the intermodulation product by alternately setting the amplitude andphase regulators to the slopes of point 1.

6. Now go back to the Nonlinear control panel and set the modulation frequency back to4.43 MHz.

7. Check the precorrection result and optimize the characteristic as necessary.

8. Keep repeating steps 2, 4, 5, 6 and 7 until both intermodulation products at 1.07 MHzand 4.75 MHz are better than 60 dB.

Optimizing the intercarrier S/N ratio

To affect the intercarrier S/N ratio you need to cancel out the frequency-dependent non-lin-earity in the black range (full-scale level) to a certain extent.

1. For this purpose set Point 2 in the gray/black range.

2. Measure the intercarrier S/N ratio to check the effect of Point 2. When doing this, checkthe S/N ratio for all-black level, all-black level and test pattern.

3. Since the precorrection using Point 1 has become tilted, correct this tilt.

The slopes will then point in the opposite direction than at Point 1.

The same checks need to be applied to the FM S/N ratio and asynchronous AM.

4. Check all precorrection procedures again. In particular check whether the intermodula-tion suppression values have worsened or are within specification.

4.3.3.5 Fine Adjustment Using an Existing or Preset Characteristic

If the required data is not or is no longer observed to be in an existing or factory-set precor-rection characteristic, the precorrection does not necessarily have to be readjusted.

An adjustment to the true amplifier characteristic can be obtained by changing individual interpolation points. The range with the greatest effect can be determined by slightly chang-ing individual interpolation points. Changing the interpolation values in this range will most

probably produce the desired result. Changes should be made in small steps, preferably with the aid of the Navigator window. A change must be undone if it does not result in an improvement.

4.3.3.6 Applying Phase Precorrection to FM Sound Subcarrier

This sound phase shifter for the FM sound subcarrier modifies the phase of the sound sub-carrier as a function of the low-frequency modulation of the vision signal in order to precor-rect the phase of the sound subcarrier during combined operation.

The value of the FM signal-to-noise ratio can be improved by using the sound phase shifter in combination with the linearity precorrector. Fine adjustment of this precorrection requires all quality parameters to be checked (in particular intercarrier signal-to-noise ratio, asyn-chrononous AM and intermodulation suppression).

The sound phase shifter is adjusted in the Exciter A/B > Sound > FM Precorrection menu window.

4.3.4 Procedure for Precorrecting a Dual-Sound Transmitter

A dual-sound transmitter is precorrected in a similar manner to a single-sound transmitter. The important difference is that instead of starting precorrection with a vision modulation of 10/20 and a frequency of 4.43 MHz, the starting point is no modulation. Dual-sound opera-tion gives rise to an intermodulation product which, due to the audio 1/audio 2 ratio, is 242 kHz away from the vision carrier. This product is used as the precorrection criterion in just the same way as the 1.07 MHz criterion used in the case of the single-sound transmitter.

Using the precorrector graphical interface, the picture content is changed without modula-tion in white, starting in the black direction, as described in the previous section. The mod-ulation content of 10/75 is not added in again until the intermodulation in the vicinity of the sound carrier is checked. Frequency compensation is then carried out on the linearity.

CHAPTER 5

OPERATING

• «

CONTENTS

1 Operating Options ...........................................................................7

1.1 Local Operation ..............................................................................................7

1.1.1 Menu Keys ...................................................................................................7

1.1.2 Operating Structure .....................................................................................81.1.2.1 Navigation in Menu System.................................................................................81.1.2.2 Selecting and Editing Entries ............................................................................101.1.2.3 Context Menu ...................................................................................................13

1.2 Remote Operation and Remote Control .....................................................14

1.2.1 Installation and Configuration.....................................................................14

1.2.2 Browser-Based Operation ..........................................................................181.2.2.1 End of Session ..................................................................................................22

1.3 User Administration .....................................................................................23

1.3.1 Creating, Changing and Deleting Users......................................................25

1.3.2 Closing Active Sessions .............................................................................26

1.4 Monitoring and Control via SNMP ..............................................................27

1.4.1 Installation ..................................................................................................271.4.1.1 Settings on Transmitter Side ............................................................................281.4.1.2 Settings on Manager Side ................................................................................291.4.1.3 Testing SNMP Communication .........................................................................301.4.1.4 Configuration ....................................................................................................32

2 Menus of R&S NetCCU800...............................................................36

2.1 Overview of Menus.........................................................................................36

2.2 Login................................................................................................................38

2.3 Status Menu ....................................................................................................40

2.3.1 Tx Status Menu Window ............................................................................41

2.3.2 RF Status Menu Window............................................................................42

2.3.3 Device Status Menu Window .....................................................................42

2.4 Logbook Menu ..............................................................................................43

2.4.1 Summary Menu Window ............................................................................44

2.5 Operation Menu Window ...............................................................................45

2.6 Setup Menu .....................................................................................................46

2.6.1 Menu window Tx Setup ..............................................................................46

2.6.2 Option Keys Menu .....................................................................................482.6.2.1 Status Menu Window .......................................................................................492.6.2.2 Install Menu Window ........................................................................................50

< «

2.6.2.3 Deactivations Menu Window ............................................................................51

2.6.3 NetCCU Setup Menu...................................................................................512.6.3.1 Common Menu Window ...................................................................................512.6.3.2 Date/Time Menu Window ..................................................................................522.6.3.3 System Menu Window.......................................................................................532.6.3.4 SW Maintenance Menu Window ......................................................................542.6.3.5 SW Backup/Restore Menu Window ..................................................................562.6.3.6 Network Submenu ............................................................................................572.6.3.7 Network > Front Ethernet Menu Window .........................................................572.6.3.8 Network > Rear Ethernet Menu Window...........................................................582.6.3.9 Services Submenu ............................................................................................592.6.3.10 Services > SNMP > General Menu Window ....................................................592.6.3.11 Services > SNMP > Manager Menu Window ...................................................602.6.3.12 Services > SNMP > Alarmsinks Menu Window.................................................612.6.3.13 Services > NTP Menu Window.........................................................................622.6.3.14 Services > RS232 Menu Window......................................................................62

2.6.4 ParlO Cards Order Menu Window .............................................................63

2.6.5 General Purpose ParlO Menu Window ......................................................65

2.7 RF Probe Antenna Menu...............................................................................66

2.7.1 RF Vision Menu Window.............................................................................66

2.7.2 RF Sound Menu Window ...........................................................................67

2.7.3 RF Probe Forward Menu Window ..............................................................68

2.7.4 RF Probe Reflected Menu Window............................................................69

2.8 Device Info Menu ..........................................................................................70

2.8.1 NetCCU Menu Window ..............................................................................70

2.8.2 Mainboard Menu Window...........................................................................70

2.9 Parameter Set Menu Window ......................................................................71

3 Menus of Exciter A/B......................................................................74

3.1 Overview of Menus..........................................................................................74

3.2 Status Menu ....................................................................................................77

3.2.1 Status Displays, Warnings and Fault Signals..............................................79

3.3 Logbook Menu ..............................................................................................79

3.3.1 Logbook > Summary/Status/Warning/Fault ...............................................80

3.3.2 Logbook Context Menu ..............................................................................80

3.4 Setup Menu ...................................................................................................80

3.4.1 Common Menu Window ............................................................................813.4.1.1 Dual-Sound and Triple-Sound Mode (NICAM Coder Mode Only).....................81

3.5 Vision Menu ..................................................................................................82

3.5.1 Input Menu Window....................................................................................823.5.1.1 Input Amplitude .................................................................................................83

• »

3.5.2 White Control Menu Window......................................................................843.5.2.1 White Control.....................................................................................................853.5.2.2 Failure of White Pulse ......................................................................................85

3.5.3 White Limiter Menu Window.......................................................................853.5.3.1 White Limiter .....................................................................................................86

3.5.4 Sync Pulse Menu Window..........................................................................863.5.4.1 Sync Pulse Regeneration .................................................................................87

3.5.5 Equalizer Menu Window.............................................................................873.5.5.1 Diplexer Peaking ..............................................................................................883.5.5.2 Receiver Pre-Equalization ................................................................................88

3.6 Sound Menu ..................................................................................................88

3.6.1 Input Menu Window....................................................................................883.6.1.1 Input Level at Analog Audio Coder....................................................................893.6.1.2 Input Level at NICAM Coder .............................................................................903.6.1.3 FM Deviation ....................................................................................................90

3.6.2 FM Audio Mode Menu Window ..................................................................913.6.2.1 Audio Mode ......................................................................................................913.6.2.2 Audio Data Line.................................................................................................923.6.2.3 Pilot Signal ........................................................................................................92

3.6.3 FM Carrier Menu Window ..........................................................................92

3.6.4 FM Precorrection Menu Window ................................................................933.6.4.1 Sound Phase Shifter ........................................................................................933.6.4.2 Computation of Characteristic Curve ................................................................94

3.6.5 Nicam Audio Mode Menu Window .............................................................94

3.6.6 Nicam Carrier Menu Window .....................................................................95

3.7 Precorrection Menu ........................................................................................95

3.8 RF Menu .........................................................................................................96

3.8.1 Synthesizer Menu Window.........................................................................973.8.1.1 Reference Frequency Source ...........................................................................973.8.1.2 Holdover Mode (if Reference Frequency Fails).................................................98

3.8.2 Output Menu Window.........................................................................................983.8.2.1 Output Level .....................................................................................................993.8.2.2 Output Level Control .........................................................................................99

3.8.3 RF Monitor Menu Window..........................................................................99

3.8.4 IQ Adjust Menu Window...........................................................................100

3.9 Device Info Menu ........................................................................................102

4 Manual Adjustment of I/Q Modulator............................................104

5 Menus of Outputstage A/B.............................................................105

5.1 Overview of Menus.....................................................................................105

• 4

5.2 Status Menu ..................................................................................................... 107

5.2.1 OS Status Menu Window .........................................................................107

5.2.2 Status/Rack Controller Menu Window......................................................108

5.2.3 Status/Amplifier x Menu Window..............................................................110

5.3 Logbook Menu ............................................................................................111

5.3.1 Logbook Menu Window............................................................................111

5.4 Output Power Menu.........................................................................................112

5.4.1 Output Power Menu Window....................................................................112

5.5 Setup Menu ...................................................................................................... 113

5.5.1 OS Setup Menu Window...........................................................................113

5.5.2 Rack Setup > Rack Order Menu Window ................................................114

5.5.3 Rack Setup > Rack x > Rack Controller Menu Window ...........................115

5.5.4 Rack Setup > Rack x > Amplifier Order Menu Window.............................116

5.6 Measured Values Menu...................................................................................117

5.6.1 Measured Values/Rack Controller Menu Window....................................117

5.6.2 Measure Values/Amplifier x Menu Window..............................................118

5.7 Device Info Menu ............................................................................................119

5.7.1 Device Info/Rack Controller Menu Window..............................................119

5.7.2 Device Info/Amplifier x Menu Window......................................................120

5.8 Pump Units Menu ...........................................................................................120

5.8.1 Pump Units > Status Menu Window..........................................................121

5.8.2 Pump Units > PUC Order Menu Window .................................................121

5.8.3 Pump Units > PUC x Menu ......................................................................1225.8.3.1 Pump Units > PUC x > Status Menu Window ................................................1225.8.3.2 Pump Units > PUC x > Measure Menu Window ............................................1245.8.3.3 Pump Units > PUC x > Configuration Menu Window .....................................1245.8.3.4 Pump Units > PUC x > Device Info Menu Window ........................................1255.8.3.5 Pump Units > PUC x > Pump x > Measure Menu Window ............................1265.8.3.6 Pump Units > PUC x > Fan x > Measure Menu Window ...............................127

6 Other Menus.....................................................................................128

6.1 TxTool Menu: Saving Transmitter Information ..........................................128

6.1.1 Functions in LogBooks Window ...............................................................129

6.2 SW Backup/Restore Menu: Back Up Entire System ...................................130

6.3 Storage Menu: Saving Exciter Data................................................................131

6.3.1 Saving Parameter Data ............................................................................132

6.3.2 Recalling Parameter Data ........................................................................133

1 Operating Options

The transmitter is controlled using the R&S NetCCU800. The R&S NetCCU800 can be op-erated in the following ways:

- Local operation via the display and menu keys on the front panel of the R&SNetCCU800

- Operation via the web browser

- Monitoring and control via SNMP

If the unit is operated via the web browser of a connected PC/client computer, two modes are possible:

- Remote operation via a directly connected PC (connector on front panel)

- Remote control via a remotely connected network client (connector on rear panel)

1.1 Local Operation

1.1.1 Menu Keys

Key Meaning / function

MENU Starts the menu control function (activation from the system overview); calls a context menu (activation from menu)

BACK Cancels an entered value if not confirmed with OK; used to move one step back in the menu

HOME Used to return from the menu tree to the system overview.

FUNCTION Calls a context menu for the current menu entry

OK Confirms an entry or selection

Key Meaning /function

STATUS Displays the system logbook (when activated from the system overview); displays the status screen for a system component (when activated after selecting a system component from the menu)

CURSOR KEYS← → ↑ ↓

Used to move through the menu structure and to highlight menu elements; used to select entries

1.1.2 Operating StructureJL

1.1.2.1 Navigation in Menu System

Different entry screens and menus are displayed depending on whether the R&S NetCCU800 is used as a NetCCU (transmitter control) or as an NCU/NSU (control of low-power transmitters / control of n+1 systems).

This is how you navigate within the menu system:

1. Press the MENU key.

The menu is called.

When you access the menu system for the first time, you are logged on by default under the user ID Operation which authorizes you to make settings that directly affect trans-mitter operation.

2. Select the required menu and confirm with OK.

The overview for the selected menu is then opened (here NetCCU).

1) Window and title bar for higher-level menus

2) Window and title bar for lower-level menus (submenus of the main menu selected in the window at the left)3) Window and title bar with explanation of currently selected menu4) Menu contains additional submenus (no arrow symbol: a menu window will open)5) Not all available menus are displayed (use cursor keys to scroll up/down)

3. Using the cursor keys in the left/right part of the window, select a menu and confirm withOK.

If additional submenus are available, the higher-level menus are shown in the left-hand window and the lower-level menus are shown in the right-hand window.

4. Using the cursor keys (up/down), select another menu or menu window from the rightside of the window and confirm with OK.

Using the cursor keys (up/down), select an entry in the menu window and confirm withOK.

1)The entry can be edited.

2) The entry cannot be edited (no authorization (logon) or setting not possible in this constellation)

By using the or key, you can call up a context menu from any position.

Use the key to go back one step in the menu structure (even from the Help win-

dows); you can also use BACK to cancel an entered value as long as you have not already confirmed it with OK.

Use the key to exit the menu structure and return to the system overview.

! Selecting and Editing Entries

The possibility of changing settings is controlled by a user administration facility with autho-rization system (see the section "User Administration") and a local/remote concept which is valid for the entire transmitter.

Local and Remote operating modes

Local means the transmitter can be configured onsite. Local access is available via the dis-play on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800or by PC via the local Ethernet port.

Remote means the transmitter can be configured offsite. Remote access is available via the remote port on the transmitter.

Since local and remote operation are mutually exclusive, configuration work carried out on-site cannot collide with settings entered remotely. However, it is always possible to view transmitter settings.

The Local key on the R&S NetCCU800 is used to switch between the local and remote op-erating modes.

Locked and variable settings

Depending on the user rights concerned and the type of access (local or remote access) some or all processing parameters can be locked. These include restrictions arising from the actual constellation chosen. An appropriate symbol in front of the parameter value shows whether or not a parameter can be changed at this time.

Symbol Meaning

The present user can change the setting. A change takes effect straight away.

The present user can change the setting. For the change to take of the R&S NetCCU800 a) (and possibly the exciter b)) must be

effect, a restart carried out.

The setting cannot be changed at the present time. Possible reasons: - The user does not have the necessary rights. c) - Access is via the remote port when the R&S NetCCU800 is in local mode. - Access is local when the R&S NetCCU800 is in remote mode.

Setting is not possible in this constellation.

This parameter value is for a display; it cannot be set.

a) To restart the R&S NetCCU800, run the Restart command in the SW Maintenance context menu.b) If the parameter identified in this way is a setting for the exciter (Exciter.......menu path), the exciter must be

restarted and then the R&S NetCCU800. To restart the exciter, run the Reboot Tx command in the Tx Setup context menu (Exciter menu).

c) The Info command from the context menu gives information on the necessary user rights among otherthings.

Examples:

1) Due to insufficient user rights, the selected parameter cannot be changed at this time2) Operation access rights are needed in order to change this setting

Selecting entries

The Edit... selection window is displayed as soon as you click OK to confirm a field that provides a choice.

1)The entry can be edited.2)The entry cannot be edited (no authorization (logon) or setting not possible in this constellation)

1. Using the cursor keys (up/down), select an entry in the Edit... selection window.

2. Confirm the selection with OK.

Your selection is saved and the Edit... selection window closes.

Use the key to finish editing the menu.

1) Setting can be changed, but the R&S NetCCU800needs to be restarted2) Setting can be changed; a change takes effect straight away

Editing entries

The editor is displayed as soon as you click OK to confirm a field that can be used to enter customized text or numbers.

Note The "Selectable characters" area of the editor only ever offers you the characters neededfor the box you selected (e.g. only numbers and a point for entering an Ethernet address).

1) Entry line2) Selectable characters3) Command line

Entering characters:

1. Use the arrow keys to place the cursor at the desired position on the "entry line".

1. Using the cursor keys, select the required character from the "Selectable characters"area and confirm with the OK key.

The selected character appears in the "entry line".

Deleting characters:

1. Use the arrow keys to place the cursor at the desired position on the "entry line".

2. Use the cursor keys to select Del Char from the "command line" and confirm with OK.

Characters in the "entry line" are deleted starting at the cursor position and going from right to left.

Saving or rejecting changes:

1. To save changes (current entry in the entry line), use the cursor keys to select Enter text from the "command line" and confirm with OK.

Your changes are saved and the editor closes.

If you want the editor to stay open after saving (e.g. when testing settings), select Fix Editor from the context menu. The editor then stays open until you close it by pressing the Back key.

or

To close the editor without saving the changes, use the cursor keys to select Discard from the "command line" and confirm with the OK key.

The editor closes and your changes are not saved.

Use the HOME key to finish editing the menu.

1.1.2.3 Context Menu

The context menu contains function- and content-oriented commands which can be applied to the currently displayed menu.

The context menu can be called from any position using the key.

You can find the content-oriented commands in the description for the menu window con-cerned. The function-oriented commands are listed and described below:

Command Explanation

Change User Used to change the user profile

Info Help text for the menu window or menu entry concerned; also, in the case of menu entries, information on which user rights are needed in order to make changes

Open Used to open a menu/menu window (alternative to the OK key)

Edit Used to edit a menu item (alternative to the OK key)

Submit Changes Used to save changes made offline

Edit Online Used to edit a menu item online; standard setting which can only changed by selecting Edit Offline

be

Enter Text In editor only: Used to save entries (alternative to the 'Enter text1

mand in the editor command line) corn-

Discard In editor only: Used to discard entries (alternative to the 'Discard' mand in the editor command line)

corn-

Command Explanation

Fix Editor In editor only: The editor remains open for further editing have been saved or discarded

after entries

Add to bookmarks The current menu window is saved as a bookmark; the menu windows can be opened directly using the menu item "Bookmarks" in the Status window

Bookmarks (in Sys-tem Overview only)

In System Overview only: Menu windows saved as bookmarks can be opened directly

Trigger Used to trigger a change (same as OK key)

Function Menu Used to display the Status > Tx Status menu

1.2 Remote Operation and Remote Control

Remote control (e.g. via a network) and remote operation (e.g. via a PC) both require a web browser.

Depending on their rights, logged-on users can monitor the transmitter in question or con-trol all of its functions. There is no difference between remote operation and remote control with respect to this functionality.

As standard, the R&S NetCCU800 contains the necessary components for remote operation and remote control:

O Network connector (10/100 Mbit)

O Network card (RJ-45) O RJ-45

crossover cable

1.2.1 Installation and Configuration

Connecting a PC/network client

1. Using an RJ-45 crossover cable, connect the Ethernet socket on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 to a local PC.

or

Using an RJ45 1:1 cable, connect the X1 socket on the transmitter roof to the station network.

Network clients can communicate with the transmitter via the NETLINK interface (X5), which is connected to X100A, on the rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800.

Fig. 3 Link to a network using an RJ-45 1:1 cable connection

Entering IP address at R&S NetCCU800

Before you can use a browser to connect to the R&S NetCCU800 via the connector on the rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800, you must enter the IP address required for communi -cation directly via the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 or have the IP address assigned automatically. To permit this, the R&S NetCCU800 must be set to local mode (press the Lo -cal key so that the appropriate LED lights up).

The parameters for connection to the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 are preset and cannot be changed.

The R&S NetCCU800has an integrated DHCP client to allow automatic address assign-ment. For automatic integration into a network, the network must contain a DHCP server.

1. Select the menu NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Network > Rear Ethernet at thefront panel of the R&S NetCCU800.

2. From the context menu, select the Edit Offline mode.

3. To assign the required IP address data automatically, select the ON switch position under DHCP Client.

x--_

Select the OFF switch position under DHCP Client and enter the parameters IP Ad-dress, Subnet Mask and Gateway.

4. In the context menu, select Submit Changes.

The changes will be made.

Configuring the browser

Before you can operate the R&S NetCCU800 via your browser, the following conditions must be satisfied:

- Javascript must be enabled.

- "Java Platform Standard Edition" must be installed and activated.

If you are still using an older software version on the R&S NetCCU800, you may sometimes have to enable setting of cookies. From version 1.11.0 and higher, however, this is no longer necessary.

The next section uses Microsoft Internet Explorer to explain how you can check whether these conditions have been met or what changes you need to make.

Please note that the settings described here need not necessarily match your current browser settings one hundred percent.

ATTENTION!Please note that the modified settings described here may adversely affect the security ofyour Internet connections.

The necessary changes and settings can be found in the Tools > Internet Options menu on your Internet Explorer.

Checking and adapting the settings for Java Applets

1. Select the Security tab.

2. For the Internet zone select the Custom Level option.

3. In the tree structure go to Scripting > Scripting of Java applets and select the Enableoption.

Installing Java (Sun) JRE if necessary; checking and adapting the settings

1. Select the Advanced tab.

2. Check whether the entry Java (Sun) JRE ... is present and enabled.

3. If necessary, download and install (standard installation) the Java Runtime Environmentfrom the Sun website "www.java.com".

4. Then select the Internet Explorer's Advanced tab again and check whether the softwareis installed and enabled.

Launching program

To be able to operate the R&S NetCCU800via a PC connected to the front panel, the R&S NetCCU800 must be set to local mode (press the key so that the appropriate LEDlights up).

1. Start the browser on your PC or client.

1. Enter the same IP address as you entered at the R&S NetCCU800.

The login screen appears.

3. Log on using the ID you require and confirm with OK.

The corresponding entry screen appears.

Factory-set user IDs

User ID Authorization Password

Configuration Allows you to set basic transmitter parameters; e.g. setup 1234

Maintenance Allows you to perform maintenance tasks; e.g. software update

1234

Operation Allows you to make settings that directly affect transmitter operation

1234

Query Read-only authorization 1234

Guest Read-only authorization - see Query 1234

Config-Engl Same as Configuration authorization; this ID also changes the menu language to English (irrespective of the preset language, e.g. Chinese)

1234

Superuser For configuring, creating and deleting user profiles, and for displaying and deleting active sessions; no authorization for setting transmitter parameters - see Query

1234

The IDs Superuser and Guest are only available for the web browser.

Can't log on?

Logging on can fail for the following reasons:

- Three other users already logged on via the web browser. The maximum permitted number of simultaneous sessions has been reached. On the other hand it is always possibleto log on as Superuser.

- Incorrect ID and/or password entered.

After three failed attempts at logging on, the requesting IP address is prevented from logging on for 30 minutes.

1.2.2 Browser-Based Operation

When you log on, the following entry screen will appear:

1) System Overview: current transmitter status2) Measure Values: display of the forward and reflected power3) Navigator: display and navigation through the transmitter menus4) Menu window: displays the menus selected in the navigator5) Control panel: Elements for navigating within the menu system and displaying and editing menu entries1) Context menu (in this example the remotely logged on user cannot run any commands (key symbol), since

the R&S NetCCU800is in local mode)6) Transmitter name display7) User name display (according to login details)8) Group membership display (authorization level)2) Session type display: In the case of "Session is remote" the user logged on via the remote Ethernet port; in

the case of "Session is local" the user logged in via the local Ethernet port9) Total number of users logged on via web browser

System Overview

The System Overview window provides an overview showing the current status of the transmitter and its components.

>

Measure Values

The current forward power and reflected power are displayed in the Measure Values win-dow.

Navigator

The Navigator shows the menus of all transmitter components. You can open individual folders or menus under Transmitter by double-clicking them. The selected menus are dis-played in the menu window.

You can also call up the following functions in the Navigator:


Bookmarks Display of all bookmarks: you can go directly to the selected menu dow by double-clicking or by selecting Open in the context menu

win-

Transmitter Starts operation of the transmitter menu

Precorrection Initiates calibration of the exciters

Storage Saves and imports the parameter settings

Backup / Restore Externally backs up and restores the system settings (including operating system)

User Administration Calls up the user administration function

SNMP Downloads and saves MIBs

Language Properties Downloads, installs and uninstalls customer-specific language versions

Visit R&S Website Link to the R&S website

Legal Notices Information regarding license agreements

TxTool Calls up the TxTool

Menu window

The menu selected in the Navigator window is displayed in the menu window.

1) Double-arrow symbol: The entry can be changed

Control panel

You can use the control panel to navigate within the menu structure and menus and to change settings in the menu window. You can activate the individual control elements with the mouse or keyboard.

1) For switching between menu entries, for accessing editable values and for entering numerical values; eachclick on the cursor keys (up/down) increments or decrements the number (corresponding to the cursor keyson the keyboard)

2) For editing (change to editing mode) and confirming settings (corresponds to the enter key on the keyboard)3) Corresponds to the UP and DOWN cursor keys4) Used for quickly switching between menu items, for quickly accessing editable values and for quickly entering

numeric values; can be rotated using the mouse5) Generally used to move one level back in the menu structure; also used to cancel settings that have not yet

been confirmed with OK6) Return to home menu7) Displays the context menus for the current menu window or menu item (standard context menus: Info: help

texts together with, in the case of menu items, information on which user rights are needed in order to makechanges; Open: opens a menu or menu item; Edit: for editing an entry; Edit Offline: the item can be editedwithout the change being applied immediately; Submit Change: submits an item edited offline); see also Context Menu under Local Operation

8) Not enabled in this software version

Locked and variable settings

Depending on the user rights concerned and the type of access (local or remote access) some or all processing parameters can be locked. These include restrictions arising from the actual constellation chosen. An appropriate symbol in front of the parameter value shows whether or not a parameter can be changed at this time.

Symbol Meaning

The present user can change the setting. A change takes effect straight away.

The present user can change the setting. For the change to take effect, a restart of the R&S NetCCU800a) (and possibly the exciter b)) must be carried out.

Symbol MeaningThe setting cannot be changed at the present time. Possible reasons: - The user does not have the necessary rights. c) - Access is via the remote port when the R&S NetCCU800 is in local mode. - Access is local when the R&S NetCCU800 is in remote mode.

Setting is not possible in this constellation. - none - This parameter value is for a

display; it cannot be set.

a) To restart the R&S NetCCU800, run the Restart command in the SW Maintenance context menu.b) If the parameter identified in this way is a setting for the exciter (Exciter.......menu path), the exciter must be

restarted and then the R&S NetCCU800. To restart the exciter, run the Reboot Tx command in the Tx Setup context menu (Exciter menu).

c) The Info command from the context menu gives information on the necessary user rights among otherthings.

Examples:

1) The selected parameter cannot be modified at this time (due to insufficient user authorization)2) Operation rights are needed to modify the setting

1.2.2.1 End of Session

Use the Logoff button to log off from the system correctly. If you close the browser window without logging off, the session is automatically terminated after two minutes at most.

If the present connection was cut (e.g. because the unit was restarted), a popup window tells you that you need to log on again. Logging on again opens a new session.

1) Setting can be changed, but the R&S NetCCU800 needs to be restarted2) Setting can be modified; any change will take effect immediately

The IP address displayed in the popup window can vary depending on the system and set-ting.

1.3 User Administration

The user administration facility is available in conjunction with browser-based operation. The settings that you make in the user administration facility are (provided that no password is required) also valid for menu access via local operation.

You can use the user administration facility to

- change user profiles (users and access rights)

- create new user profiles

- delete user profiles

- close active sessions

The ID Superuser with the factory-set password 1234 gives you extensive user adminis-tration rights.

1. Log on as Superuser.

2. Select User Administration in the Navigator window.

The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed.

Display Meaning

Select Selects the user to be processed

Name User ID

Logged on The user is not logged on (No) or is logged on once/several times (X times) at the system

Web browser The user ID and authorization permit operation via the web (Yes, No)

browser

Front panel The user ID and authorization permit local operation (Yes, No)

Access right Authorization to access transmitter parameters

Is Admin Additional user administration authorization (configuration, creation and deletion of user profiles)

The following users are factory-set. Only the password can be changed for these users.


Configuration Allows you to set basic transmitter parameters; e.g. setup 1234


1234


1234



Guest Read-only authorization - see Query 1234


1234

Superuser For configuring, creating and deleting user profiles, and for displaying and deleting active sessions; no authoriza-tion for setting transmitter parameters - see Query

1234

1.3.1 Creating, Changing and Deleting Users

Creating users

1. Select Add new user.

Entry/selection Explanation

Name: User ID (case-sensitive)

Password: Must be at least 6 characters in length (case-sensitive)

Retype password: Enter the password again (case-sensitive)

Web browser The user ID permits menu access via the web browser

Front panel The user ID permits local operation

Entry/selection Explanation

Access right Selects a factory-set authorization level

Is admin The user is also given user administration rights (configuration, cre-ation and deletion of users; no access to the user profiles Super-user and Guest)

3. Confirm your entries with Add user; clicking Reset discards your entries.

Changing users

All users have the right to change their own password.

1. Mark the required user.

2. Select Change selected user.

3. Change the user profile in the way described under "Creating users".

4. Confirm your changes with Change User; clicking Reset discards your changes.

Deleting users

1. Mark the required user.

2. Select Delete selected user.

The user is deleted.

1.3.2 Closing Active Sessions

If you are logged on as Superuser, you can view detailed information on logged-on users and close active sessions.

1. After logging on, select Show session list.

2. Mark the session (the user) that you want to close.

3. Select Delete selected session.

The marked session is closed.

4. Return to the previous browser window by clicking Show user list.

1.4 Monitoring and Control via SNMP

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used for monitoring and controlling a wide variety of different units in a network. Detailed information about this topic can be found under http://www.wikipedia.org/.

A description of the unit - the MIB (Management Information Base) - must be loaded in the central unit ("manager") from which the transmitters are monitored.

A monitored unit contains a program ("agent") which can answer queries from the manager and execute commands. Furthermore, the agent may of its own accord generate a mes-sage and send it to the manager. In this way, the central unit can be informed of a fault.

1.4.1 Installation

The MIBs required for monitoring and controlling a transmitter are stored as a ZIP archive directly in the transmitter control unit and can be downloaded from there using any network-compatible unit. All of the information required for configuration is contained in the MIBs themselves.

When the transmitter is put into operation, both the agent in the transmitter and the manag-er must be configured. Additional steps may be necessary if the transmitter is connected via routers, firewalls or similar devices as they may block data packets.

O The XX8000 transmitter family supports the versions SNMPvl and SNMPv2c. O

Alarms can be sent as vlTraps, v2Traps or v2lnforms.

• «

O Several destinations can be set for fault messages (alarm sinks).

O Several communities can be set with Read Only authorization and Read/Write authori-zation.

1.4.1.1 Settings on Transmitter Side

You can make settings yourself via the local display (if available), the web server or SNMP. The menu windows of the SNMP menu contain all the settings that are required for access-ing a transmitter.

Changes to these settings are adopted immediately. The device does not need to be re-started.

• 4

Detailed information about the individual parameters can be found in the descriptions of the respective menu windows.

1.4.1.2 Settings on Manager Side

To be able to monitor and control a transmitter with SNMP, the MIB of the device and a pro-gram which can interpret the MIB must be available on the manager side.

You can load all available MIBs from any device using a web browser.

1. Log on using the web browser and select the SNMP Administration menu.

MIBs from Rohde&Schwarz and IRT are available. MIBs from IRT allow transmitters to be linked using SNMP irrespective of the manufacturer. They are, however, limited with respect to their functionality. When using IRT MIBs, you can select the "Inhibit Status" for local operation (in the same way as for the parallel contacts). If this function is acti-vated, no alarms/traps are sent when the transmitter is in local mode. You can activate/ deactivate this function using Inhibit Status in the SNMP > General menu window.

The MIBs have the naming convention RS-XX8000-<TV/Radio Standard>-<Standby Concept/Option>-MIB. An example is RS-XX8000-ATV-TX-MIB for signal transmitters for analog TV.

Examples of MIBs and contents:

MIB Description

RS-COMMON-MIB Contains general Rohde&Schwarz definitions

RS-XX8000-COM-MON-MIB

Contains definitions which all XX8000 transmitters fulfill (e.g. type plate, configuration)

RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-MIB

Contains definitions for DVB single transmitters, passive exciter standby, active and passive output-stage standby

RS-XX8000-DVB-NP1-MIB

Contains definitions for DVB n+1 systems

RS-XX8000-DVB-NTX-MIB

Contains definitions that an R&S NetCCU800 provides as access for n different, independent DVB transmitters

RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-REC-MIB

Contains definitions for the optional DVB receiver in a transmitter

RS-XX8000-DVB-NP1-REC-MIB

Contains definitions for the optional DVB receiver(s) in an n+1 sys-tem

RS-XX8000-FM-TX-MIB

Contains definitions for FM single transmitters with passive exciter standby and active and passive output-stage standby

RS-XX8000-FM-NP1-MIB

Contains definitions for FM n+1 systems

RS-XX8000-ATV-TX-MIB

Contains definitions for analog TV single transmitters with passive exciter standby and active and passive output-stage standby

MIB Description

RS-XX8000-ATV-NP1-MIB

Contains definitions for analog TV n+1 systems

2. Save the required ZIP file to your PC.

3. Load the following MIBs:

a) RS-COMMON-MIB

b) RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB

c) MIB of the standby concept or option

A detailed description of the MIBs, the information that they contain and the associated op-tions is given below.

1.4.1.3 Testing SNMP Communication

SNMP communications is properly set up if you have loaded the MIBs in your program and you are using the correct IP address of the transmitter and the correct community. For que-ries and settings you must set the SNMP version in your manager; the transmitters detect the used protocol automatically.

The following query can be used as a simple test:

In the example above, a transmitter with the IP address 10.123.10.7 queries the OID (Ob-jectldentifier: unique designation of a data point) serialNumber (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.1.1.1.2). The reply from the agent is 100111.

• <

Using a further test, you can check whether the transmitter sends an alarm message in the event of an error and whether this message reaches the alarm destinations. To do so, set an OID sendTestTrap (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.1.1.2.3) to the value 2, which triggers a testTrap (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.1.2.0.1). This alarm is sent to all receivers which have been entered for the alarms (Trapsinks, see above).

This type of fault message functions in a slightly different way than that used for querying and setting values (default: UDP Port 161 for SET/GET and UDP Port 162 for alarms).

The following illustration shows that the testTrap has been received correctly by the unit with the serial number 100111.

Known problems

If querying the data does not work or if you do not receive an alarm, check the following:

- Has the network been connected correctly? Does the SNMP connection function exclusively via the remote Ethernet interface of the device (R&S NetCCU800: X5 -R&S Sx800/SX801: ?

- Are the network settings (IP address, gateway) correct?

- Has the correct Community been entered for accessing the manager and the transmitter(case-sensitive)?

- Is a PC firewall blocking incoming SNMP packets?

- Has the program which receives alarms been started and correctly configured?

- In large networks: Is a router or firewall blocking the SNMP packets?

- Is message suppression (Inhibit Status in the SNMP > General menu) activated?

1.4.1.4 Configuration

This chapter provides an overview of the available properties.

RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB

This MIB contains general data that supports every unit:

- Type plate: serial number, software version, etc

- SNMP configuration: table for alarm destinations and alarm versions

- Triggering of a test trap

- Counter for counting the transmitted traps

- List of the alarm messages last transmitted

- Parameters which are used in several other MIBs

This information always applies to the instrument that is being monitored via SNMP.

RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-MIB

This MIB contains the parameters for:

- the standby concepts "single transmitter", "passive exciter standby", "active output-stage standby" and "passive output-stage standby"

- all power classes (low-power, medium-power and high-power)

- air-cooled and liquid-cooled transmitters

Different parameters are available depending on the system being queried. For example, cmdTxOpModeExcAutomatic (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.1.1.1.7) gives the reply NoSuchName if you query a single transmitter since this transmitter does not have an au-tomatic exciter function. It is easy to find out which parameters are valid by checking the "module compliances" (e.g. under .1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.5.2).

Example: DVB configuration, passive exciter standby, medium power, optional DVB receiver module with two inputs.

Valid MIBs:

RS-COMMON-MIB RS-XX8000-

COMMON-MIB • RS-XX8000-DVB-

TX-M1B - RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-

REC-MIB

The valid OlDs for the transmitter are contained in the "Module Compliance" path. The OID contains references to the individual groups.

Fig. 6 List of parameters (excerpt) for groupDualDriveMP

1) Name and OID for DualTuner2) Reference to groupDualTuner- 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.2.5.1.33) groupAlarmDualTuner- 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.2.5.1.5

The groups contain all valid OlDs. The valid OlDs for the receiver module are contained in the "Module Compliance" path of the RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-REC-MIB. The OID contains references to the individual groups. The groups contain all valid OlDs.

RS-XX8000-DVB-NP1 -MIB

This MIB contains all the parameters required for any DVB n+1 system, irrespective of the following features of the individual transmitter:

- variant

- power class

- cooling system

Once again, unavailable parameters receive the reply NoSuchName, e.g. parameters from the transmitter A8 if only a 4+1 system is available (see module compliances under .1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.2).

Setting alarms

The transmitter-specific alarms offer an extensive range of configuration possibilities.

Depending on the available system, it is possible to set detailed alarms: for example, for every item of status information in every amplifier in every rack of every transmitter in a me-dium-power n+1 system. In addition, it is also possible to assign a freely selectable priority and to check the current status.

In the illustration above, the following information is contained in the highlighted row (de-pending on the used MIB; here: DVB n+1 medium-power system):

Position of code number Meaning of position Value Meaning of value

1 Transmitter 1 Transmitter TxB

2 Output stage 1 Output stage A

3 Transmitter rack 1 Transmitter rack No. 1

4 Amplifier 4 Amplifier No. 4

5 Event 84 Amplifier ON/OFF

Table 7 "Instance" column (1.1. 1.4.84) in numeric order

Column Meaning Value Explanation

eventTxName(6) Designation of event txAmpPowerOn(84) Amplifier ON/OFF

eventTxMask(7) Message for event disable(2) No alarm is sent

Column Meaning Value Explanation

eventTxPriority(8) Priority for event Value freely selectable by customer

Default setting when supplied: 1

eventTxEvent(9) Current status of amplifier

active(1) (inactive(2))

Amplifier ON (Amplifier OFF)

Table 8 Meaning of other columns

The columns containing the value Not accessible are "index" columns (identified by IDX). OlDs of these columns cannot be queried; they are used for internal purposes only.

Example: DVB, N+1, low power

Valid MIBs:

- RS-COMMON-MIB

- RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB

- RS-XX8000-DVB-NP1-MIB

Valid OlDs in "Module Compliance" path for N+1 low power:

- Name: rsXx8000DVBNplus1LP

- OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.2.2

Groups:

- groupNsuLP -1.36.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.6

- groupAlarmNsuLP" - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.7

- groupTxLP- 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.8

- groupAlarmTxLP -1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.9

- groupEvents -1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.5

2 Menus of R&S NetCCU800 2.1

Overview of Menus

R&S NetCCU800menu structure

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

Status

Tx Status

RF Status

Device Status

Logbook

Summary

Status

Warning

Fault

Operation

Setup

TX Setup

Option Keys

Status

Install

Deactivation

R&S NetCCU800 menu structure


NetCCU Setup

Common

Date / Time

System

SW Maintenance

SW Backup/ Restore

Network

Front Ethernet

Rear Ethernet

Services

SNMP

General

Manager

Alarmsinks

NTP

RS232

ParlO Cards Order

General Purpose ParlO

RF Probe Antenna

RF Vision a)

RF Sound a)

RF Probe Forward

RF Probe Reflected

Device Info

R&S NetCCU800 menu structure


NetCCU

Mainboard

Parameter Set

a) Analog TV only

2.2 Login

Various authorization levels protect against nondeliberate access of critical system settings from the home menu. When you start local operation via the keypad and display of the R&S NetCCU800, your user ID is Operation by default.

If you have the appropriate authorization, you can change, create or delete user profiles us-ing the user administration facility (called up via the web browser).

You can change your user ID in any menu using the Change User context menu. No pass-word is required to change the user ID under local control (according to the factory default). You can also protect access via the front panel by entering a password.

The following factory-default user profiles are available for local operation:

User ID Authorization Password a)

Configuration Allows you to set basic transmitter parameters; e.g. setup

1234


1234


1234



1234

a) By default the password (factory setting: 1234) is needed only for browser-based operation. Every user ca change his/her own password via the user administration program.

Change of user via the front panel by entering a password (example)

In the following example a user profile "Schmidt" has been set up in user administratio The user has obtained authorization for local control, but must enter a password.

1. From the context menu, call the Change User command.

2. Go to Select user from list and select the user Schmidt <pw>.

The "<pw>" in angle brackets tells you that a password is needed.

2.3 Status Menu

The Status menu provides an overview of faults, warnings and status messages relating to the individual components and functions of the transmitter.

2.3.1 Tx Status Menu Window

The TX Status menu window provides an overview of faults, warnings and status messag-es relating to the communication and standby status of the transmitter.

The TX Status menu window is divided into the following three sections (from top left to bot-tom right):

- Sum fault / sum warning / local mode

- Status messages relating to automatic exciter switchover function

- Status messages relating to automatic amplifier-stage switchover function


Fault Red: Sum message "Fault"; a fault has occurred in the transmitter sys-tem

Warning Yellow: Sum message "Warning"; a warning message has been output in the transmitter system

Local Yellow: R&S NetCCU800 has been switched over to local mode

ExciterAuto Ready

Auto Chan.

Auto Fault

Comm Ex. A

Comm. Ex. B

Green: Automatic exciter switchover function is ready Yellow: Automatic exciter switchover function is not ready

Yellow: Switchover to standby exciter; Auto Ready indicator is yellow

Red: A fault occurred during switchover to the standby exciter Red:

Communication error between R&S NetCCU800and exciter A Red:

Communication error between R&S NetCCU800 and exciter B OutputstageAuto Ready

Green: Automatic output-stage switchover function is ready Yellow: Automatic output-stage switchover function is not ready

Function ExplanationAuto Chan. Yellow: Switchover to standby output stage; Auto Ready indicator is yellowAuto Fault Red: A fault occurred during switchover to the standby output stageComm. OS. A Red: Communication error between R&S NetCCU800 and output stage AComm OS. B Red: Communication error between R&S NetCCU800 and output stage B

2.3.2 RF Status Menu Window

The RF Status menu window provides an overview of the transmitter's RF status.


RFOn Green: Antenna output power above the set fault threshold

RFOK Green: Antenna output power above the set warning threshold

Reduced RF (ATV only)

Yellow: Transmitter has reduced its output power

Loop Program Green: Closed operation loop Yellow: Open operation loop

Loop Dummyload Green: Closed operation loop Yellow: Open operation loop

2.3.3 Device Status Menu Window

The Device Status menu window provides an overview of faults, warnings and status mes-sages relating to the R&S NetCCU800.

Function Description

Power Supply Red: Internal power supply of the R&S NetCCU800 has failed; otherwise greenRight: Displays the check value of the internal voltage supply; the cor-rect value is in the range 1 .86 to 2.28 V

Device Temp. Red: Temperature inside the R&S NetCCU800 greenRight: Displays the current temperature

is too high; otherwise

Fan Yellow: Fan of the R&S NetCCU800 has failed ; otherwise green

2.4 Logbook Menu

You can use the Logbook menu to query status and error messages relating to the R&S NetCCU800, to delete these messages and to restore deleted messages. The menu win-dows of the logbook provide an overview of the status, warning and error messages relating to the R&S NetCCU800.

You can call up logbook entries in the windows Summary, Status, Warning and Fault The structure of the four windows is identical.

The following table explains the meaning of the columns:

Column Explanation

No Consecutive entry number

Message Message

Time Time at which the message was received

Date Date on which the message was received

The arrows in the second column have the following meaning:

Arrow direc-tion

Arrow color Explanation

Up The event has just occurred.

Down The event is no longer current or relevant.

Red Fault

Yellow Warning

Green Status

Using the context menu, you can delete (Clear logbook) and restore (Restore logbook) status and error messages.

2.4.1 Summary Menu


Clear logbook Clears all entries in the current logbook; clearing individual logbook entries is not possible.When you clear the complete logbook, the partial logbooks are also cleared. A Reset Fault is triggered at the same time.

Restore logbook Restores the cleared entries in the current logbook.When you restore the complete logbook, the partial logbooks are also restored.

2.5 Operation Menu Window

In the Operation menu window you can make settings for the standby behavior and for the exciter and amplifier.


Tx-Operation

Program On/Off ON/OFF command for transmitter (exciter and output stage); corre-sponds to the hard key on the front panel

Reserve On/Off ON/OFF command for standby transmitter (all components that are not connected to an antenna)

Preselection

Exciter A/B Used to select the active exciter

Outputstage A/B Used to select the active output stage

Automatic


Exciter On/Off Used to switch the automatic exciter switchover function to active or not

active

Ready Status of the automatic exciter switchover function:

Green: Automatic switchover function is ready for operation Yellow: Automatic switchover function is ready for operation

Changed Yellow: Main exciter has been switched over to the standby exciter; Ready indicator is yellow

Delay Delay before a switchover occurs so that a brief fault does not immedi-ately trigger a switchover.

Outputstage On/Off (only with passive output-stage standby = passive PA)

Used to switch the automatic amplifier switchover function to active or not active

Ready Status of the automatic amplifier switchover function:

Green: Automatic switchover function is ready for operation Yellow: Automatic switchover function is not ready for operation

Changed Yellow: Main amplifier has been switched over to the standby amplifier; Ready indicator is yellow

Delay Delay before a switchover occurs so that a brief fault does not immedi-ately trigger a switchover.

Automatic ready after changeover (with standby systems only)

If this function is activated, the automatic function can assume the "Ready" state again following switchover. Switchover is then possible again.

Reset on program off If this function is activated, the OFF command also executes a reset fault (see below).

Reset Fault (context menu)

Used to reset fault indicatorsThe function has the same effect as the RESET FAULT key on the front panel of the exciter and also belongs to the range of functions available for remote operation via the R&S NetCCU800.


TX Mode Used to select the transmitter standard - NoExciter: R&S NetCCU800is operated as a standalone instrument (e.g. in combination with the DVB-T receiver module option) - Multi: Both exciters in a transmitter use different standards - FM: Analog sound broadcasting standard - ATV: Analog TV standard - ATSC: Digital TV standard (USA) - DAB: Digital audio broadcasting standard - DVB-T/H: Digital TV standard (Europe) - DTMB: Digital TV standard (South America, Asia, Europe) - MediaFLO: Digital TV standard (USA) - ISDB-T: Digital TV standard (Brazil, Japan)

ATV mode Selection only possible if ATV is set under Tx Mode - Split Single: Vision signal and sound signal are transmitted separately via one amplifier each (single = 1 sound carrier) - Comb Single: Vision signal and sound signal are transmitted via one amplifier (same channel) (single = 1 sound carrier) - Split Dual: Vision signal and sound signal are transmitted separately via one amplifier each (dual = 2 sound carriers) - Comb Dual: Vision signal and sound signal are transmitted via one amplifier (same channel) (dual = 2 sound carriers)

Power mode Used to set the power class - Low - Medium - High

Cooling system Used cooling systemThe following setting is preset for Power Mode "Low" or "Medium": - Air: Air coolingThe following settings can be selected for Power Mode "High": - Liquid: Transmitter is connected to an external cooling system which is used to cool the entire station - Liquid PUC: Transmitter has its own cooling system (R&S ZK810)

Tx Type Used to set the standby behavior: - Single Tx: Standby system (see below) - Dual Drive: Standby system (see below) - Passive PA: Standby system (see below) - Active PA: Standby system (see below)


Power Switch Used to set the hardware configuration for antenna switchover. The fol-lowing options are available: - "Manual" for manual antenna switchover - "Automatic" for electronic antenna switchover

Antenna type Country-specific setting for the antenna type; the default setting is Full

Amplifier type Setting the amplifier type (for Power Mode = "High" only) - Vx8000: Amplifier with CAN bus connection, e.g. R&S VH8600A1 Information about number and type of (active) amplifiers are read in via the CAN bus and transferred to the transmitter control unit. - VM6000: Amplifier without CAN bus connection, e.g. R&S VM602A1 Together with the setting Number of Amplifiers in the Outputstage > Setup > Rack Setup > Rack x > Rack Controller menu, the transmitter control unit receives the required information about type and number of (active!) amplifiers.With the information about type and number of active! amplifiers, the pump control unit (for Power Mode = "High") determines the rated flow.

Basic setup of transmitter standby systems

Transmitter standby system Setting: Tx Type

Setting: Power Switch

Single transmitter system (without standby) Single Tx Manual

2 exciters / 1 output stage; if one exciter fails, switchover to second exciter

Dual Drive Manual

2 exciters / 2 output stages; if one exciter or output stage fails, switchover to other exciter or output stage

Passive PA Automatic

2 exciters / 2 output stages; if one output stage fails, transmission at half power (failure of an exciter has no negative consequences)

Active PA Manual /Automatic

2.6.2 Option Keys Menu

Certain features of the device are activated using the Option Keys mechanism.

Each available software option can be enabled by installing a valid activation key. If a soft-ware option is later no longer required, activation can be canceled again by installing a de-activation key.

The deactivation mechanism allows software options which are no longer required to be "returned" to Rohde & Schwarz.

Option keys are available from your local Rohde & Schwarz sales partners.

• «

Installing option keys

Option keys can be installed in three ways:

- Automatic installation of one or more activation keys using the Software Distributor

The procedure is the same as for performing software updates (see the chapter "Main-tenance").

- Installation of an option key by means of a web browser

With this method, the option key can be transferred from, for example, a received mail using the copy/paste function.

- Installation of an option key directly at the display

With this method, a 30-digit code is entered using the keyboard.

The two last methods use the installation menu Setup > Option Keys > Install described below.

2.6.2.1 Status Menu Window

The Setup > Option Keys > Status menu window lists the available software options with their respective activation status.

List column Explanation

K The K material number and stock number of the device are used to order an option key to activate a software option from Rohde & Schwarz sales partners.

Name Name of the software option

— Status of a software option: - Green (OK): Option has been activated - Gray: Option has not been activated

List column ExplanationValidity Validity period of an installed option key: - Permanent: Option activated for an unlimited period (standard license) - "Expiry date": Option remains activated until the displayed expiry date (e.g. as a test license)If the activation mechanism is not supported by the hardware, all software options are activated automatically (status = OK). In this case, no validity period is displayed in the Validity column.

2.6.2.2 Install Menu Window

The Setup > Option Keys > Install menu window is used to install option keys manually.


Option Key Used to enter a 30-digit code to activate (or deactivate) a software option. Entry of the code is completed with Enter or OK.

Display Description

Status - Status = OK: The mechanism used to activate/deactivate software options is supported by the hardware. To be able to use a software option, the associated option key must be installed. - No key Required: The mechanism used to activate/deactivate software options is not supported by the hardware. All available software options can be used without installing option keys.

Message Dialog box with the following messages: - Please enter a key: Prompt to enter a key - Key OK: Key entered successfully (the display changes back to "Please enter a key" after a few moments) - Key deactivated: Deactivation key entered successfully (the display changes back to "Please enter a key" after a few moments) - Invalid format: Invalid key entered

2.6.2.3 Deactivations Menu Window

The Setup > Option Keys > Deactivations menu window lists software options which were once active, but have been deactivated again using a deactivation key.

Column Explanation

K The K material number and stock number of the device are used for ordering an option key to activate a software option from Rohde & Schwarz sales partners.

Name Name of the software option

Response Acknowledgment code as a system response to a deactivationTo prove that a software option has been deactivated, the acknowledg-ment code must be sent to the Rohde & Schwarz sales partner (e.g. by e-mail).

2.6.3 NetCCU Setup Menu

You can make basic system settings in the NetCCU Setup menu.

2.6.3.1 Common Menu Window

In the Common menu window, general settings for the system can be made.


Display Timeout Time in minutes after which the display switches off (standby)

LED Local Color of the Local LED on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800(yellow, green)

LED On Color of the ON LED on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 (yellow, green)

Fan Control Used to switch the fan monitoring function on and off; the fan monitoring function must be switched off for instruments without fans.

Tx Name User-definable name for the transmitter; is displayed in the login screen and in the browser window

2.6.3.2 Date/Time Menu Window

The date and precise time are required to make correct logbook entries. This information is supplied by the internal clock of the R&S NetCCU800. If necessary, the time and date can be corrected in the Date/Time menu window.


Date Used to set the current date

Local Time Used to set the local time The local time is the time of day or zone time

applicable at the station.

Unlike universal time (UTC = universal time coordinated), there is a pos-itive offset for time zones east of Greenwich or a negative offset for time zones west of Greenwich. This offset is determined by the time zone and is always a multiple of a full hour or sometimes of a half hour.In some countries, the clock is set forward by 1 hour in summer (daylight saving time). The time offset relative to UTC then changes correspond-ingly.

UTC Time Offset Used to enter the time offset between local time and UTC

Using NTP

You can change directly to the NTP menu window from the context menu. With NTP, the local time is determined via NTP and a time set manually under Local Time is overwritten.

Function ExplanationSetup NTP Used to change directly to the NTP menu window

2.6.3.3 System Menu Window

You can use the System menu window to make settings which determine how the R&S NetCCU800 is used. Depending on the selected setting, a different entry screen and differ-ent menus are displayed after the R&S NetCCU800 is booted.


Variant Use of the R&S NetCCU800 as - NetCCU for low power (Tx NetCCU SV) - NetCCU for medium/high power (Tx NetCCU NX) - NSU for a 1 +1 system without transmitter connection panels (1+1 w/o TCB) - NSU for an N+1 system (n+1 NetCCU) - NCU for several low-power transmitters (nTx NetCCU)

Number of Tx Number of main transmitters in the transmitter system (only relevant if the R&S NetCCU800 is used as an NSU/NCU)

TX Mode Used to select the TV/sound broadcasting standard

RS232 Application Used to determine whether the internal RS-232-C interface is used (if a DVB-T receiver module is installed, the external interface is deactivated by means of jumpers) - Not present: RS232 interface is deactivated - DVB RCV / tern: RS232 interface is used for DVB receivers (from other manufacturers) - DVB RCV / rus: RS232 interface is used for DVB receivers (R&S instruments) - BitBus Slave: The R&S NetCCU800 can be controlled via the RS232 interface using the BitBus protocol - BitBus Master: Another BitBus-compatible instrument can be controlled via the RS232 interface

BitBus Slave TCP Port

Port address for BitBus slave: For remote control via Ethernet using the serial interface

BitBus Slave CRC Used to activate/deactivate BitBus slave CRC: Activation for remote control via Ethernet using the serial interface

Remote Control ParlO

Used to activate/deactivate the parallel remote interface of the transmitter (connector X9); for selecting a parallel remote interface card with 80/ 32 (standard) or 12/9 (mini) outputs/inputs

General Purpose ParlO

This option makes it possible to use a ParlO board (R&S material number 5302.3830.02) to connect external devices

Inhibit Status For local mode, the messages from the transmitter are activated/deacti-vated; with message suppression activated, all traps with the exception of the local mode trap are suppressed

Ant. Measuring Point Antenna test point present and in use (only for low power with R&S NetCCU800)

2.6.3.4 SW Maintenance Menu Window

In the SW Maintenance menu window you can perform software updates for the R&S NetCCU800 and the connected exciters.

To perform a software update, you must connect the R&S NetCCU800 to a PC which has the required updates and update software.

Before you call the update software on the PC, you must set the R&S NetCCU800 to Up-date mode using the Start NetCCU Update context menu. When you call the update soft-ware on the PC, the software automatically analyzes which updates need to be installed. The update procedure is started from the PC by means of the update software.

Updates for the R&S NetCCU800 are installed straight away. In a further step, updates for the exciter(s) must be started from the R&S NetCCU800 via the Start Exciter A/B Update context menu.

The entire update procedure is described in detail in the chapter "Maintenance" in the R&S NetCCU800 manual.


SW MaintenanceRestart NetCCU The R&S NetCCU800is restarted.

SW Update OperationStatus Displays the progress of the software update installation. Start Used to start installation of a new software update.

SW Update ConfiguraMode

tion- Manual: Software update is started manually with Start. - Permanent: Software update is started automatically as soon as an update is available.

Device Name User-definable name for the R&S NetCCU800; during the software update, the installation software lists the R&S NetCCU800 under this name.

Device Group Displays the group in large networks (e.g. department) for which the software update is being performed.

2.6.3.5 SW Backup/Restore Menu Window

You can use the SW Backup/Restore menu to save the software and all R&S NetCCU800 settings as a backup file and to restore the information from this file in full. All information is backed up to the R&S NetCCU800 flash card.

The backup file can also be copied to another storage medium and copied back to the flash card from there.

Display Description

Backup For backing up the current state of the software and settings

Restore For restoring the backup (a restore is only possible if the backup con-cerned is valid; see the Backup Information part of the window)

Status Status of the Backup/Restore procedure - Ready: The Backup/Restore function is ready - Check in progress: The backup file concerned is being checked. The result will be displayed in the Backup Information part of the window - Restore in progress: A restore procedure is running - Backup in progress: A backup procedure is running - Upload in progress: The backup file is being uploaded to the R&S NetCCU800 from external medium - Download in progress: The backup file is being transferred to external medium

File Status Status of the backup file - Unknown: The status cannot be determined - Backup OK: The backup is valid - No backup available: There is no backup in the device - Invalid backup: The backup is invalid - Invalid checksum: A checksum error has been detected. The backup is not consistent - Invalid device: The backup is not compatible with the NetCCU800

Device R&S name of the device for which software and settings have been backed up

Part Number R&S part number of the device for which software and settings have been backed up

Serial Number R&S serial number of the device for which software and settings have been backed up

Display Description

Date Date of the backup

Time Local time of the backup

SW Version Version of the software contained in the backup

Tx Name Tx name at the time of the backup

2.6.3.6 Network Submenu

In the menu windows of the Network menu you can make the settings required when con-necting the R&S NetCCU800 to a PC/laptop or LAN/WAN.

The network settings for the front Ethernet interface are preset. You can configure the set-tings for the rear interface manually or have them assigned automatically by a DHCP server in the network.

Menu windows

The Network menu branches to the following menu windows:

- Front Ethernet (connection of a PC/laptop using a cross cable): display of the networksettings for the front interface ETHERNET

- Rear Ethernet (connection to a LAN/WAN): display and configuration of the networksettings for the rear Ethernet interface NETLINK (X5)

2.6.3.7 Network > Front Ethernet Menu Window

Display Explanation



Display Explanation

Speed Mode Speed and duplex Factory setting: 10

Mbit / half duplex Autosensing

Autonegotiation ON/OFF Factory setting: On



Notes

All settings for the front Ethernet interface are preset. If a PC/laptop is to be connected, the network interface on the PC/laptop must be configured accordingly:

- IP address (PC): First three segments same as those for IP Address of the R&SNetCCU800 (see above); a value below 250 must be entered for the last segment

- Subnet mask (PC): Same settings as under Network Mask (see above)

2.6.3.8 Network > Rear Ethernet Menu Window




Gateway Gateway address (specified by the network administrator)

DHCP Client Switch used to activate/deactivate the DHCP client:- On: The network settings for IP address, subnet mask and are retrieved automatically by a DHCP server - Off: The network settings for IP address, subnet mask and must be entered manually (see above)

gateway

gateway


Speed Mode a) Speed and duplex Factory setting: 100

Mbit /full duplex

Autosensing a) Autonegotiation ON/OFF Factory setting: On



a) Caution: Only change the settings for Speed Mode and Autosensing in exceptional cases where there are problems with the network connection.

Notes

- Manual settings for remote connection should only be entered in offline mode (contextmenu: Edit Offline) and then activated with Submit Changes (context menu).

- The IP address must not be in the same network as the front ETHERNETinterface.

- To allow automatic integration in a network (DHCP Client activated), the network mustcontain a DHCP server.

2.6.3.9 Services Submenu

In the menu windows of the Services menu, you can make settings for the SNMP, RS232 and NTP communication interfaces.

2.6.3.10 Services > SNMP > General Menu Window


Port SET/GET UDP port for SNMP SET/GET

Default setting: 161


Inhibit Status Switch for message suppression in Local mode- Off: Traps (alarm messages) are sent in both operating modes (Remote and Local) - On: No traps are sent in Local mode but the alarms are stored; exception: trap for Local ModeDefault setting: OffIf OlDs are polled with message suppression active, the return value is 0 (undefined). In this operating state, SNMP commands (SET) are not executed but simply confirmed.When the Remote mode is reactivated, all stored alarms are sent once. The polling of OlDs again returns current values.

Max. not transmitted Number of alarms to be stored if message suppression is active


2.6.3.11 Services > SNMP > Manager Menu Window


Access Level [1 ... 5] Used to select access authorization for one of five user groups- Read Only: For GET (only read access to the agent) - Read / Write: For SET (read and write access to the agent)

Community [1 ... 5] Used to set the SNMP community string (a type of password) for a user groupDefault setting: "public" for read only (GET) and "broadcast" for read / write (SET)Case-sensitive!

Enable Used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) a community The Off

setting is used for configuration purposes and for testing.


Alarmsink Used to select one of 5 alarm sinks for configuration

Enable Used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) a selected alarm sink

The Offsetting is used for configuration purposes and for testing.

IP Address IP address of the alarm sink to which alarms are to be sent

Port UDP port for the SNMP alarms


Alarm Version SNMP version in which the alarm is to be sent (v1 Trap, v2c Trap or v2c Inform)Traps are sent once only; Informs, however, are repeated several times until confirmation of the alarm sink is received.

Community Used to select the community (access protection)The community set here must also be used on the manager side. A dis-tinction is made between upper-case and lower-case characters.Communities are configured in the SNMP > Manager menu.

Inform Retry Number of repetitions of an Inform (with v2c Inform only)If after the final repetition of an Inform no confirmation of the alarm sink is received , this alarm is no longer sent.

Inform Timeout Time which is to elapse before an inform is sent again (with v2c Inform only)

Inform Unack'd Number of unconfirmed alarms which can be stored by the agent (with v2c Inform only)

2.6.3.12 Services > SNMP > Alarmsinks Menu Window

2.6.3.13 Services > NTP Menu Window

In the NTP (Network Time Protocol) menu window, you can set up synchronization for the transmitter system. This ensures that the time settings of all system components are syn-chronized via a common time server.


NTP mode Used to deactivate NTP synchronization (disabled) or to activate NTP synchronization in step mode; the time is synchronized at the interval which is set under NTP sync-time (e.g. every 3 minutes)

NTP status Used to set the current status (active/not active)

NTP sync-time Used to set the interval at which the device time (client) is with the time of the time server

synchronized

NTP server IP address or name of the time server

Last sync date Date of the last successfull synchonization

Last sync time Time of the last successfull synchonization

Setup Date/Time (context menu)

Direct change to the Date/Time menu window

2.6.3.14 Services > RS232 Menu Window

In the RS232 menu window, you can make settings for the RS-232-C interface.


Baudrate - As required; If DVB Receiver protocol is selected: setting occurs automatically If bitbus is used: 19200

Databits Number of data bits of the serial interface (5 to 8)

Stopbits Number of stop bits of the serial interface (1 / 1.5/2)

Parity Parity setting

2.6.4 ParlO Cards Order Menu Window

You can use the ParlO Cards Order menu window to identify and assign parallel remote control interface cards. You need to do this when installing one or more new remote control interface cards.

The window is only displayed if the use of a parallel remote control interface card has been enabled (see below).


No. Position number of the parallel remote control interface card; the number is directly linked to the remote control interface card displayed at Serialnumber

Function Function to which the remote control interface card is assigned

Link Displays whether the remote control interface card is enabled

Serialnumber Displays the available remote control interface cards

Identify Identifies a remote control interface card (required when more than one remote control interface card is installed, or to check for activation)

Assigning and identifying parallel remote control interface cards

Parallel remote control interface cards can be used for the following applications and ad-ministered and controlled with the NetCCU:

- Remote control of a transmitter (RemoteCtrl)

- Integration and control of transmitters from the NX7000 series or from other manufacturers into an n+1 system (SimpleTx)

- Integration and control of third-party equipment (General Purpose ParlO).

- Control of an antenna standby (Antenna Redundancy)

For the respective function (under Function) to be displayed, one or several of the following settings must be enabled:

For Remote Ctrl:

- NetCCU: NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > System > Remote Control ParlO >standard (80/32) or mini (12/9)

- NSU: Switch over Unit > Setup > NSU Setup > Remote Control ParlO > enabled

- NCU: Tx Control Unit > Setup > NCU Setup > Remote Control ParlO > enabled

For Simple Tx:

- NSU: Switch Over Unit > Setup > Tx Setup > Tx A1 to Tx An or Tx B > Variant >Simple TX ParlO

- NCU: Tx Control Unit > Setup > Tx Setup > Tx A1 to Tx An or Tx B > Variant > Simple TX ParlO

For General Purpose ParlO:

- NetCCU: NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > System > General Purpose ParlO >enabled

- NSU: Tx Control Unit > Setup > NSU Setup > System > General Purpose ParlO >enabled

- NCU: Switch Over Unit > Setup > NCU Setup > System > General Purpose ParlO >enabled

For Antenna Redundancy:

- NSU: Switch Over Unit > Setup > NSU Setup > System > Antenna Redundancy >Main + Reserve or Upper + Lower

The Function of the respective parallel interface card is displayed in a box highlighted in light or dark blue. Light-blue highlight for CAN Bus A, dark-blue highlight for CAN Bus B.

When a new parallel remote control interface card is installed, it is detected and displayed at a random position in the Serial number column. When more than one parallel remote control interface card is installed, it is usually necessary to identify the real card concerned.

«• To identify a card displayed in Serial number, highlight IdentifyStart in the column on the right and confirm with OK.

Click the relay of the card selected, and the card can be identified via this sound.

If the card cannot be identified in this way, a helpful alternative is to install the cards one after another and to identify each card as soon as it is installed, labeling it appropriately.

Each parallel remote control interface card displayed in a random row in the Serial number column after installation must then be assigned to a function. This is done by means of the position number (No. column) in the row in which the card is displayed.

1. Double click the position number (No.) of the displayed card.

1. From the editor, select the position number of the row in which the desired function isdisplayed (e.g. the No. next to RemoteCtrl) and click OK to confirm.

The selected parallel remote control interface card is assigned to the corresponding function (the function and card are in the same row).

2.6.5 General Purpose ParlO Menu Window

In the General Purpose ParlO menu window you can control and monitor third-party equip-ment (e.g. a generator or smoke detector) that is connected via a parallel remote control interface card.

The window is only displayed if the use of a parallel remote control interface card for Gen-eral Purpose ParlO in the NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Remote Control ParlOmenu is enabled.

Depending on the remote control interface cards used, you now have 12 command (set) and 9 acknowledge (get) or 80 command (set) and 32 acknowledge (get) pins available.

For technical reasons, the ratio of the available get and set ports is exactly the reverse com-pared to remote control interface cards used for controlling transmitters.


Link Indicator is green when the parallel remote control been identified and activated.

interface card has

Get Indicator is green when a port acknowledgment has been sent (e.g. gen-erator is started)

Set Sends (On) a request to the connected equipment ator)

(e.g. start of a gener-

2.7 RF Probe Antenna Menu

You can use the RF Probe Antenna menu to enter and read off the measurement values for the transmitter system, standby system and output power.

2.7.1 RF Vision Menu Window

You can use the RF Vision menu window to enter the nominal value for the vision forward power.

This window is only displayed in the ATV mode.


Nominal Value Used to enter the nominal value for picture forward power

Program (Measure) Current output power of the main output stage

Reserve (Measure) Current output power of the standby output stage

2.7.2 RF Sound Menu Window

You can use the RF Sound menu window to enter the nominal value for the sound forward power.

This window is only displayed in the ATV mode.


Nom. Value Sound 1 Used to enter the nominal value of the sound forward power for sound carrier 1

Nom. Value Sound 2 Used to enter the nominal value of the sound forward power for sound carrier 2

Sound 1 Program Current output power for sound carrier 1 at the main output stage

Sound 1 Standby Current output power for sound carrier 1 at the standby output stage

Sound 2 Program Current output power for sound carrier 2 at the main output stage

Sound 2 Reserve Current output power for sound carrier 2 at the standby output stage

2.7.3 RF Probe Forward Menu Window

In the RF Probe Forward menu window you can define the nominal values for the output power and determine the lowest level of deviation at which fault messages are to be output. Two test points are available for measuring the RF power (RF Probe Forward and RF Probe Reflection). Each test point has two RF rectifiers so that you can measure both the forward and reflected power. The forward power is always measured using the first test point (RF Probe Forward).

In the R&S NetCCU800 status screen, the forward power (Forward) is displayed in the left-hand window and the reflected power (Reflection) in the right-hand window on the basis of the values entered here.


Measured Values

Power Voltage

Measurement display Current forward power


Configuration

Nominal Value RF Fail

Limit

RF Warning LimitTimeout RF Fail Control

Definition and setting of a nominal value for forward power. Setting of upper and lower thresholds for forward power; warnings and fault mes-sages are issued if these thresholds are violated.Used to enter the nominal value, determined if necessary by external measurement of the forward powerUsed to select a dB value referenced to the set nominal power for for-ward power; a fault message is issued if the actual value drops below the nominal value.Used to select a dB value referenced to the set nominal power for for-ward power; a warning is issued if the actual value drops below the nominal valueUsed to select the time that the lower threshold for the forward power (specified as the RF Fail Limit) must be violated for before a fault mes-sage is output. For example, if a value of 3 dB has been entered as the RF Fail Limit and the actual value drops below that level for 8 seconds (typical setting for Timeout for RF Fail Control), a fault message will be output.


Calibration

Gain Offset

Set Gain

Set Offset

Execution of calibration and display of the results. Internal measurement


display

Used to calibrate the internal measurement system. Set Gain assigns the currently measured DC voltage to the nominal value for transmitter power.Used to calibrate the zero point as of which the externally measured power is displayed. Set Offset calibrates the zero point.

2.7.4 RF Probe Reflected Menu Window

In the RF Probe Reflected menu window you can define the nominal values for the output power and determine the lowest level of deviation at which fault messages are to be output. Two test points are available for measuring the RF power (RF Probe Forward and RF Probe Reflection). Each test point has two RF rectifiers so that you can measure both the forward and reflected power. The reflected power is always measured using the second test point (RF Probe Reflection).

In the R&S NetCCU800status screen, the forward power (Forward) is displayed in the left-hand window and the reflected power (Reflection) in the right-hand window on the basis of the values entered here.


Measured Values

Power Voltage

Measurement display Current reflected power


ConfigurationNominal Value Setting of a warning threshold for the reflected power Forward

power/50 (corresponds to the maximum reflected power)

FunctionWarning Limit

ExplanationUsed to select a dB value for the warning threshold referenced to the reflection switch-off threshold which is at a return loss of -17 dB (corre-sponding to a reflected power/forward power ratio of 1/50)

Calibration

Gain Offset

Set Gain

Set Offset

Execution of calibration and display of the results Internal measurement


display

Used to calibrate the internal measurement system. Set Gain stores the internal measurement value for the entered (measured) nominal value.Used to calibrate the zero point as of which the externally measured power is displayed. Set Offset calibrates the zero point.

2.8 Device Info Menu

Using the Device Info menu, you can have detailed product information displayed for every hardware and software component of the R&S NetCCU800.

2.8.1 NetCCU Menu Window

The NetCCU menu window displays general information about the hardware and software of the R&S NetCCU800.

2.8.2 Mainboard Menu Window

The Mainboard menu window displays information about the hardware and software of the R&S NetCCU800.

2.9 Parameter Set Menu Window

In the Parameter Set menu window, you can create, load and save parameter sets for the settings of the R&S NetCCU800 and the components it controls. If the operating environ-ment changes (e.g. change of frequency) you can access complete parameter sets instead of having to set each individual value. You have eight memory locations available in addition to the active memory location (for the parameter set loaded).

A parameter set consists of the following parameters:

- Settings for the test points (RF Probes), display value at nominal power (Nominal Value), calibration values (Gain and Offset) for the power displays

- Reference voltage for the forward power

- Virtually all exciter settings, with the exception of instrument-specific parameters (for detailed information, refer to the exciter manual, "Operation" section)


Parameter SetLoad settings from

Save settings to

Copy set x to y

Swap set x and y

For selecting a parameter set as the current parameter set; the currently loaded parameter set acts as an independent copy of the stored param-eter set.For saving the currently active settings to the chosen memory location.For selecting a parameter set x, the content of which you wish to save to another memory location y. To start the copying procedure, select Copy and confirm with OK.For selecting two parameter sets x and y, the content of which you wish to swap. To start the swap procedure, select Swap and confirm with OK.

State

Loaded Set Operation

State

Current Set Changed

Displays the active (i.e. loaded) parameter setDisplay showing the status of the action that is being carried out (Ready, Loading, Saving, Copying)Yellow: The device settings have been changed and no longer match the settings of the loaded parameter set.

NamesParameter Set 1 Name to describe the parameter set (e.g. intended use)


Parameter Set 2 See above







3 Menus of Exciter A/B

You can use the Exciter A/B menus to operate and configure the exciter concerned and to call up information.

The Exciter B menus and menu windows are identical to the Exciter A menus and menu windows.

3.1 Overview of Menus

Level 1 >

Setup > Common > Setting items: - TV Standard - AF Mode - Nicam Mode - Nicam Rolloff - Sound Select - Software Update - Get Exciter Data

Vision > Input > Setting items: - Input - Nominal Input Amplitude - Input Limiter Displays: - Clipping

Vision > White Control > Setting items: - Automatic - Testline - Gain Source - Manual Gain Displays: - Memory Gain - Current Gain Source - White Amplitude Input - White Amplitude Output - White Pulse Monitoring

Vision > White Limiter > Setting items: - Limiter - Threshold Displays: - Limiter Active

Vision > Sync Pulse > Setting items: - Regeneration - Sync Amplitude Displays: - Sync Monitoring - Sync Amplitude Input - Sync Amplitude Output

Vision > Equalizer > Setting items: - Diplexer - Diplexer Peaking - Receiver Pre-Equalization

Sound > Input > Setting items: - Nominal Level FM/Nicam [AF1/AF2] - Gain Adjustment Nicam [AF1/AF2] - Preemphasis [FM/Nicam] - Lowpass [FM] Displays: - Current Input FM [AF1/AF2] - Current Input Nicam [AF1/AF2]

Sound > FM Audio Mode > Setting items: - Coder Mode - Dataline - Pilot - Pilot Gain Displays: - Dataline Info - Current Audio Mode - Current Pivot Deviation

Level 1> Level 2 / 3> Parameters

Sound > FM Carrier > Setting items: - Sound Mode [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2] - Nom Deviation [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2] - Deviation Limiter [Carrier 1] - Limiter Threshold [Carrier 1] - Warning Above [Carrier 1] Displays: - Current Deviation [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2]

Sound > FM Precorrection > Setting items: - Precorrection [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2] - Inset Point 1 [Carrier 1/Carrier2] - Slope 1 [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2] - Inset Point 2 [Carrier 1/Carrier 2] - Slope 2 [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2]

Sound > Nicam Audio Mode > Setting items: - Audio Mode - Reserve Sound Switching Flag

Sound > Nicam Carrier > Setting items: - Carrier Mode - Nicam Precorrection

Precorrection > Setting items: - Nonlinear Correction -Amplitude - Phase - Nonlinear Frequency - Point 1 - Point 2 - Linear Correction -Amplitude - Group Delay

RF> Synthesizer > Setting items: - Frequency - Frequency Offset - Reference - OCXO Adjust

RF> Output > Setting items: - RF Output - Regulation - Manual RF Level - Output Attenuation - RF Slope - Modulation Slope - Vision Sound/Carrier 1 - Vision Sound/Carrier 2 - Residual Carrier

RF> RF Monitor > Setting items: - Adjustment Coupter [Common/Sound 1 /Sound 2] - Level Vision/Antenna [Sound 1/Sound 2] Displays: - AGC Exciter - Sync Level Antenna

Level 1 > Level 2 / 3> Parameters

RF> IQ Adjust > Setting items: - I/Q Testsignal - Bias Coarse [I/Q] - Bias Fine [I/Q] - Gain [I/Q] - Phase Displays: - Auto l/Q-Adjust - LO1 Freqency [I/Q]

Device Info > Exciter > Displays: - Part Number - Variant - Product index - Serial Number - Product Date - Software Number - Software Version - Operating hours - Power up cycles

Device Info > Boards > Displays: - Part Number

Mainboard > - Variant

Input Interface > - Product index - Serial Number

RF board > - Product Date - Software Number (possibly)

Synth 1 > - Software Version (possibly) - Bios Version (possibly)

Synth 2 > - Operating hours - Power up cycles

Synth 3 >

3.2 Status Menu

The Status menu summarizes the current status of the exciter. Color coding (green, yellow and red) is used to indicate status information, warnings and error messages. In addition, some basic settings are shown.

Display/LED Color Explanation

Sum Fault Red Sum fault message: One or more faults have occurred

RF Green RF level at the exciter output is OK

Red There is no RF level at the exciter output even though the RF output is enabled

-OFF- There is no RF level at the exciter output since the RF output is not enabled ("manually" disabled)

Exciter On Green RF output of the exciter is enabledThere are several options for enabling the RF output: - In the RF menu with the setting item RF Output - At the R&S NetCCU800using the ON key - At the exciter using the ON key (if no R&S NetCCU800 is present or it is inactive)

Loop Yellow RF carrier loop is not closed

Green RF carrier loop is closed

Video In Green Valid video signal is present at the input

Yellow Invalid video signal at the input

Red No video signal at the input

Sum Warning Yellow One or more warnings are active

Test Mode Yellow Exciter is set to test mode

HW Error Red Hardware fault has occurred in one or more modules of the exciter

Temp Red At least one module is overheating

Fan Yellow A fan has failed; there is a possibility of overheating

Red Both fans have failed; there is an acute risk of overheating

Out Open Red Cable-break sensor reports that the RF output is not terminated

Display Status Explanation

Audio Mode Mono/Ste-reo/2Tone

Indicates the set audio mode

Carrier 1 On /Off Sound carrier 1 is present or not present in the RF output signal

Carrier 2 On /Off Sound carrier 2 is present or not present in the RF output signal

Input 1/2 Indicates the active video input

3.2.1 Status Displays, Warnings and Fault Signals

When warnings and error messages occur, this usually means that transmission operation is impaired. Different signal colors are used to distinguish the severity of an impairment or the "quality" of the defect. The following applies:

Status display green [OK] Transmission is not impaired.

Warning yellow [W] Although the exciter is functional, external influ-ences may impair transmission or transmission operation.

Error message red [F] A severe error has occurred so that transmissionoperation is generally not possible.

This type of LED signaling using colors and abbreviations (OK, W, F, etc) is identical for the complete menu.

Indications with and without memory effect

Status displays (green) and warnings (yellow) always reflect the current status of the excit-er. On the other hand, error messages (red) remain active even after the reason for the error has passed or the error has been corrected. If the error has been corrected, you can reset the error display with the RESET key.

3.3 Logbook Menu

The logbook is used to record changes in state (events) of the exciter.

Menu windows

The Logbook menu branches to the following menu windows:

- Summary: Complete logbook with all recorded data

- Status: Partial logbook with recorded status changes

- Warning: Partial logbook with recorded occurrences of warnings

- Fault: Partial logbook with recorded occurrences of error messages

• 4

3.2.1 Status Displays, Warnings and Fault Signals

When warnings and error messages occur, this usually means that transmission operation is impaired. Different signal colors are used to distinguish the severity of an impairment or the "quality" of the defect. The following applies:

Status display green [OK] Transmission is not impaired.

Warning yellow [W] Although the exciter is functional, external influ-ences may impair transmission or transmission operation.

Error message red [F] A severe error has occurred so that transmissionoperation is generally not possible.

This type of LED signaling using colors and abbreviations (OK, W, F, etc) is identical for the complete menu.

Indications with and without memory effect

Status displays (green) and warnings (yellow) always reflect the current status of the excit-er. On the other hand, error messages (red) remain active even after the reason for the error has passed or the error has been corrected. If the error has been corrected, you can reset the error display with the RESET key.

3.3 Logbook Menu

The logbook is used to record changes in state (events) of the exciter.

Menu windows

The Logbook menu branches to the following menu windows:

- Summary: Complete logbook with all recorded data

- Status: Partial logbook with recorded status changes

- Warning: Partial logbook with recorded occurrences of warnings

- Fault: Partial logbook with recorded occurrences of error messages

The complete logbook and the partial logbooks are uniformly structured. The messages are numbered sequentially and contain the following information:

- Identification for occurrence ↑or disappearance ↓ of an event

- Message: Brief description of the event

- Time: Time of day of the event

- Date: Date of the event

3.3.2 Logbook Context Menu

Additional context functions are available in the menu windows for the complete logbook and the partial logbooks:


Clear logbook Clears all entries in the current logbook; clearing individual logbook entries is not possible.When you clear the complete logbook, the partial logbooks are also cleared. A Reset Fault is triggered at the same time.

Restore logbook Restores the cleared entries in the current logbook.When you restore the complete logbook, the partial logbooks are also restored.

3.4 Setup Menu

The menu windows described below are used to make the basic settings for signal process-ing.


TV Standard Selection of the TV standard

AF Mode Selection between dual-sound and triple-sound modeThis selection is available only if the second sound subcarrier is trans-mitted in accordance with NICAM and the coder mode is set under the Nicam mode.

Nicam Mode Selection of the NICAM mode: - Coder: AF signal supply of AF1 and AF2 via the AUDIO input with encoding and modulation in the exciter - Modulator: Signal supply as a NICAM728 data stream via the NICAM DATA IN digital input - External: Signal supply of a modulated NICAM sound subcarrier via the NICAM SC IN input

Nicam Rolloff Setting of the NICAM rolloff: - Auto: The NICAM rolloff is set automatically as the function of the selected TV standard and in compliance with the NICAM specifications (recommended setting!). - 40% / 100%: Manual setting of the NICAM rolloff

Sound Select Selection of the number of sound subcarriers: - Single Carrier: One sound subcarrier - Dual Carrier: Two sound subcarriers

3.4.1.1 Dual-Sound and Triple-Sound Mode (NICAM Coder Mode Only)

Using the dual-sound technique, two AF signals AF1 and AF2 are fed to the FM modulator as well as to the NICAM coder/modulator.

With the triple-sound technique, three AF signals are used. The signals AF1 and AF2 are fed to the NICAM coder/modulator and the signal AF3 is fed to the FM modulator.

3.4.1 Common Menu

• «

3.5 Vision Menu

The menu windows in the Vision menu are used to set the parameters for video signal pro-cessing on the ATV input interface board and in the coder.

The menu windows

The Vision menu leads to the following menu windows:

- Input: Select and set the video input

- White Control: Switch on and set the white control

- White Limiter: Switch on and set the white limiter

- Sync Pulse: Switch on and set the sync pulse regeneration

- Equalizer: Switch individual equalizer paths on or off

3.5.1 Input Menu Window


Input Selection of two identical video inputs VF 1 and VF 2 for further processing.In the Status > Input indicator, the currently selected (= active) video input is indicated.

Nominal Input Level Selection of the nominal input amplitude, either 0.7 Vpp or 1 Vpp at 75 Ω (common to both video inputs).

Input Limiter Switches the input limiter on or off.

Display Description

Clipping Status display for indicating clipping of the input signal; the indications are as follows: - No indication: The input signal is in the valid range (NO CLIPPING) - Yellow: The input signal is close to being clipped (NO HEADROOM) - Red: The input signal is clipped (CLIPPING)

3.5.1.1 Input Amplitude

Nominal input amplitude

At the nominal input amplitude, a nominal signal with 30% S and 70% noncomposite com-ponents is assumed. All of the percent indications which follow with reference to the ampli-tude relate to the selected input amplitude and a nominal signal.

Permissible input amplitude

The maximum permissible deviation of the input amplitude from the nominal amplitude is equal to ±50%. A smaller input amplitude can result in no vision signal being detected or the quality data not being complied with.

For a larger input amplitude, the input signal can be clipped during analog/digital conver-sion. This will cause signal components to be lost. Clipping of the input signal is indicated using the Clipping status indicator.

In addition, the input signal may have superimposed on it an interference signal with fre-quencies up to 300 Hz and a peak voltage of a maximum of 30% of the input amplitude as well as white noise that is band-limited to 6 MHz with a maximum level of-26 dBm.

Current input amplitude

The current input amplitude is measured in a selected line in which the white pulse is locat-ed. The measured values for the current sync pulse amplitude and the white pulse ampli-tude can be displayed.

- Selecting the line: See "Vision > White Control"

- Displaying the measured values: See "Vision > Sync Pulse"


Automatic Switches white control on or off.

Testline Selects the test line for the white pulse. The test line can be in the first or second field.

Gain Source Selection of the source for fixed video gain in case offailture of the white pulse with white control simultaneously switched on. The options are as follows: - MANUAL: For the gain, the manual settings under Manual Gain apply. - MEMORY: The gain uses the most recently saved value for white control.

Manual Gain Manual setting of the video gain The value which is set is the gain of the actuator as a percentage referred to gain 1 .

•

Display Description

Memory Gain Display of the last value saved by the white control which can be used for fixed video gain. The value which is displayed is the gain of the actuator as a percentage referred to gain 1 .

Current Gain Source Display of the active source for the video gain: - Manual: Manual setting (see Gain Source) - Memory: Memory for the white control (see Gain Source) - Automatic: White control

White Amplitude Input

Measured value for the white amplitude input

White Amplitude Out-put

Measured value for the white amplitude output

3.5.2 White Control Menu

Display DescriptionWhite Pulse Monitor- Status display for the white pulse monitoring: ing - NONE: The test line with the white pulse was not found - OK: White pulse found and level OK - < -40% / < -30% / > +30% / > +40%: The level of the white pulse deviates from the nominal value by the displayed value.

3.5.2.1 White Control

When control is switched on and activated (see below), the white pulse amplitude is adjust-ed to 700 mV (for standards B/G, D/K, I and l1) or to 714 mV (for standards M and N) at the output.

Prerequisites for activating white control

For activation of white control (when it is switched on), the following prerequisites must be met:

- The test line that contains the white pulse must be found (a V pulse is present).

- The amplitude of the white pulse at the input must lie within a window of ±40%.

If the amplitude of the white pulse at the input lies outside of a window of ±30%, it will be impossible under certain circumstances to fully compensate for this deviation.

3.5.2.2 Failure of White Pulse

If white control is switched on but not activated (see under "White Control"), an automatic switchover to fixed gain is made.

One of the two possible sources for the fixed gain is the last value of the gain which is stored sequentially by the white control and safeguarded against power failures. Display of the saved value under Memory Gain takes place regardless of whether the saved value for the white control or the manual setting is chosen for the fixed gain.

3.5.3 White Limiter Menu Window


Limiter Switches the white limiter on or off.

Threshold Sets the threshold for the white limiter.

Display Description

Limiter Active Status display for indicating if the white limiter responds.

3.5.3.1 White Limiter

When the white limiter is switched on, all low-frequency signal components that lie above a set threshold are filtered out.

3.5.4 Sync Pulse Menu Window


Regeneration Switches sync pulse regeneration on or off.

Sync Amplitude Sets the amplitude of the regenerated sync pulse switched on).

(when regeneration

Display Description

Sync Monitoring Status display for the sync pulse monitoring of the input signal. The fol-lowing displays are possible: - OK: The input signal complies with the standard - no V: No V pulse frame detected - no H+V: No V and no H pulse frame detected - too low: This sync pulse amplitude is less than 50% of the nominal sync pulse amplitude, but the processed signal is still available at the encoder outputFor all of the indications except for OK, the Status > Video In status dis-play will appear in yellow.

Sync Amplitude Input Display of the measured input amplitude [mV] of the sync pulse. If the selected line is not found in the input signal, a measured value of 0 mV is displayed.

Sync Amplitude Out-put

Display of the measured output amplitude [mV] of the sync pulse.

3.5.4.1 Sync Pulse Regeneration

After setting the output amplitude, regeneration of the sync pulse frame can occur. The frame contained in the input signal is completely replaced by a new frame.

3.5.5 Equalizer Menu Window


Diplexer Used to switch the diplexer pre-equalization (diplexer peaking) on or off

Diplexer Peaking Used to set the peaking in the range 0.1 dB to 2.5 dB at the band limit of the upper sideband

Receiver Pre-Equalization

Used to switch the receiver pre-equalization on or off

3.5.5.1 Diplexer Peaking

To equalize the frequency response of the diplexer, you can activate a frequency response emphasis function. Although the shape of the curve is fixed, you can set the magnitude of the emphasis at the band limit of the upper sideband.

3.5.5.2 Receiver Pre-Equalization

After the video signal processing, it is possible to perform receiver pre-equalization. When receiver pre-equalization is switched on, the fixed group delay curve required for the rele-vant standard is activated.

3.6 Sound Menu

The menu windows in the Sound menu are used to set the parameters for audio signal pro-cessing on the ATV input interface board and in the audio coder.

The menu windows

The Sound menu leads to the following menu windows:

- Input: Set the nominal input level for the AF signals, pre-emphasis (FM and NICAM) andlowpass (FM)

- FM Audio Mode: Select the audio mode; set the pilot signal

- FM Carrier: Select mode for FM sound subcarrier, set deviation and deviation limiter forFM sound subcarrier

- FM Precorrection: Switch on and set the sound phase shifter

- Nicam Audio Mode: Select the NICAM audio mode

- Nicam Carrier: Select the mode for the NICAM sound subcarrier, switch pre-equalization on or off for the NICAM sound subcarrier

3.6.1 Input Menu Window


Nominal Level FM/ Nicam [AF1/AF2]

Sets the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 or AF2.

Gain Adjustment Nicam [AF1/AF2]

Adjusts the nominal input level for the AF signal AF1 or AF2 which is fed to the integrated NICAM coder.

Preemphasis [FM] Switches the preemphasis required by the relevant television standard on or off (50 µs or 75 µs) for the FM audio.

Preemphasis [Nicam] Switches the preemphasis required by the relevant television standard for the NICAM audio on or off.

Lowpass [FM] Switches a lowpass filter for the FM audio on or off.

Display Description

Current Input FM [AF1/AF2]

Display of the current input level at the analog audio encoder for the AF signal AF1 or AF2 as a percentage of the maximum drive level.

Current Input Nicam [AF1/AF2]

Display of the current input level at the NICAM coder for the AF signal AF1 or AF2 as a percentage of the maximum drive level.

Input Clipping FM [AF1/AF2]

If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 is amplified beyond the permissible input level at the analog audio coder, clipping of the amplitude will occur. This is indicated using the Input Clipping FM status display.

Input Clipping Nicam [AF1/AF2]

If the AF signal AF1 or AF2 is amplified beyond the permissible input level at the NICAM coder, clipping of the amplitude will occur. This is indicated using the Input Clipping Nicam status display.

3.6.1.1 Input Level at Analog Audio Coder

Nominal input level

The nominal input level determines the level of a sinusoidal signal with a frequency of 500 Hz for which the set nominal deviation (see the "FM deviation" section) will occur with the preemphasis switched off.

Permissible input level

The AF inputs may be overdriven by a maximum of +4 dB starting over the nominal input level. In case of higher input levels, the input signal will be clipped by the A/D converter. This will cause certain signal components to be lost.

This clipping helps to avoid overdriving the following units. The threshold is set so that no clipping occurs during normal operation.

3.6.1.2 Input Level at NICAM Coder

Nominal input level

The nominal input level is determined for a 2 kHz sinewave signal with 0 dBm in accordance with the NICAM specification.

In the case of input levels deviating from the nominal input level, an appropriate gain or loss (negative values) can be set for signals AF1 and AF2 under Gain Adjustment NICAM.

Permissible input level

If the input levels are set as described under "Nominal input level", the drive reserves de-fined in the NICAM specification will be available.

If the drive reserves are exceeded, the input signal will be clipped by the A/D converter. This will cause certain signal components to be lost. This is indicated by the Input Clipping NICAM status displays for inputs AF1 and AF2.

3.6.1.3 FM Deviation

Nominal deviation

The nominal deviation determines the FM deviation which arises with the preemphasis switched off if a sinusoidal signal with the frequency of 500 Hz and a level corresponding to the nominal input level (see the "Input level" section) is fed into the AF input.

Suggestions for setting the FM deviation

You can modify the FM deviation by varying the input level (with an unchanged setting for the nominal input level) or by varying the setting for the nominal deviation.

The deviation should never be increased by increasing the input level since this will de-crease the drive reserve (see "Permissible input level"), producing a risk of clipping the sig-nal.

Instead, the nominal input level should be set equal to the current input level and the devi-ation should be increased by increasing the setting for the nominal deviation.


Coder Mode Setting of the audio mode.The following settings are possible: Off, Mono, Stereo, Dual and Auto (Dataline). The selected TV standard determines the assignment of the audio inputs to the FM sound subcarriers.The following settings have a special meaning: - Off: Dual sound is set as the audio mode - Auto (Dataline): The audio mode is read from theatudio data line in the picture signal.

Dataline Selects the audio data line present in the picture signal; this is neces-sary for the Coder Mode > Auto setting.

Pilot Switches the pilot signal on or off; not active in conjunction with NICAM.

Pilot Gain Sets the level for the pilot signal; not active in conjunction with NICAM.

Display Description

Dataline Info Display of the indication of the audio mode present in the audio data line (N/A means there is no indication in the selected audio data line).

Current Audio Mode Display of the audio mode that is currently set.

Current Pilot Deviation

Display of the FM deviation for the pilot signal.

3.6.2.1 Audio Mode

The selected TV standard determines the assignment of the audio inputs to the sound sub-carriers. This is displayed in the Status menu window under Carrier 1 or Carrier 2.

3.6.2 FM Audio Mode Menu Window

3.6.2.2 Audio Data Line

If "audio data line" is preselected as the source for determining the audio mode and it can-not be found in the picture signal, the manual settings will apply.

3.6.2.3 Pilot Signal

In order to indicate the audio mode, a pilot signal is added to the AF2 signal which modu-lates sound subcarrier 2.

3.6.3 FM Carrier Menu Window


Carrier 1 /Carrier 2 Used to set the mode for FM sound subcarrier 1 or 2; the following set-tings are possible: - Carrier OFF: Switches off the sound subcarrier - Modulation OFF: Switches on the sound subcarrier without modulation - ON: Switches on the sound subcarrier with modulation

Nom. Deviation [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2]

Used to set the nominal FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1 and 2

Deviation Limiter Used to switch the deviation limiter for the FM sound subcarrier on or off

Limiter Threshold Used to set a threshold at which the deviation limiter is triggered

Warning Above Used to set a threshold at which the deviation limiter warning is activatedIn most cases, it is recommendable for Limiter Threshold and Warning Above to have the same value.

Display Explanation

Current Deviation [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2]

Indicates the current FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1 and 2

Limitation [Carrier 1 /Carrier 2]

Status display which indicates whether the deviation limiter has trig-gered

3.6.4 FM Precorrection Menu Window

This window is used to precorrect the phase of the sound subcarrier for combined opera-tion. Precorrection is performed separately for each of the two FM sound subcarriers (Carrier 1 and Carrier 2). Two setting items are defined for each of the two FM sound sub-carriers.


Precorrection Switches the sound phase shifter on or off.

Inset Point 1 Determines the position of the 1st inset point referred to the drive of the picture signal.

Slope 1 Determines the sharpness at the 1st inset point.

Inset Point 2 Determines the position of the 2nd inset point referred to the drive of the picture signal.

Slope 2 Determines the sharpness at the 2nd inset point.

3.6.4.1 Sound Phase Shifter

This sound phase shifter modifies the phase of the sound subcarrier as a function of the low-frequency drive of the picture signal in order to precorrect the phase of the sound sub-carrier during combined operation.

When the sound phase shifter is switched on, its characteristic curve is determined using two inset points.

The reference for setting the position is initially a value of 37.5% for the rear black shoulder. Smaller values are in the range of the sync pulse. A value of 0% corresponds to a sync pulse amplitude of 500 mV. Larger values are in the picture range. A value of 90% corre-sponds to picture amplitude of 700 mV.

There is an additional condition that the setting for inset point 1 must always be greater than that of inset point 2. The sharpness of the two inset points is determined by the slope of the characteristic curve at these points. The magnitude of the setting determines the magnitude of the phase shift. A setting of 50% specifies the maximum value. The sign of the setting value determines whether the phase is shifted in the positive or negative direction.

3.6.4.2 Computation of Characteristic Curve

In computing the characteristic curve, it is divided using the two inset points into three linear ranges.

If the picture signal is driven in the range between the two inset points, no phase shift oc-curs, i.e. a correction phase of 0° is set.

If the picture signal is driven greater than the position of inset point 1, a correction phase not equal to 0° is set. The characteristic curve in this range begins with a correction phase of 0°, for a drive level corresponding to the position of inset point 1, and increases linearly up to the maximum phase set with inset sharpness 1 for drive of the picture signal of 100%.

Analogously, for drive of the picture signal which is less than the position of inset point 2, a correction phase not equal to 0° is also set. The characteristic curve in this range begins with a correction phase of 0°, for a drive level corresponding to the position of inset point 2, and increases linearly up to the maximum phase set with inset sharpness 2 for drive of the picture signal of 0%.

3.6.5 Nicam Audio Mode Menu Window


Audio Mode Determines the NICAM audio mode (possible only in the NICAM coder mode): - Equal FM Audio Mode: The NICAM audio mode is oriented towards the FM audio mode. - Mono/Data, Stereo and Dual Sound: These settings determine the NICAM audio mode regardless of the FM channel; the encoding takes place in accordance with the NICAM specifications.

Reserve Sound Switching Flag

This flag can be set (On) or not set (Off); possible only in the NICAM coder mode.

3.6.6 Nicam Carrier Menu Window


Carrier Mode Sets the mode for the NICAM sound subcarrier; the following settings are possible: - Carrier OFF: Switches off the sound subcarrier. - Modulation OFF: Switches on the sound subcarrier without modulation. - ON: Switches on the sound subcarrier with modulation.

Nicam Precorrection Switches the precorrection for the NICAM sound subcarrier on or off; the actual correction takes place using the precorrector GUI.

3.7 Precorrection Menu

In the Precorrection menu window, you can activate or deactivate individual precorrector branches without having to access the precorrector GUI (see the section "Introduction to Operation of the Precorrector"). The different switch settings (On/Off) correspond to the re-lated settings in the precorrector GUI.


Nonlinear Correction Switches the entire nonlinear correction on or off.

- Amplitude Switches the amplitude correction in the nonlinear corrector on or off.

- Phase Switches the phase correction in the nonlinear corrector on or off.

- Nonlinear Fre-quency

Switches the entire nonlinear frequency response correction on or off.



Linear Correction Switches the entire linear correction on or off.

- Amplitude Switches the amplitude frequency response correction in the linear cor-rector on or off.

- Group Delay Switches the group delay correction in the linear corrector on or off.

3.8 RF Menu

The menu windows in the RF menu are used to make the settings for frequency generation, modulation and RF monitoring.

The menu windows

The RF menu leads to the following menu windows:

- Synthesizer: Set the vision carrier frequency and reference frequency source

- Output: Enable the RF output, activate output level control or set the level manually, correct the amplitude frequency response of subsequent components

• 4

- RF Monitor: Perform fine adjustment of the coupling attenuation of the measurementdirectional coupler

- IQ Adjust: Adjust the modulator

3.8.1 Synthesizer Menu Window


Frequency Sets the vision carrier frequency.

Reference Selection of the reference frequency source. The following settings are possible: - Internal: Operation without an external reference frequency source. - External 5 MHz: Operation with an external 5 MHz reference. - External 10 MHz: Operation with an external 10 MHz reference.

OCXO Adjust Setting for adjusting the internal OCXO frequency (for "Internal" mode).

Display Description

Frequency Offset Any offset is set directly on the vision carrier.

3.8.1.1 Reference Frequency Source

The basis for frequency generation is a 10 MHz oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO). This OCXO can be operated in different modes:

"Internal" mode

The OCXO runs in uncontrolled mode.

It obtains its control voltage via a D/A converter which can be set using the OCXO adjustsetting item. The OCXO can be adjusted via the 10MHz MONITORING test output (frontpanel of exciter).

"External 5 MHz" and "External 10 MHz" modes

The OCXO runs in controlled mode.

Due to the control, the control voltage generated by the D/A converter is adapted on an on-going basis so that the 10 MHz frequency of the OCXO is synchronized with the externally supplied 5 MHz or 10 MHz reference frequency.

3.8.1.2 Holdover Mode (if Reference Frequency Fails)

As soon as a failure of the external reference frequency is detected, the control voltage for the OCXO is no longer modified. The result of this is that the RF generation is now based on the stability of the OCXO.

As soon as the external reference frequency is restored, the control voltage on the OCXO will be controlled again with the externally supplied reference frequency.

3.8.2 Output Menu Window


RF Output Enables (On) or disables (Off) the RF output.

Regulation Activates (On) or deactivates (Off) the output level control. During trans-mission operation, control must be enabled.The current status of the related level adjuster is displayed as a percentage under RF > RF Monitor > AGC Exciter.

Manual RF Level Manual setting of the output level; the setting has an effect only if output level control is deactivated.The current status of the related level adjuster is displayed as a percentage under RF > RF Monitor > AGC Exciter.


Output Attenuation For level adaptation purposes, an integrated attenuator with a value of 3 dB, 6 dB or 9 dB can be connected. This does not have any influence on the level control!

RF Slope Correction of a slope of the amplitude frequency response in the spec-trum for equalizing subsequent components (output stage, filter).

Modulation Slope Correction of a curvature of the amplitude frequency response in the spectrum for equalizing subsequent components (output stage, filter).

Vision/Sound Carrier 1 /2

Setting of the sound carrier level 1 or 2 referred to the sync peak power of the vision carrier.

Residual Carrier Setting of the residual carrier as a percentage.The residual carrier is entered with reference to the amplitude of the video signal. In the case of the TV standard B/G, for example, it has a value of 11%.

3.8.2.1 Output Level

The sync peak power transmitted by the exciter can be determined either through control or using a manual setting with reference to the nominal output level.

If Manual RF Level is set too low, the RF FAIL error will be generated.

3.8.2.2 Output Level Control

If control is enabled, the transmitted sync peak power is held constant at the nominal output level.

In case of failure of the H pulse frame at the input or output of the exciter, the peak power of the output signal (normally a continuous wave) is set back to the level corresponding to the rear black shoulder of the nominal output signal.

3.8.3 RF Monitor Menu Window

The exciter has an RF Monitor functional unit which, for example, performs power measure-ments separately for the vision and sound carrier.

The measured powers are displayed in the R&S NetCCU800 menu under RF settings/val-ues > RF Vision > Measure and RF settings/values > RF Sound > Measure.

Requirements

The RF measurement output of the exciter must be connected to the antenna output via a measurement directional coupler. The coupling attenuation of the measurement directional coupler must be set so that a sync peak power level of 13 dBm is present for an average frequency at the RF measurement input (for nominal power at the antenna output).

Fine adjustment

You can use the RF Monitor setting window to make a fine adjustment of the coupling at-tenuation.

Setting item DescriptionAdjustment Coupler Correction entries for fine adjustment - [Common]: The entire coupling attenuation - [Sound 1/2]: The coupling attenuation for sound carrier 1 or 2Level/Vision Antenna Specification of the nominal vision/sound ratio, separately for the two [Sound 1 /Sound 2] sound carriersDisplay DescriptionAGC Exciter Display of the control quantity for output level control as a percentage.When control is disabled, the value that is set manually for the output level is displayed.Sync Level Antenna Display of the current level of the sync pulse as a percentage with refer-ence to the black shoulders.

3.8.4 IQ Adjust Menu Window

When the exciter is delivered, the I/Q modulator is factory-adjusted so that no customer in-tervention is normally required. If a further I/Q adjustment is needed at a later time, the menu window RF > IQ Adjust offers the associated setting options.

In the section "Maintenance" (exciter manual), you will find a description of how to perform the I/Q adjustment.

The I/Q adjustment depends on the automatically selected intermediate frequency LO1. Ac-cordingly, it applies only to the intermediate frequency displayed under LO1 Frequency.

The following table shows the relationship between the set vision carrier frequency and in-termediate frequency LO1:

Vision carrier frequency Intermediate frequency

47MHz≤fB <510 MHz => LO1 = 2160 MHz

510 MHz≤ fB < 580 MHz => LO1 = 1920 MHz

580 MHz≤fB < 680 MHz => LO1 = 2160 MHz

680 MHz≤fB < 860 MHz => LO1 = 1920 MHz

Setting item/Dis-plays Explanation

Auto l/Q-Adjust Automatic I/Q adjustmentThe switch offers the following options: - Start: starts the automatic I/Q adjustment. The calculation takes approx. 1 minute. During this time (display Calc), the RF output signal is suppressed. - Break: immediately stops the adjustment. The modulator must then be adjusted again in any case.Important: Before performing the I/Q adjustment, make sure that the exciter has been in operation for at least 30 minutes. During adjustment, transmitter parameters must not be changed.The values for the actuators Bias Coarse, Bias Fine, Gain and Phase determined during automatic I/Q adjustment are displayed under the setting items of the same name for manual adjustment.The values are valid only for the intermediate frequency displayed under LO1 Frequency and can, if required, be checked and optimized with a manual I/Q adjustment (see section "Adjustment of I/Q modulator").

I/Q Test Signal Switches a test signal on or off to manually perform the I/Q adjustment.

Bias Coarse [I/Q] For coarse setting and display of an actuator for suppressing the undes-ired center carrier; setting range: -1023 to +1023

Bias Fine [I/Q] For fine setting and display of an actuator for suppressing the undesired center carrier; setting range: -32767 to + 32767

Setting item/Dis-plays

Explanation

Gain [I/Q] For setting and display of an actuator for suppressing the undesired car-rier in the sideband; setting range: 0 to 255

Phase For setting and display of an actuator for suppressing the undesired car-rier in the sideband; setting range: -14 to +14

Display Explanation

Auto I/Q Adjust Status display of automatic I/Q adjustment: - In Progress: an adjustment has been started; the calculation is currently being performed. - Adjusted: After completion of the adjustment, the display changes from "In Progress" to "Adjusted". This status is valid until a new and automatic I/Q adjustment is carried out. The "Adjusted" display does not necessarily mean that the modulator is (currently still) adjusted. - Not Adjusted: An error has occurred during the last adjustment. The automatic I/Q adjustment has to be repeated. If the automatic I/Q adjustment is still not functioning after several attempts, contact technical support.

LO1 Frequency Display of the intermediate frequency LO1 which is automatically set in the modulator (1 .92 GHz or 2. 1 6 GHz)The adjustment values of the above actuators are only valid for the dis-played intermediate frequency.


The menu windows under Device Info contain the electronic type plates for the exciter as a whole as well as for the individual modules or elements in the exciter:

- Exciter (complete device)

- Boards (modules)

- Mainboard

- Input interface

- RF board

- Synth 1

- Synth 2

- Synth 3

The structure of the different type plates is more or less identical. The information which is displayed is explained below using the exciter type plate as an example:

Display Description

Part Number Part number

Variant Device or module variant (model)

Product Index Product modification index

Serial Number Serial number

Product Date Date of production

Software Number Part number for the software

Software Version Version number for the software

Operating hours Number of operating hours

Power up cycles Number of times device has been switched on/off

The information saved here is used for troubleshooting purposes. In case servicing is re-quired, this information allows you to precisely identify the defective component and order a replacement.

Device Info > Exciter

• «

4 Manual Adjustment of I/Q Modulator

Before performing the adjustment, make sure that the exciter has been in operation for at least 30 minutes.

Objective

If quadrature modulation were optimal (theoretically possible), the residual carrier and ves-tigial sideband would be completely suppressed. In practice, carrier and vestigial sideband components will, however, remain due to I/Q amplitudes and phase errors that must be sup-pressed by adjusting amplitude and phase.

The purpose of the I/Q adjustment is a suppression of undesired components compared to a test carrier by more than 60 dB.

Two methods are available

Two methods are available to perform the I/Q adjustment: setting and testing actuators manually or via a convenient automatic process.

The automatic method will usually meet the requirements. Yet, it may sometimes be useful to test the automatically determined values for the actuators and to improve them.

5 Menus of Outputstage A/B

You can use the Outputstage A/B menus to operate and configure the transmitter rack and the amplifier and to call up information.

The Outputstage B menus and menu windows are identical to the Outputstage A menus and menu windows.

5.1 Overview of Menus

Outputstage A menu structure

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Status

OS Status

Rack Status

Rack 1 to 1 0

Rack controller

Amplifier 1 to 10

Logbook

Summary

Status

Warning

Fault



Output Power

Setup

OS Setup

Rack Setup

Rack Order

Rack 1 to 10

Rack controller

Amplifier Order

Measured Values

Rack Measured Values

Rack 1 to 1 0

Rack controller

Amplifier 1 to 10

Device Info

Rack 1

Rack controller

Amplifier 1 to 10

Pump Units

Status

PUC Order

PUC 1 to 10

Status



Configuration

Device Info

Pump 1 to 2

Measure

Fan 1 to 4

Measure

5.2 Status Menu

The Status menu provides an overview of faults, warnings and status messages relating to the individual output stage components.

5.2.1 OS Status Menu Window

Outputstage A > Status > OS Status

The OS Status menu window provides an overview of faults, warnings and status messag-es relating to the output stage components.

The following table explains the meaning of the individual display fields:

Display Explanation

RF Fail Red: Antenna output power is below the set fault threshold

Reflection Red: Antenna reflected power is above the set fault threshold

Display Explanation

AC Red: AC supply voltage fault (e.g. phase absent)

Communic.. Red: Communication to the output stage has been interrupted

Cooling Red: Fault in the cooling systemPossible causes: Both pumps of a pump unit have failed. Both fans of the cooler have failed. There is a pressure fault. The pressure has dropped below the pressure fault threshold.

Fault Red: Output stage sum fault

Warning Yellow: Output stage sum warning

No Input Yellow: No input signal sent to the amplifiers

RF Warning Yellow: Antenna output power is below the set warning threshold

Reflection Yellow: Antenna reflected power is above the set warning threshold

Rack Yellow: There is a fault at at least one transmitter rack

Cooling Yellow: There is a fault in the cooling system

RF OK Green: Antenna output power is above the set warning limit

RF On Green: Antenna output power is above the set fault threshold

Reduced RF Yellow: Reduced RF power (only applies to ATV)

5.2.2 Status/Rack Controller Menu Window

Outputstage A > Status > Rack Status > Rack x > Rack Controller

The Status/Rack Controller menu window provides status information about the rack con-troller.


Display Description

Fault Red: Transmitter rack sum fault

Warning Yellow: Transmitter rack sum warning

Link OK Green: There is a communication link with the transmitter rack

Rack ON Green: ON command at the rack is active

Pump Fault Yellow: There is a fault at all individual pumps; pressure fault

Cooling Fault Red: Cooling system sum fault

Extern Cooling Yellow: Fault at ext. cooling system

Abs. 1 Fault Red: Fault at absorber 1

Abs. 2 Fault Red: Fault at absorber 2

AC Fault Red: AC power supply fault (e.g. phase absent)

DC Fault Red: Fault at auxiliary power supply unit

PUC Link Yellow: Communication with the PUC is faulty

Pump Yellow: An individual pump has failed; pressure warning

Amplifier Yellow: Amplifier sum fault

Temperature Red: Coolant temperature has exceeded the set threshold Yellow: Coolant temperature has exceeded the warning threshold

Red.Ref. Exc.A Yellow: No video at exciter A; power reduction active

Red.Ref. Exc.B Yellow: No video at exciter B; power reduction active

5.2.3 Status/Amplifier x Menu Window

Outputstage A > Status > Rack Status > Rack x > Amplifier

The Status/Amplifier menu window provides status information about the amplifiers.


Display Explanation

Fault Red: Amplifier x sum fault

Warning Yellow: Amplifier x sum warning

Link OK Green: There is a communication link to amplifier x

Amplifier ON Green: Amplifier ON

RF In Fail Yellow: No RF input signal at the amplifier

Blower Fail Not active for this amplifier type

Power Fail Red: Forward power is below the fault threshold

Reflection Red: Reflected power at the amplifier VSWR >1 .6

Transistor Fail Red: At least one transistor of the amplifier is faulty

Temperature Fail Red: Heat sink temperature > 85 °C ± 4 K

DC OK Green: Internal DC power supply is OK

AC OK Green: External AC power supply is OK

5.3 Logbook Menu

You can use the Logbook menu to query status and error messages about the output stage.

5.3.1 Logbook Menu Window

Outputstage A > Logbook

You can use the Logbook menu to query status and fault messages about the output stage. The Logbook menu windows provide an overview of status messages, warning messages and fault messages about the output stage.

You can call up logbook entries in the Summary, Status, Warning and Fault windows.

Column Explanation

No Consecutive entry number

Message Message

Time Time at which the message was received

Date Date on which the message was received

The arrows in the second column have the following meaning:

Arrow direc-tion

Arrow color Explanation

Up The event has just occurred.

Down The event is no longer current or relevant.

Red Fault

Arrow direc-tion Arrow color Explanation

Yellow Warning

Green Status

5.4 Output Power Menu

You may use the Output Power menu to access the Output Power window.

5.4.1 Output Power Menu Window

Outputstage A > Output Power

In the Output Power menu window you can set the output power of the transmitter.

The following table explains the meaning of the individual settings:


Ref. Voltage Vision Used to set the transmitter output power Value: 0% to 100%

Ref. Voltage Vision Reduced

Used to set the transmitter output power if no video input signal is avail-able

Forward Power Current reading of the transmitter-internal power displayThe displayed value is only valid after the transmitter power has been entered under the parameter "Nominal Value" and the power display has been calibrated.


Amplifiers' Power Supply

DC supply voltage of the amplifier Value: 31% to 100%100% corresponds to a nominal DC supply of 32 V. 31% corresponds to a nominal DC supply of 12 V.The efficiency can be improved by reducing the DC supply voltage.Large changes in the DC supply voltage are only permitted if the amplifier is operated below the nominal power. Caution: Current limiting

5.5 Setup Menu

You may use the Setup menu to access the OS Setup window.

5.5.1 OS Setup Menu Window

Outputstage A > Setup > OS Setup

In the OS Setup menu window you can make basic settings for the output stage.

The following table explains the meaning of the individual settings:

Setting Explanation

Racks per OS Number of racks belonging to the output stage

Outlet Temp. Fault Switch-off threshold with overtemperature If this threshold is exceeded, the rack controller shuts down the transmitter rack. Value: 45 °C to 62 °C Nominal value: 62 °C

Pump Units Number of pump units

Setting Explanation

Outlet Nominal Temp. Nominal temperature of the coolant Value: 25 °C to 57 °C Nominal value: 32 °C

Outlet Temp. Warning Coolant temperature at which the warning threshold is exceeded Value: 25 °C to 57 °C Nominal value: 52 °C

Max. Fan Speed Cooler fan speed limit (noise reduction) Value: 50% to 100% Nominal value: 60 %

AntiFreeze Mode Prevents the cooler fans from seizing due to ice (frost). The fans still rotate at minimum speed (8%) even with Tx "OFF". Value: ON/OFF

Sum Probe at Rack Used to select the transmitter rack (rack controller) to which the test points for forward/reflected power of the entire output stage are con-nectedOnly with active and passive output-stage standby

Independent Racks Possibility of dividing the output stage logically into independent racks - no: All racks of the output stage are controlled together and all act on the same RF output (default setting). - yes: The racks of the output stage can have separate RF outputs and can be controlled individually (e.g. ON/OFF command).

5.5.2 Rack Setup > Rack Order Menu Window

This menu is irrelevant to transmitters with 1-rack output stages.

Outputstage A > Setup > Rack Setup > Rack Order

After the transmitter system has been put into operation, entries of the racks of the output stage are displayed in the menu path for the output stage with consecutive numbering. Since the numbering is derived from the chronological sequence in which the rack control-lers can be detected on the CAN bus, it does not always correspond to the sequence in which the racks are physically arranged from left (= 1) to right within the transmitter system.

The Rack Order menu window is used to change the menu entries for the racks of the out-put stage with respect to their respective installation positions within the transmitter system.


Device Order number x (= 1 to n) of a rack amplifier; this number describes the position of the associated rack menu in the menu pathBy setting the order numbers correctly, it is possible to synchronize the menu items (1 to n) and the associated installation positions (from left to right).

Link Green: A CAN bus connection to the rack controller of the rack exists

Serial number Serial number of the rack controller (as indicated on the electronic type plate)

Identify Identifying a rack in the transmitter system If the Start switch is activated,

the LEDs of all amplifiers in the rack flash.

5.5.3 Rack Setup > Rack x > Rack Controller Menu Window

Outputstage A > Setup > Rack Setup > Rack x > Rack Controller

The Rack Controller menu window contains information for the rack controller about, among other things, how many amplifiers are installed in the rack and whether the rack has a dedicated test system.

Setting Description

Number of Amplifiers For entering the number of amplifiers installed in the rack Value: 1 to 10

RF event signalling - yes: If the limits are violated below or above (RF Fail Limit, RF Warning Limit) for the forward and return power at the rack test points, warnings or error messages are output (default setting).- no: Indication of RF warnings and error messages at the rack test points is suppressed.

General purpose input

Usage of a free line on the rack controller for customer-specific purposes: - unused: Line is not used. - door open: Line is reserved to indicate that door contacts were opened. - ext. cooling wng: Line is reserved for warnings about external cooling. - ext. cooling fit: Line is reserved for error messages about external cooling.

RFProbe present - yes: A test system is connected on the rack controller for the rack. This is the correct setting if the rack is the only one in the output stage.- no: No test system is connected on the rack controller for the rack. 777/s is possible only in conjunction with multirack output stages.

5.5.4 Rack Setup > Rack x > Amplifier Order Menu Window

Outputstage A > Setup > Rack Setup > Rack x > Amplifier Order

After the transmitter system has been put into operation, entries for the amplifiers (of a par-ticular rack) are displayed in the menu path for the output stage with consecutive numbering (Amplifier 1 to max. Amplifier 10). Since the numbering is derived from the chronological sequence in which the amplifiers can be detected on the CAN bus, it does not always cor-respond to the sequence in which the amplifiers are physically arranged from top (= 1) to bottom (= n) in the rack.

The Amplifier Order menu window is used to change the menu items for the amplifiers with respect to the installation positions in the rack.


Device Order number x (= 1 to n) of an amplifier; this number describes the position of the associated amplifier menu in the menu pathBy setting the order numbers correctly, it is possible to synchronize the menu items (1 to n) and the associated installation positions (from top to bottom).

Link Green: A CAN bus connection to the amplifier exists

Serial number Serial number of the amplifier (as indicated on the electronic type plate)

Identify Identification of an amplifier in the rackIf the Start switch is activated, the LEDs of the associated amplifier in the rack flash.

5.6 Measured Values Menu

You can use the Measured Values menu to read off measurement values.

5.6.1 Measured Values/Rack Controller Menu Window

Outputstage A > Measured Values > Rack Measured Values > Rack x > Rack Control-ler

The Measured Values/Rack Controller menu window displays the inlet and outlet temper-atures of the coolant as well as the control voltage of the transmitter rack.

The following table explains the meaning of the fields:

Display Explanation

Inlet Temperature Inlet temperature of the coolant

Display Explanation

Outlet Temperature Outlet temperature of the coolant

Aux Power Supply Control voltage of the internal auxiliary power supply for the transmitter rack The value is between 11.1V and 13.2V.

5.6.2 Measure Values/Amplifier x Menu Window

Outputstage A > Measured Values > Rack Measured Values > Rack x > Amplifier x

The Measured Values/Amplifier x menu window displays the measurement values for a selected amplifier.

The following table explains the meaning of the fields:

Display Explanation

l[xA] Module current of an output stage module, x = 1 to 4 a)

l[xB] Module current of an output stage module, x = 1 to 4 a)

l[Drv] Current of the driver stage

U[DC] Supply voltage of the amplifier

I[DC] Total DC current

U[DC_CTRL] Reference voltage of the amplifier

U[REG] AGC voltage of the amplifier

PWR[A] Detector voltage of the power detector DET_A

PWR[B] Detector voltage of the power detector DED_B

PWR[Out] Forward voltage of the output-power detector

PWR[Refl] Reflected voltage of the reflected-power detector

Display Explanation

PWR[Ref] Reference voltage of the output-power detector

a) With the amplifier type R&S VH8600A1, the measured current values I[4A] and I[4B] are not displayed.


You can use the Device Info menu to call for information on the transmitter rack.

5.7.1 Device Info/Rack Controller Menu Window

Outputstage A > Device Info > Rack x > Rack Controller

You can use the Device Info/Rack Controller menu to call for information on the transmit-ter rack.

The following table explains the meaning of the display fields:

Display Description

Part Number R&S stock number

Variant Model (basic model = 02)

Product Index Hardware amendment index



SW/FW/BIOS Number R&S stock number for software, firmware or BIOS

SW/FW/BIOS Version Version number of software, firmware or BIOS

5.7.2 Device Info/Amplifier x Menu Window

Outputstage A > Device Info > Rack x > Amplifier x

The Device Info/Amplifier x menu window provides device information for an amplifier.


Display Explanation



Product index Hardware change index





5.8 Pump Units Menu

The Pump Units menu provides access to the menu windows of the Pump Units and the PUCs (Pump Unit Controller). A R&S ZK810 pump unit consists of a PUC, one or several pumps and one or several fans.

While 1-rack transmitters feature a single cooling circuit (1x Pump Unit), multi-rack trans-mitters are generally supplied by several cooling circuits (N x Pump Unit).

5.8.1 Pump Units > Status Menu Window

Outputstage A > Pump Units > Status

The Pump Units > Status menu window provides status information about the pump units.


Display Explanation

PUC Number of the PUC (pump unit controller)

Wng Warning

Fault Fault

On ON

Linked Racks PUC linked to rack No. x

5.8.2 Pump Units > PUC Order Menu Window

This menu window is irrelevant to transmitters with a single cooling circuit per output stage.

Outputstage A > Pump Units > PUC Order

After the transmitter system is started up, consecutively numbered entries for the PUCs of an output stage appear in the output stage menu path. Since the numbering is derived from the chronological sequence in which the PUCs log on to the CAN bus, it does not always correspond to the sequence in which the pump units are physically arranged to the output stage. For example, if every rack features its own cooling circuit with separate pump unit, the obvious thing would be to number PUCs and racks in the same way.

The PUC Order menu window allows adjusting the menu entries to the PUCs with the menu entries to the corresponding racks.


Device Order number x (= 1 to n) of a PUC; this number describes the position of the associated PUC menu in the menu pathThe menu entries of PUCs and racks can be synchronized with suitable setting of the order numbers.

Link Green: A CAN bus connection to the PUC exists

Serial number Serial number of the PUC (as indicated on the electronic type plate)

Identify Identifying a PUC in the cooling system If the Start switch is activated,

the LED on the associated PUC flashes.

5.8.3 Pump Units > PUC x Menu

You use the Pump Units > PUC x menu to open the menu windows for the PUCs (PUC = Pump Unit Controller).

5.8.3.1 Pump Units > PUC x > Status Menu Window

Outputstage A > Pump Units > PUC x > Status

The Pump Units > PUC x > Status menu window provides information about a PUC (pump unit controller) and the pumps and fans connected to it.


Display Description

Pump Unit Controller

Operation Mode On ON command, pump unit active

Sum Fault Red: One or more faults have occurred.

Sum Warning Yellow: One or more warnings are active.

Pressure Warning Yellow: System pressure warning message

Pressure Fault Red: System pressure fault message

Service Yellow: The pump unit is in maintenance mode

Configuration Yellow: Number of pumps or fans not identical to the number deter-mined during configuration

Link Green: There is a communication link between the PUC and rack con-troller

Filter Yellow: Filter contaminatedSee manual R&S ZK810 (Pump Unit), chapter "Service" for informa-tion on cleaning the filter.

PU Off Red: Main pump switch in OFF position

Pump

1 -2 Number of the pump

Ok (green) W (yellow) F (red)

There is a communication link between the pump and PUC Warning for individual pump x Fault for individual pump x

Fan

1 -4 Number of the fan

Display Description

Ok (green) W (yellow) F (red)

There is a communication link between the fan and Warning for individual fan Fault for individual fan

PUC

5.8.3.2 Pump Units > PUC x > Measure Menu Window

Outputstage A > Pump Units > PUC x > Measure

The Pump Units > PUC x > Measure menu window provides information about tempera-tures measured at the PUC.


Display Explanation

Board Temperature Board temperature of the PUC

External Temperature Only possible if an optional external test point is connected

5.8.3.3 Pump Units > PUC x > Configuration Menu Window

Outputstage A > Pump Units > PUC x > Configuration

The Pump Units > PUC x > Configuration menu window provides information about the number of pumps and fans connected. If necessary, you can change the basic setting for the coolant flow and activate the Service mode.

The table below describes the parameters in detail:

Setting Description

Liquid Flow Correction

Fine adjustment of the coolant flow above the nominal flow Value: +0 % to +20 % Nominal value: 0 %Fine adjustment of the coolant flow allows, for example, resonance along the coolant hoses to be suppressed.

Service Mode Pump service mode Value: On/Off Nominal value: OffThe pump unit must be switched to service mode if maintenance work is performed on the pump unit (e.g. pump replacement, filter cleaning). In service mode the fault and warning messages from the pump are sup-pressed. Caution: The pump unit automatically returns to normal operation after 2 hours.

Display Description

Number of Pumps Number of individual pumps in the pump unit (1 or 2)

Number of Fans Number of individual fans in the cooling system (1 to 4)

5.8.3.4 Pump Units > PUC x > Device Info Menu Window

Outputstage A > Pump Units > PUC x > Device Info

The Pump Units > PUC x > Device Info menu window provides device information for a PUC.


Display Explanation



Product index Hardware change index





5.8.3.5 Pump Units > PUC x > Pump x > Measure Menu Window

Outputstage A > Pump Units > PUC x > Pump x > Measure

In the Pump Units > PUC x > Pump x > Measure menu window, you can read the revolu-tions and flow each for a single pump of a pump unit.

Display Explanation

Revolutions Revolutions of single pump (1 of 2) within a pump unit Operating values: 0 - 90%100% correspond to the maximum possible revolutions of the pump.

Flow Coolant flow at the single pumpA correct display assumes that the coolant used is an Antifrogen-N/ water mixture with a mixing ratio of 39:61.

5.8.3.6 Pump Units > PUC x > Fan x > Measure Menu Window

Outputstage A > Pump Units > PUC x > Fan x > Measure

In the Pump Units > PUC x > Fan x > Measure menu window, you can read the revolutions each for a cooler fan in the cooling system.

Display Explanation

Revolutions Revolutions of the individual fan (1 of up to 4) in the cooler Operating values: 0 - 100%100% correspond to the maximum possible revolutions of the fan.The possible range of revolutions may have upper and lower limits defined by the settings Max. Fan Speed (< 100%) and AntiFreeze Mode (= On) in the Setup > OS Setup menu window.A value of 0% indicates that the fan is off. This state can be reached via control if the fan operation is currently not required (e.g. with Tx = "OFF"). However, this requires that AntiFreeze Mode is deactivated since the fan would otherwise operate at a maximum speed of 8%.

• «

6 Other Menus

6.1 TxTool Menu: Saving Transmitter Information

In order to improve clarity and for archiving purposes, you can save transmitter data select-ed via the web browser (such as logbook or device information, measurement values or pa-rameters) to an ASCII or HTML file. You can also delete and restore logbook entries of the transmitter components.

1. Select TxTool in the browser window. A

security query appears first of all.

Execution of the TxTool requires write rights to the file system of the computer. To grant these rights you must confirm the security query.

If you select Always trust content from this author, the security query will not be dis-played the next time the TxTool is called.

2. Confirm the security query with Run.

The TxTool window used to display and save transmitter data appears.

The window is initially empty when opened. The required settings must be selected before the data is read out.

Reading out data

1. Select (top left) the data that is to be displayed.

Different windows containing additional functions are displayed depending on the type of data you select. Depending on the selected tab, the window will still be empty (e.g. LogBooks) or the appropriate data will be displayed (e.g. Devicelnfo).

2. Select (depending on the window) which data is to be displayed (see the table under"Functions in Logbooks Window").

2. Start the readout of the data with Read.

Saving data

Different options and formats are available for saving the data.

1. Under Output Format, select the file format in which the data is to be saved.

2. In the Output menu, select whether the data is to be saved as a file (Write to File) orcopied to the clipboard (Copy to Clipboard).

Depending on your selection, you can save the data in a file using the Windows Save command or copy it to the clipboard and then use it in other applications.

If the data is to be evaluated in a spreadsheet application (e.g. Microsoft Excel) it is ad-visable to copy the data to the clipboard in HTML format. If the clipboard is then copied to an (empty) worksheet, the values are separated in tabular form.

6.1.1 Functions in LogBooks Window

The following additional functions are available in the Logbooks window:


Message Type Used to select the type of messages which are to be listed (more than one option can be selected)

Device Used to select the transmitter components for which message data is to be displayed (more than one option can be selected)

Content Type Filter Used to select the parameters or values which are to be displayed

Display Used to show and hide the columns Counts (shows the number of mes-sages of this message type) and Source (shows the transmitter compo-nent to which the message is assigned)

Last/First On Top Sorts the displayed messages according to the time at which they occurred

Clear (Real) deletion of the logbook entries (identical to deleting the logbook entries using the context menu of the Logbook menu window)


Restore (Real) restoration of the deleted logbook entries (identical to restoring the logbook entries using the context menu of the Logbook menu win-dow)

Read Used to read out / update the displayed messages

6.2 SW Backup/Restore Menu: Back Up Entire System

You can create a data/system backup file on the flash card of the R&S NetCCU800 and save it on an external medium or restore it to the flash card by using the SW Backup/Re-store browser menu.

You can create the data/system backup file in the SW Backup/Restore menu window of the R&S NetCCU800 and from there also read it directly back into the R&S NetCCU800.

^ Select Backup / Restore in the browser window.

The SW Backup/Restore - Web Interface window is displayed.

The window displays the current status of the tool (Status) as well as the backup information (Backup Information) related to the data/system backup file that is stored on the flash card.

Copy the data/system backup file from the flash card to an external medium 1.

Click on Download Backup file from the Device.

• <

2. In the Windows dialog boxes that follow, select the desired file name and where you want to save it.

The file will be saved at the selected location.

Copy the data/system backup file from an external medium to the flash card

1. Click on Browse.

2. Select the desired file in the Windows dialog boxes that follow.

The selected file is shown in the display area of the Upload window segment.

3. Click Upload selected file to the Device.

The file is saved on the R&S NetCCU800 flash card and can then be loaded into the R&S NetCCU800 via the SW Backup/Restore menu window.

6.3 Storage Menu: Saving Exciter Data

You can use the R&S NetCCU800 to save parameter data of the exciter to an external me-dium and to recall this data again when required.

This function is only available via the web browser.

The exciter must be connected to the R&S NetCCU800 and must be in remote mode.

^ Select Storage in the browser window.

The start window to save and recall exciter parameter data is displayed.

6.3.1 Saving Parameter Data

1. In the start window, select Save parameter settings into file.

A window opens from which you can select the parameter data you want to save.

2. Select the required exciter and the parameter data set that you want to save.

3. Enter a unique comment about the selected parameter set to help you recognize thecontent of the set or its intended use.

4. Click Save.

Use the Windows Save file as command to save the parameter set to a file.

6.3.2 Recalling Parameter Data

ATTENTION! When parameter data is recalled, the current parameters of the selected exciter are overwritten without a warning message being displayed.A

1. In the start window, select Recall parameter settings into file.

A window appears in which you can select which saved parameter data you want to re-call to which exciter.

It is possible to import the parameter data of an exciter to a second exciter of the same type.

2. Click Browse and select the required file.

3. Click Upload selected file to load the file.

A window is opened in which you can select the exciter to which the parameter data is to be copied.

4. Select the exciter to which the parameter data is to be copied, and confirm with Recall.

The parameter data is copied to the selected exciter. The exciter is then automatically rebooted.

CHAPTER 6

MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS

1 Maintenance Intervals ..................................................................5

2 Maintenance Tasks........................................................................6

2.1 Replacing BIOS Battery in R&S NetCCU800.....................................................6

2.2 Replacing Fans on Exciter...............................................................................6

2.3 Software Update ...............................................................................................6

1 Maintenance Intervals

The following maintenance work must be performed at regular intervals:

Maintenance interval Task Procedure described in:

2x per year 0 Check the operating values (e.g. output power, control values, etc)

1x per year 0 Check and, if necessary, change the backup battery of the transmitter control unit (R&S NetCCU800

Chapter "Maintenance" in the R&S NetCCU800manual

1x per year 0 Measure the pH value of the Antifrogen N coolant (the coolant must be changed if the pH value is below 7) 0 Measure the concentration of the Antifrogen N. The concentration must be at least 20 % (by volume) (this corresponds to antifreeze protection down to at least -10 °C).

Documentation from the cool-ing system manufacturer a)

After 5 years and then 1x per year

0 Check whether the fans make noises when in operation; replace them if necessary

Chapter "Maintenance" in the exciter manual

a) Experience has shown that Antifrogen N can be used in systems for many years without having to be changed. The Antifrogen N concentration in the system should nevertheless be checked once per year. It also advisable to check the concentration if the coolant is topped up. Antifreeze testers for Antifrogen N ar commercially available. The concentration should not drop below 20 % (by volume), otherwise corrosion p tection will be impaired.

• 4

2 Maintenance Tasks

2.1 Replacing BIOS Battery in R&S NetCCU800

The chapter "Maintenance" in the R&S NetCCU800 manual describes how to replace the BIOS battery.

2.2 Replacing Fans on Exciter

The chapter "Maintenance" in the exciter manual describes how to replace the fans.

2.3 Software Update

You can use the R&S NetCCU800 to install software updates for the R&S NetCCU800 itself as well as for all exciters connected to the R&S NetCCU800. The update data is first transferred to the R&S NetCCU800. The update for the connected exciters is then performed in a second step.

The software update is only possible if the R&S NetCCU800 is remotely connected to a net-work client on which the new software and the program for performing the update are in-stalled.

You perform a software update for the NSU/NCU in the same way. It is also possible to up-date exciters via the NCU/NSU Update menu.

Wore The update program was developed for performing updates of various Rohde&Schwarzsoftware solutions. For this reason, some functions of the program which are not relevant to updating software via the R&S NetCCU800 are omitted in the description below.

The procedure for performing a software update is as follows.

1. Log on as Maintenance in the menu operation.

2. Call up NetCCU > NetCCU Setup > SW Maintenance.

1. Set the R&S NetCCU800to Update mode using the Start function under SW UpdateOperation.

4. Start the installation software on the client computer. The

start window of the R&S Software Distributor opens.

5. Confirm the default setting Remote Installation by clicking on Next.

The software updates that can be installed will be displayed. You can obtain additional information about the update you select by highlighting it with the cursor and then click-ing Info.

6. Select the required updates and confirm installation of the updates by clicking Next.

All instruments found in the network are displayed under the device name that you as-signed in the Maintenance menu window.

7. Select the instrument and start the update by clicking Install.

After the update has been completed, a corresponding message will appear in the field at the bottom left of the window. The R&S NetCCU800 is rebooted automatically.

If connected transmitter components cannot be found because the R&S NetCCU800 was not in Update mode, the message "No R&S Device found" is displayed at the bottom left of the window.

You have the following option:

1. On the R&S NetCCU800, open the menu NetCCU > NetCCU Setup > SW Mainte-nance and start the Update mode using the Start function under SW Update Opera-tion.

2. Click Rescan in the R&S Software Distributor window.

The special components are displayed and you can perform the update in the way de-scribed above.

None of the remaining functions in the R&S Software Distribution window are relevant for updates via the R&S NetCCU800; settings that can be accessed using these functions must not be changed.

Performing software updates for exciters

When the update procedure described above is performed, the software updates for the ex-citer(s) are also transferred to the R&S NetCCU800. The update for the exciter(s) is started directly via the R&S NetCCU800.

1. Set the R&S NetCCU800 to the Update mode in the way described above.

2. Start the installation software.

3. Select the software package for the exciter.

1. Search for instruments in the network and select the exciter for which you want to perform a software update.

4. Install the update.

After the update procedure has been completed, the respective exciter is rebooted auto-matically.

CHAPTER 7

TROUBLESHOOTING

1 Information

Troubleshooting information will be provided at a later date.

CHAPTER 8

SERVICE

• 4

CONTENTS

1 Necessary Tools and Test Equipment..........................................1

2 Overview........................................................................................2

3 Preparatory Work...........................................................................3

3.1 Safety............................................................................................................3

3.2 Rack Cabling.................................................................................................3

3.3 Removing the Front Panel/Rear Panel .........................................................4

4 Power Distribution.........................................................................5

4.1 Replacing the Main Switch .........................................................................5

4.1.1 Removing the Main Switch........................................................................5

4.1.2 Installing the Main Switch..........................................................................6

4.2 Replacing the Motor Protection Switch......................................................8

4.2.1 Removing the Motor Protection Switch ......................................................8

4.2.2 Installing the Motor Protection Switch .....................................................11

4.3 Replacing the Power Distribution Board..................................................11

4.3.1 Removing the Power Distribution Board ..................................................11

4.3.2 Installing the Power Distribution Board ....................................................12

4.4 Replacing an Automatic Line Fuse...........................................................13

4.4.1 Removing an Automatic Line Fuse ..........................................................13

4.4.2 Installing an Automatic Line Fuse ...........................................................14

4.5 Replacing the Auxiliary Power Supply.....................................................15

4.5.1 Removing the Auxiliary Power Supply ....................................................15

4.5.2 Installing the Auxiliary Power Supply .......................................................15

5 Transmitter Control Unit ............................................................17

5.1 Replacing the R&S NetCCU800..................................................................17

5.1.1 Removing the R&S NetCCU800 ...............................................................17

5.1.2 Preparing the R&S NetCCU800 for Installation...........................................18

5.1.3 Installing the R&S NetCCU800..................................................................19

5.2 Replacing the Rack Controller..................................................................19

5.2.1 Removing the Rack Controller ................................................................19

5.2.2 Installing the Rack Controller ..................................................................20

• 4

6 Exciter components .......................................................................21

6.1 Replacing the Exciter....................................................................................21

6.1.1 Removing the Exciter .................................................................................21

6.1.2 Installing the Exciter....................................................................................22

6.2 Replacing the Exciter Switch ......................................................................23

6.2.1 Removing the Exciter Switch.......................................................................23

6.2.2 Installing the Exciter Switch.........................................................................23

7 Final stage components.................................................................25

7.1 Replacing the Amplifier ...............................................................................25

7.1.1 Removing the Amplifier...............................................................................25

7.1.2 Installing the Amplifier ................................................................................27

7.2 Replacing Absorber Resistor.......................................................................27

7.2.1 Removing Absorber Resistor .....................................................................27

7.2.2 Installing Absorber Resistor .......................................................................28

8 Filters...............................................................................................29

8.1 Replacing the UHF Band Filter.....................................................................29

8.1.1 Removing the UHF Band Filter ..................................................................29

8.1.2 Installing the UHF Band Filter ....................................................................31

8.2 Harmonics Filter............................................................................................31

8.2.1 Replacing the Harmonics Filter..................................................................318.2.1.1 Removing the Harmonics Filter......................................................................318.2.1.2 Installing the Harmonics Filter.......................................................................33

9 Cooling System...............................................................................35

9.1 Replacing Quick-Release Coupler...............................................................35

9.1.1 Removing Quick-Release Coupler..............................................................35

9.1.2 Installing Quick-Release Coupler................................................................37

9.2 Replacing Temperature Sensors ................................................................37

9.2.1 Removing a Temperature Sensor...............................................................38

9.2.2 Installing a Temperature Sensor ................................................................38

10 Transformer....................................................................................39

• 4

1 Necessary Tools and Test Equipment

The specified tools and test equipment include only those items needed for removing sys-tem components and carrying out simple checks on them.

Depending on the service work to be performed, you will require the following tools:

O Screwdriver No. 0

O Screwdriver No. 1

O Screwdriver No. 2

O Cross-tip screwdriver No. 0



O Torx screwdriver No. 8



O Hexagonal socket No. 3

O Hexagonal socket No. 6

O Open-end wrench No. 7



O Multimeter

O Network analyzer (required when replacing the harmonics filter)

2 Overview

You can remove and exchange the following units and components if errors occur:


- Main switch

- Motor protection switch

- Automatic line fuse

- Power distribution board

- Auxiliary power supply

O Transmitter control unit

- R&S NetCCU800

- Rack controller

O Exciter components

- Exciter

- Exciter switch (for exciter standby)

O Final stage components

- Amplifier

- Absorber resistor

O Harmonics filter

O Bandpass filter O

Cooling system

- Quick-release coupler

- Temperature sensor

O Transformer (optional)

• *

3 Preparatory Work

3.1 Safety

WARNING!All service work should only be carried out by qualified personnel and only on components that have been disconnected from the power supply. Heavy components such as amplifiers must always be exchanged using a team of two people.

Note Full information on the subject of safety can be found in the section "Safety".

3.2 Rack Cabling

The standard components in the R&S NH860x transmitter are fully cabled together on de-livery. You need to reconnect the separate replacement instruments during service work.

Each cable has a yellow collar at each end inscribed with the cable number (W...) and the intended purpose (module number A..., connector number X...). This makes it easier to connect the cable concerned to the intended slot or connection point as the target connec-tor designation is also shown (inscription or sticker) on the modules.

For easy connection of replacement instruments or devices proceed as follows:

1. Read the connector designation on the yellow cable collar.

1. Find the same designation on the unit you want to connect (female connector or circuitdiagram).

• 4

3.3 Removing the Front Panel/Rear Panel

To remove the front panel/rear panel proceed as follows:Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove the front or rear panel.

• 4

4 Power Distribution

You can replace the following power distribution components:

O Main switch (power supply terminal)

O Motor protection switch

O Automatic line fuse

O Power distribution board

O Auxiliary power supply

4.1 Replacing the Main Switch

WARNING!Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any service work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury due to electric shock and avoid dam-age to the instruments.

4.1.1 Removing the Main Switch

To remove the main switch, proceed as follows:

1. Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove the front panel of the power distribution.

2. Loosen and remove the connected cables using a hexagon socket wrench No. 5.

3. Undo the screws on the switch housing.

4.1.2 Installing the Main Switch

1. Reinstall the main switch in the reverse order of removal.

2. Insert the individual conductors of the power cable into the openings provided (see theillustration). Start on the left (L1) and continue to the right in ascending order up to theneutral conductor.

Fig. 4 Connecting main switch 1)

Openings for cable conductors

3. Secure the individual conductors using a hexagon socket wrench No. 5.

4. Check the direction of rotation with the transmitter main switch switched off (clockwise).

If the direction of phase rotation is incorrect, swap over two conductors of the cable and measure the direction of phase rotation again; if it is correct, replacement of the main switch is complete.

The main switch can be locked using a padlock to prevent it from being switched on by un-authorized persons.

«• Set the rotary knob to the OFF position, pull the green safety lever forward and attach the padlock.

4.2 Replacing the Motor Protection Switch


4.2.1 Removing the Motor Protection Switch

To remove the motor protection switch, proceed as follows:

1. Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove the front panel of the power distribution.

2. Pull the blue-green shorting plug forward.If necessary, you can use a suitable screwdriver (No. 0) as force is required to remove the component.

4. Pull the motor protection switch forward at the bottom edge.Since there is a spring clip on the upper edge on the rear of the switch, you can only disengage the switch at the bottom.

4-2.2 Installing the Motor Protection Switch

Replace the motor protection switch by proceeding in the reverse order.

NOTA When replacing, feed the shorting plug right in and push the switch into place

with some

Fig. 8 Removing the power distribution board

1) Screws on the automatic line fuses2) Screws on the SUB-D connector

5. Using a Torx screwdriver No. 8 remove seven fixing screws from the power distribution board.

Fig. 9 Removing the power distribution board 1)

Fixing screws on the power distribution board

6. To take out the PCB, first slide it downward.

4.3.2 Installing the Power Distribution Board

^ Replace the power distribution board by proceeding in the reverse order.

Note When replacing the power distribution board, make sure that it feeds into the right slots.

Fig. 10 Installing the power distribution board

1) Wrong2) Right3) Pressing with a screwdriver visibly opens the right chamber

4.4 Replacing an Automatic Line Fuse


4.4.1 Removing an Automatic Line Fuse

Note Before removing an automatic line fuse, the power distribution board must be removed (see

"Removing the Power Distribution Board").

To remove the automatic line fuse proceed as follows:

1. Remove the power distribution board.

• 4

4.5 Replacing the Auxiliary Power Supply

WARNING!

Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any service work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury due to electric shock and avoid dam-age to the instruments.

4.5.1 Removing the Auxiliary Power Supply

To remove the auxiliary power supply unit, proceed as follows:

1. Using a Torx screwdriver (No. 20), remove the front panel of the power distribution.

2. Detach the cables of the auxiliary power supply unit (X35, X45) from the power distribution board. Trace the two cables and if necessary cut off the cable ties.

3. Undo the Torx screw at the side of the power supply unit housing.

Push the power supply unit housing upward and remove it.

4. Remove the auxiliary power supply unit.

4.5.2 Installing the Auxiliary Power Supply

1. Reinstall the auxiliary power supply unit in the reverse order of removal.

2. Push the clips on the power supply unit housing from above into the openings provided.

5 Transmitter Control Unit

You can replace the following transmitter control unit components:

O R&S NetCCU800

O Rack controller

5.1 Replacing the R&S NetCCU800


5.1.1 Removing the R&S NetCCU800

Note Removing the R&S NetCCU800does not affect transmitter operation.

1. Switch off automatic line fuse F1.

2. Undo the two captive screws (Torx screwdriver No. 20) at the front brackets of the R&SNetCCU800 and exciter (next to the handles).

3. Grip the handles and slowly pull the rackmount out of the rack as far as it will go (theguide rails engage and are locked in place).

4. Disconnect the power cable from the rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800.

5. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800.

Fig. 12 Removing R&S NetCCU800 from transmitter rack

1) Captive screws at front panel of installed units (here: exciter and R&S NetCCU8002) Screws securing R&S NetCCU800to rackmount3) Guide rails4) Support bracket for R&S NetCCU8005) Safety lever for releasing guide rail catch

6. Undo the two fastening screws (Torx screwdriver No. 9) from the rackmount on bothsides of the R&S NetCCU800

Note Removal should be performed by two persons. When pulled out by the handles, the R&SNetCCU800 must be supported from below as soon as the support brackets no longer support it.

7. Pull the R&S NetCCU800 out of the rackmount.

5.1.2 Preparing the R&S NetCCU800 for Installation

The replacement R&S NetCCU800 is delivered as a desktop unit and must be prepared for installation as follows.

* Remove the protective rubber caps on the rear feet of the instrument.

• «

5.1.3 Installing the R&S NetCCU800

To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

1. Slide the R&S NetCCU800on the support brackets horizontally into the rackmount untilthe holes in the rackmount line up with the holes in the side panels of the R&SNetCCU800.

1. Attach the R&S NetCCU800 using the two screws.

2. Connect the cables to the R&S NetCCU800 according to the labeling (see yellow cablecollars).

3. Undo the latch on the guide rails. Simultaneously press the safety lever on the right sidedown and on the left side up, and slide the rackmount into the rack.

2. Retighten the captive screws on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 and exciter.

4. Switch the R&S NetCCU on again and configure it as required for the specific transmitter; see instructions in chapter "Commissioning".

Note When installing the cables of the R&S NetCCU800 and putting it back into operation, referto the information in the transmitter manual.

5.2 Replacing the Rack Controller

WARNINGSAlways make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any service work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury due to electric shock and avoid damage to the instruments.

5.2.1 Removing the Rack Controller

Note The rack controller is underneath the R&S NetCCU800.

1. Remove the cover by undoing the two screws (Torx screwdriver No. 20).

2. Turn the two screws (Torx screwdriver No. 20) on the sides alternately by a few turns.

This pushes the rack controller out of the rack and prevents it from tilting.

3. Remove the rack controller from the rack.

5.2.2 Installing the Rack Controller

To install the rack controller in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

Note The rack controller does not need to be configured. All system-specific settings are trans-ferred automatically by the R&S NetCCU800.

6 Exciter components

You can replace the following exciter components:

O Exciter

O Exciter Switch

6.1 Replacing the Exciter


6.1.1 Removing the Exciter

1. Switch off automatic line fuse F2 (exciter A) or F3 (exciter B).

2. Undo the two captive screws (Torx screwdriver No. 20) at the front brackets of the R&SNetCCU800 and exciter (next to the handles).

3. Grip the handles and slowly pull the rackmount out of the rack as far as it will go (theguide rails engage and are locked in place).

4. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the exciter.

Fig. 13 Removing exciter from transmitter rack

1) Captive screws at front panel of installed units (here: exciter and R&S NetCCU800)2) Screws securing exciter to rackmount3) Guide rails4) Safety lever for releasing guide rail catch

5. Undo the two fastening screws (Torx screwdriver No. 9) from the rackmount on bothsides of the exciter.

6. Pull the exciter out of the rackmount.

6.1.2 Installing the Exciter

The unit is installed in the transmitter in the reverse order of removal.

1. Slide the exciter on the support brackets horizontally into the rackmount until the holesin the cabinet line up with the holes in the side panels of the exciter.

2. Secure the exciter on both sides using the two screws.

3. Connect the cables to the exciter according to the labeling (see yellow cable collars).

4. Release the catches on the guide rails. Simultaneously press down the safety lever onthe right-hand side and push up the safety lever on the left-hand side, and slide the rack-mount into the rack.

5. Retighten the captive screws on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 and exciter.

6. Switch the automatic line fuses F2 and F3 on again.

• «

7. Configure the exciter for the specific transmitter, as described in the chapter "Putting into Operation".

Note Configuration can be performed either manually (by entering all settings) or automatical-ly (by loading a stored configuration file). Further details are given in the "Exciter" man-ual.

6.2 Replacing the Exciter Switch


6.2.1 Removing the Exciter Switch

The exciter switch in transmitters with the exciter standby option (two exciters) is located behind the two exciters.

Note So that you can conveniently remove the exciter switch, you need to remove the R&SNetCCU800and the exciters from the rack.

1. Undo the two captive screws from the R&S NetCCU800 and the exciter on the frontbrackets (next to the handles).

2. Using the handles, slowly pull out the rackmount from the rack as far as it will go (theguide rails will engage and lock in place).

Fig. 14 Removing the exciter switch from the transmitter rack

3. Disconnect all cabling from the rear panel of the exciter switch.

4. Undo the fixing screws on the exciter switch.

5. Pull the exciter switch from the transmitter rack.

6.2.2 Installing the Exciter Switch


• 4

1. Connect the cables to the exciter switch according to the labeling (see yellow cable collars).

2. Undo the latch on the guide rails. Simultaneously press the safety lever on the right sidedown and on the left side up, and slide the rackmount into the rack.

3. Retighten the captive screws on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800and exciter.

7 Final stage components

You can replace the following output stage components:

O Amplifiers O

Absorber unit

Note Since failure of the splitter/combiner unit is extremely unlikely, its replacement is not de-scribed here.

7.1 Replacing the Amplifier

When replacing an amplifier from the Rohde & Schwarz NH8600 transmitters, you do not need to remove any of the lines since the connections on the rear panel of the device are connected to the rack by automatic connectors.

7.1.1 Removing the Amplifier

ATTENTION!

Before being removed, the amplifier must be completely de-energized in order to prevent possible damage to the device due to contact erosion.

1. Switch off the amplifier at the power distribution in the transmitter rack (move the appro-priate motor protection switch to the "OFF" position).

Note The other devices in the transmitter rack can remain switched on. A transmitter with mul-tiple amplifiers can remain in operation with reduced power while one of the amplifiers is being replaced.

2. Undo the two captive screws (Torx screwdriver No. 20) on both sides of the front panel.

3. Shut off the supply of coolant at the rear of the amplifier by closing the coolant inlet andoutlet taps for the respective slot. To do so, slide the lock upward.

Fig. 15 Coolant tap with lock

CAUTION! When pulling the amplifier out of the transmitter rack, do not allow it to fall. Support the unit from below.A

Since the amplifier weighs approx. 25 kg, it is advisable to handle it with the aid of a sec-ond person.

4. Slowly pull the amplifier out of the rack using the handles.

The automatic connectors should disengage on the rear panel of the device.

• <

ATTENTION!

To prevent damage to the connectors, do not stand the amplifier on its rear panel.

5. Stand the amplifier with its bottom side facing down.

7.1.2 Installing the Amplifier


7.2 Replacing Absorber Resistor

WARNING!


7.2.1 Removing Absorber Resistor

1. Remove the bottom coupler bracket (Tone screwdriver No. 20).

2. Remove the cover from the absorber resistors (37 x M3, Torx screwdriver No. 8).

• «

4. Unscrew the four fastening screws on the resistor heat sink using a Torx screwdriver (No. 20).

Note The resistor impedance can only be checked on the removed resistor (nominal value =

50 Ω ±5%). 7.2.2 Installing

Absorber Resistor

Note Before installing the absorber resistor, check that the terminal lug of the replacement ab-sorber is not bent.

1. Before installing the absorber resistor, apply the heat-conducting paste evenly to the underside of the heat sink.

2. Attach the absorber resistor to the coolant collector pipe using all 4 fastening screws(Torx screwdriver No. 20).

3. Connect the terminal lug (Torx screwdriver No. 9).

4. Secure the cover using all 37 fastening screws (Torx screwdriver No. 8).

5. Reattach the coupler bracket.

8 Filters

You can replace the following filters:

O UHF bandpass filter O

Harmonics filter

8.1 Replacing the UHF Band Filter

WARNING!


Note The filter can be left in the rack during retuning. However, the RF connectors do need to bedemounted.

8.1.1 Removing the UHF Band Filter

1. On every rigid line holder loosen the cable gland for the rigid line clamps, and the rigidline clamp fastening (hexagon socket No. 3 and Torx screwdriver No. 20).

2. Open out the RF bracket at the power coupler output. To do this, loosen the clamp usinga hexagon socket No. 5.

3. Slide the complete rigid line assembly horizontally outward.

This disconnects the RF bracket power-coupler side (combiner output).

4. Rotate the power-coupler side RF bracket through 90°.

The complete rigid line can now be slid vertically.

5. Unplug all the RF connectors on the RF bandpass filter.

6. Rotate the RF bandpass filter connector bracket outward.

7. Undo the four fixing screws to left and right of the RF bandpass filter and carefully withdraw the filter from the rack.

• «

8.1.2 Installing the UHF Band Filter

Note You can find a detailed description of how to install the bandpass filter in the "Installation"chapter of the transmitter manual.

8.2 Harmonics Filter

In the R&S NH860x transmitter family the harmonics filter is built into the RF line.

8.2.1 Replacing the Harmonics Filter


Note The harmonics filter is lacquered in order to reduce the surface temperature, but high tem-peratures are nevertheless to be expected.

8.2.1.1 Removing the Harmonics Filter

Note If the transmitter is still connected to other RF components at the RF output, these must be

unscrewed prior to removal.

To remove the harmonics filter proceed as follows:

1. Using a Tonx screwdriver (No. 20), remove the rear panel of the transmitter.

2. Undo the hexagon socket screw at the lower RF rigid line bracket of the harmonics filterand at the opposing RF rigid line bracket, and disconnect the transverse rigid line including the RF rigid line bracket by pulling it downward.

1) Hexagon socket screw2) Bracket at harmonics filter3) Rigid line assembly

3. Open the clamps on the RF coupler between the harmonics filter and the test lightningprotection system.

4. Undo and detach any other attachments securing the harmonics filter.

1) RF coupler between the harmonics filter and the test lightning protection system2) Attachments securing harmonics filter

5. Pull the harmonics filter downward out of the rack.

8.2.1.2 Installing the Harmonics Filter


• *

Note After a new harmonics filter has been installed, the trimming line must be readjusted to thecomplete RF path.

1. Detach the RF rigid line bracket from the power combiner output.

2. Connect the network analyzer using the test adapter RL58-7/16 (supplied with the transmitter accessories).

3. Terminate the transmitter output with a 50 Ω resistor and use the network analyzer tomeasure the matching (S11) in the broadband frequency range (470 MHz to 862 MHz)along the entire rigid line.

4. Change the matching at the trimming line adjusters until a return loss ar >=30dB is measured.

9 Cooling System

You can replace the following cooling system components:

O Quick-release couplers O

Temperature sensors

9.1 Replacing Quick-Release Coupler


The transmitter rack contains two self-sealing quick-release couplers for each amplifier. They prevent the coolant from escaping when the amplifier is installed and removed.

9.1.1 Removing Quick-Release Coupler

Note Before replacing the quick-release coupler, you must remove the associated amplifier (see"Removing Amplifier).

To remove the quick-release coupler, proceed as follows:

1. Shut off the supply of coolant at the rear of the amplifier by closing the coolant inlet and outlet taps for the respective slot. To do so, slide the lock upward.

Fig. 18 Coolant tap with lock

2. Undo the hexagon nut at the coolant tap and pull the coolant line toward the rear.

3. Open the spring-lock washer at the quick-release coupler by squeezing its two ends together.

1) Hexagon nut2) Spring-lock washer

4. Remove the quick-release coupler from the front of the transmitter rack.

9.1.2 Installing Quick-Release Coupler


9.2 Replacing Temperature Sensors

WARNING!Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any service

I work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury due to electric shock and avoid damage to the instruments.

AThe transmitter rack has two temperature sensors which measure the inlet and outlet tem-perature of the coolant. They are located at the coolant distributor and coolant collector of the transmitter rack.

• 4

9.2.1 Removing a Temperature Sensor

Note The temperature sensor can be replaced while the transmitter is in operation. No coolantwill escape.While the sensor is being replaced, the transmitter control unit displays a coolant tempera-ture of 75 °C for this temperature sensor; the transmitter will not be shut down in the case of overtemperature.

* Before removal, make sure you know which temperature sensor needs to be replaced.

To remove the temperature sensor, proceed as follows:

1. Using a Torx screwdriver (No. 20), remove the rear panel of the transmitter.

2. Disconnect the cable from the temperature sensor.

Note The connector catch can be released by turning the cable fitting.

3. Using a Torx screwdriver (No. 9), remove the two retaining screws from the sensorflange.

3. Pull the temperature sensor out of the coolant distributor and coolant collector.

9.2.2 Installing a Temperature Sensor


CHAPTER 9

ANNEX

CONTENTS

1 Interface Description ....................................................................5

1.1 Front-Panel Interfaces....................................................................................5

1.1.1 Q1 -AC Supply Input / Protective Earth ......................................................5

1.1.2 X57 - Optional Socket Kit ZR800Z1 ............................................................5

1.1.3 X31 - Pump Unit (Single-Phase): (Wago Plug-In Terminal) .........................5

1.1.4 X32 - Cooler (Single-Phase): (Wago Plug-In Terminal) ..............................6

1.1.5 X33 - Switched Phase for External Cooling System (Single-Phase):(Wago Plug-In Terminal) ..............................................................................6

1.1.6 X34 - AC Power Supply for Control Units and Exciters (Single-Phase):(Wago Plug-In Terminal) ..............................................................................7

1.1.7 X36 - External Absorber Cooling System (Single-Phase):

(Wago Plug-In Terminal) ..............................................................................7

1.1.8 X41 - RF Carrier Loop: (Wago Plug-In Terminal) .......................................7

1.1.9 X42-Absorber Monitoring: (Wago Plug-In Terminal) .................................8

1.1.10X43-Cooling Monitoring: (Wago Plug-In Terminal).....................................8

1.1.11 X44 - Overcurrent Monitoring for External Cooling System:(Wago Plug-In Terminal) ..............................................................................8

1.2 Interfaces on Transmitter Roof .....................................................................9

1.2.1 X100A-Ethernet A Remote (Standard): (8-Contact Female) .....................9

1.2.2 X100B-Ethernets Remote (N+1 Option): (8-Contact Female) .................9

1.2.3 X232 - RS232: (9-Contact D-Sub Female)................................................10

1.2.4 X101A-CAN Bus Rack Bus A: (9-Contact D-Sub Female).......................10

1.2.5 X101B-CAN Bus Rack Bus A: (9-Contact D-Sub Female).......................11

1.2.6 X103A-CAN Bus for Ext. Pump: (9-Contact D-Sub Female).....................11

1.2.7 X103B-CAN Bus for Ext. Pump: (9-Contact D-Sub Female)....................12

1.2.8 X111A-AF1 Exciter A: (XLR Female) ......................................................12

1.2.9 X111B-AF1 Exciter B: (XLR Female) ......................................................12

1.2.10X112A-AF2 Exciter A: (XLR Female) ......................................................13

1.2.11X112B-AF2 ExciterB: (XLR Female) .....................................................13

1.2.12 X113A-AF3 Exciter A: (XLR Female) ......................................................13

1.2.13X113B-AF3 ExciterB: (XLR Female) ......................................................13

1.2.14X121A-VF1 Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm).........................................14

1.2.15X121B-VF1 Exciter B: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm).......................................14

1.2.16X122A-VF2 Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm).......................................14

1.2.17X122B-VF2 ExciterB: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)........................................14

1.2.18X123A-VF IN Monitoring Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm) ..................15

1.2.19X123B-VF IN Monitoring Exciter B: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm) ..................15

1.2.20X131A-AF1 IN Monitoring Exciter A: (BNC Female) ...............................15

1.2.21 X131B-AF1 IN Monitoring Exciter B: (BNC Female) ...............................15


1.2.23X132B-AF2 IN Monitoring Exciter B: (BNC Female) ...............................16


1.2.25X133B-AF3 IN Monitoring Exciter B: (BNC Female) ...............................16

1.2.26 X134A-SYNC EXT 1 Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm) ........................17

1.2.27 X134B-SYNC EXT 1 Exciter B: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm) ........................17

1.2.28 X135A-SYNC EXT 2 Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm) ........................17

1.2.29 X135B-SYNC EXT 2 Exciter B: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm) ........................17

1.2.30X141A- NICAM IF Exciter A: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm)................................17

1.2.31 X141B - NICAM IF Exciter B: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm)................................18

1.2.32 X142A- NICAM DATA/BTSC Exciter A: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm/75 Ohm) 18

1.2.33X142B - NICAM DATA/BTSC Exciter B: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm/75 Ohm) 18

1.2.34X143A- 10 MHz REF.INPUT Exciter A: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm) .............19

1.2.35X143B - 10 MHz REF.INPUT Exciter B: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm) .............19

1.2.36 RF Transmitter Output: (EIA Flange, 50 Ohm).............................................19

1.3 Monitoring Outputs on Front Panel of R&S SC800 Exciter........................20

1.3.1 X65A - 10 MHz Test Output for Exciter A: (SMA Female, 50 Ohm)...............20

1.3.2 X65B - 10 MHz Test Output for Exciter B: (SMA Female, 50 Ohm)...............20

1.3.3 X61A - RF Test Output for Exciter A: (SMA Female, 50 Ohm) ...................20

1.3.4 X61B - RF Test Output for Exciter B: (SMA Female, 50 Ohm) ...................20

• «

1 Interface Description

1.1 Front-Panel Interfaces

1.1.1 Q1 - AC Supply Input / Protective Earth

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

PHASE L1 Input 400V ±15% Q1. 2 Three-phase current input L1

PHASE L2 Input 400V ±15% Q1.4 Three-phase current input L2

PHASE L3 Input 400V ±15% Q1.6 Three-phase current input L3

NEUTRAL N Input 0V Q1.8/N Neutral-conductor input N

PROTECTION EARTH PE

Input 0V X.PE.1 PE terminal

PROTECTION EARTH PE

Input 0V X.PE Station PE

1.1.2 X57 - Optional Socket Kit ZR800Z1


PHASE L Input 230V X57.L Separate circuit

NEUTRAL N Input 0V X57.N

PROTECTION EARTH PE

Input 0V X57.PE

1.1.3 X31 - Pump Unit (Single-Phase): (Wago Plug-In Terminal)


PHASE L2 Output 230V X31.1 Line fuse F6 [10A]

NEUTRAL N Input 0V X31.2


PROTECTION EARTH PE

Input 0V X31.3

1.1.4 X32 - Cooler (Single-Phase): (Wago Plug-In Terminal)


PHASE L3 Output 230V X32.1 Line fuse F7[10A]


PROTECTION EARTH PE

Input 0V X32.3

1.1.5 X33 - Switched Phase for External Cooling System (Single-Phase): (Wago Plug-In Terminal)




PROTECTION EARTH PE

Input 0V X33.3

External cooling system for dummy antenna (optional): (Wago plug-in terminal)




PROTECTION EARTH PE

Input 0V X33.6

1.1.6 X34 - AC Power Supply for Control Units and Exciters (Sin-gle-Phase): (Wago Plug-In Terminal)


PHASE L1 Output 230V X34.1 Line fuse F1 [3A] R&S NetCCU800connection

PHASE L1 Output 230V X34.2 Line fuse F2 [3A] Sx800 A connection

PHASE L1 Output 230V X34.3 Line fuse F3 [3A] Sx800B connection

PHASE L1 Output 230V X34.4 Line fuse F4 [3A] Add-on equipment connection


PROTECTION EARTH PE

Input 0V X34.6

1.1.7 X36 - External Absorber Cooling System (Single-Phase): (Wago Plug-In Terminal)




PROTECTION EARTH PE

Input 0V X36.3

1.1.8 X41 - RF Carrier Loop: (Wago Plug-In Terminal)

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remark

MAIN TX LOOP Input -12V±2V X41.1 -12 V floating

LOOP COM (+) Output +12V±2V X41.2 +12 V floating

RESERVE TX LOOP

Input -12V±2V X41.3 -12 V floating

LOOP COM (+) Output +12V±2V X41.4 +12 V floating

1.1.9 X42 - Absorber Monitoring: (Wago Plug-In Terminal)


FAULT SYSTEM ABSORBER

Input TTL X42.1 Jumper to 0 V

REF RACK SIGNALS

Output 0V X42.2 Reference 0 V

FAULT RACK ABSORBER


REF RACK SIGNALS


1.1.10 X43 - Cooling Monitoring: (Wago Plug-In Terminal)


FAULT COOLING 2

Input TTL X43.1 Jumper against 0 V

REF RACK SIGNALS


FAULT COOLING 1


REF RACK SIGNALS


WARNING COOLING


REF RACK SIGNALS


1.1.11 X44 - Overcurrent Monitoring for External Cooling System: (Wago Plug-In Terminal)


FAULT EXT: COOLING


REF RACK SIGNALS


1.2 Interfaces on Transmitter Roof

1.2.1 X100A - Ethernet A Remote (Standard): (8-Contact Female)


TX+ Output Ethernet X100A.1 Transmitting line

TX- Output Ethernet X100A.2 Transmitting line

RX+ Input Ethernet X100A.3 Receiving line

Bidirect. 75 Ω termina-tion

X100A.4


X100A.5

RX- Input Ethernet X100A.6 Receiving line


X100A.7


X100A.8

1.2.2 X100B - Ethernet B Remote (N+1 Option): (8-Contact Female)


TX+ Output Ethernet X100B.1 Transmitting line

TX- Output Ethernet X100B.2 Transmitting line

RX+ Input Ethernet X100B.3 Receiving line


X100B.4


X100B.5

RX- Input Ethernet X100B.6 Receiving line


X100B.7


X100B.8

1.2.3 X232 - RS232: (9-Contact D-Sub Female)


n.c. X232.1

RS232_TX Output RS-232-C X232.2 Transmit line

RS232_RX Input RS-232-C X232.3 Receive line

n.c. X232.4

GND Bidirect. X232.5

n.c. X232.6

n.c. X232.7

n.c. X232.8

n.c. X232.9

1.2.4 X101 A- CAN Bus Rack Bus A: (9-Contact D-Sub Female)


12V_RED Bidirect. 12V±1 V X101A.1 Redundant 12 V supply

RC_A_CAN_L Bidirect. CAN-Level X101A.2 CAN bus signal

CAN_GND Bidirect. 0V X101A.3 CAN GND

12V_RED Bidirect. 12V±1 V X101A.4 Redundant 12 V supply

CAN_SHLD Bidirect. GND X101A.5 Shield

GND Bidirect. GND X101A.6 GND

RC_A_CAN_H Bidirect. CAN+Level X101A.7 CAN bus signal

12V_ASI Bidirect. 12V±1.5V X101A.8

CAN_V+ Bidirect. 12V±1 V X101A.9

1.2.5 X101B - CAN Bus Rack Bus A: (9-Contact D-Sub Female)


12V_RED Bidirect. 12V±1 V X101B.1 Redundant 12 V supply

RC_B_CAN_L Bidirect. CAN-Level X101B.2 CAN bus signal

CAN_3ND Bidirect. 0V X101B.3 CAN GND

12V_RED Bidirect. 12V±1 V X101B.4 Redundant 12 V supply

CAN_SHLD Bidirect. GND X101B.5 Shield

GND Bidirect. GND X101B.6 GND

RC_B_CAN_H Bidirect. CAN+Level X101B.7 CAN bus signal

12V_ASI Bidirect. 12V±1.5V X101B.8

CAN_V+ Bidirect. 12V±1 V X101B.9

1.2.6 X103A - CAN Bus for Ext. Pump: (9-Contact D-Sub Female)


n.c. X103A.1

C_CAN_L Bidirect. CAN-Level X103A.2 CAN bus signal

CAN_GND Bidirect. 0V X103A.3 CAN GND

FAULT COOL-ING

Input TTL X103A.4 Cooling system fault

FAULT PRES-SURE

Input TTL X103A.5 Pressure fault

GND Bidirect. GND X103A.6 GND

C_CAN_H Bidirect. CAN+Level X103A.7 CAN bus signal

FAULT EMER-GENCY SWITCH

Input TTL X103A.8 Maintenance switch switched

n.c. X103A.9

1.2.7 X103B - CAN Bus for Ext. Pump: (9-Contact D-Sub Female)


n.c. X103B.1

C_CAN_L Bidirect. CAN-Level X103B.2 CAN bus signal

CAN_GND Bidirect. 0V X103B.3 CAN GND

FAULT COOL-ING

Input TTL X103B.4 Cooling system fault

FAULT PRES-SURE

Input TTL X103B.5 Pressure fault

GND Bidirect. GND X103B.6 GND

C_CAN_H Bidirect. CAN+Level X103B.7 CAN bus signal

FAULT EMER-GENCY SWITCH

Input TTL X103B.8 Maintenance switch switched

n.c. X103B.9

1.2.8 X111A-AF1 Exciter A: (XLR Female)


GND Bidirect. 0V X111A.1 GND/shield

AF1 (+) Input -12dBU..L to+12dBU 600 Ω/> 10 kΩ

X111A.2 AF1 Exciter A

AF1 (-) Input X111A.3

1.2.9 X111B-AF1 Exciter B: (XLR Female)


GND Bidirect. 0V X111B.1 GND/shield


X111B.2 AF1 Exciter B

AF1 (-) Input X111B.3

1.2.10 X112A-AF2 Exciter A: (XLR Female)



AF2 (+) Input -12dBU..L to+12dBU 600Ω/>10kΩ

X112A.2 AF2 Exciter A


1.2.11 X112B-AF2 Exciter B: (XLR Female)




X112B.2 AF2 Exciter B


1.2.12 X113A - AF3 Exciter A: (XLR Female)



AF3 (+) Input -12dBU..L to+12dBU 75Ω/600Ω/> 10 kΩ

X113A.2 AF3 Exciter A only with model 05


1.2.13 X113B - AF3 Exciter B: (XLR Female)



AF3 (+) Input -12dBU..L to+12dBU 75Ω/600Ω/> 10 kΩ

X113B.2 AF3 Exciter B only with model 05


1.2.14 X121A-VF1 Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


VF1 Input 1 Vpp / 0.7 Vpp ±3dB

X121A.1 VF1 Exciter A

GND Bidirect. X121A.2 GND/shield

1.2.15 X121B-VF1 Exciter B: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


VF1 Input 1 Vpp/ 0.7 Vpp ±3dB

X121B.1 VF1 Exciter B

GND Bidirect. X121B.2 GND/shield

1.2.16 X122A-VF2 Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


VF2 Input 1 Vpp/ 0.7 Vpp ±3dB

X122A.1 VF2 Exciter A


1.2.17 X122B - VF2 Exciter B: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


VF2 Input 1 Vpp / 0.7 Vpp ±3dB

X122B.1 VF2 Exciter B


1.2.18 X123A-VF IN Monitoring Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


VFIN Monitoring

Output 1 Vpp / 0.7 Vpp ±3dB

X123A.1 VF monitoring for exciter A


1.2.19 X123B - VF IN Monitoring Exciter B: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


VFIN Monitoring

Output 1 Vpp / 0.7 Vpp ±3dB

X123B.1 VF monitoring exciter B


1.2.20 X131A-AF1 IN Monitoring Exciter A: (BNC Female)


AF1 IN Monitoring

Output 0 dBu nominal X131A.1 AF1 monitoring exciter A


1.2.21 X131B-AF1 IN Monitoring Exciter B: (BNC Female)


AF1 IN Monitoring

Output 0 dBu nominal X131B.1 AF1 monitoring exciter B




AF2IN Monitoring



1.2.23 X132B - AF2 IN Monitoring Exciter B: (BNC Female)


AF2 IN Monitoring





AF3IN Monitoring



1.2.25 X133B - AF3 IN Monitoring Exciter B: (BNC Female)


AF3IN Monitoring



1.2.26 X134A-SYNC EXT 1 Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


SYNC EXT 1 Input 0.3 Vpp ± 20% X134A.1 SYNC EXT 1 Exciter A


1.2.27 X134B - SYNC EXT 1 Exciter B: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


SYNC EXT 1 Input 0.3 Vpp ± 20% X134B.1 SYNC EXT 1 Exciter B


1.2.28 X135A - SYNC EXT 2 Exciter A: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


SYNC EXT 2 Input 0.3 Vpp ± 20% X135A.1 SYNC EXT 2 Exciter A


1.2.29 X135B - SYNC EXT 2 Exciter B: (BNC Female, 75 Ohm)


SYNC EXT 2 Input 0.3 Vpp ± 20% X135B.1 SYNC EXT 2 Exciter B


1.2.30 X141A- NICAM IF Exciter A: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm)


NICAM IF Input -12 dBm to0dBm X141A.1 NICAM IF Exciter A



1.2.31 X141B - NICAM IF Exciter B: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm)


NICAM IF Input -12dBm to 0 dBm X141B.1 NICAM IF Exciter B


1.2.32 X142A- NICAM DATA/BTSC Exciter A: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm/75 Ohm)


NICAM DATA/ BTSC

Input 0.25 Vrms to 2 Vrms (model 02) 1 Vpp to 10 Vpp (model 05)

X142A.1 Ri = 75 Ω (model 02) Ri= 50 Ω (model 05) Exciter A


1.2.33 X142B - NICAM DATA/BTSC Exciter B: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm/75 Ohm)


NICAM DATA/ BTSC

Input 0.25 Vrms to 2 Vrms (model 02) 1 Vpp to 10 Vpp (model 05)

X142B.1 Ri= 75 Ω(model 02) Ri = 50 Ω (model 05) Exciter B


• «

1.2.34 X143A- 10 MHz REF.INPUT Exciter A: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm)


10 MHzREF INPUT

Input -5.0 dB to 20 dBm or TTL

X143A.1 10 MHz reference for exciter A


1.2.35 X143B - 10 MHz REF.INPUT Exciter B: (BNC Female, 50 Ohm)


10 MHzREF INPUT

Input -5.0 dB to 20 dBm or TTL

X143B.1 10 MHz reference for exciter B


1.2.36 RF Transmitter Output: (EIA Flange, 50 Ohm)

Dimensioning of the EIA flange according to output power:

- EIA 1 5/8"

- EIA 31/8"

- EIA 41/2"


RF transmitter output

Output RF RF output on fully equipped transmitter:

Psyncmax=16.3 kWcomb. 1 rack (10 amplifiers)

Psyncmax=32.0 kWcomb. 2 racks (20 amplifiers)

GND Bidirect. RF GND/shield

• 4

1.3 Monitoring Outputs on Front Panel of R&S SC800 Ex-citer

1.3.1 X65A - 10 MHz Test Output for Exciter A: (SMA Female, 50 Ohm)


10MHz REF_ OUT

Output 0 dBm (+2 dB to -1 dB)

X65A.1 10MHz reference monitor-ing for exciter A


1.3.2 X65B - 10 MHz Test Output for Exciter B: (SMA Female, 50 Ohm)


10MHz REF OUT

Output 0 dBm (+2 dB to -1 dB)

X65B.1 10MHz reference monitor-ing for exciter B


1.3.3 X61A - RF Test Output for Exciter A: (SMA Female, 50 Ohm)


RF_MONOUT Output -7dBm ±2dB X61A.1 RF OUT monitoring for exciter A


1.3.4 X61B - RF Test Output for Exciter B: (SMA Female, 50 Ohm)


RF_MONOUT Output -7dBm ±2dB X61B.1 RF OUT monitoring for exciter B

Drawings and Diagrams

TRANSMITTER

el.Kennz Benennung / Hinweise Sachnummer Hersteller Bestellbezeichnung enthalten in

Part Designation Stock No. Manufacturer Designation contained in ACHTUNG EGB /ATTENTION ESD

*VARIANTENERKLAERUNG 4

*EXPLANATION OF MODELS VAR04=NH8606EC AW-SENDER MIT EINZEL-VORSTUFE, FILTER EXTERN, PROGNOSESENDER MOD04=NH8606EC ATV- TRANSMITTER WITH SINGLE EXCITER, FILTER EXTERNAL VAR05=NH8606EC ATV-SENDER MIT EINZEL-VORSTUFE, FILTER INTERN, PROGNOSESENDER MOD05=NH8606EC ATV- TRANSMITTER WITH SINGLE EXCITER, FILTER INTERNAL VAR24=NH8606VC ATV-SENDER MIT VORSTUFEN-RESERVE, FILTER EXTERN, PROGNOSESENDER MOD24=NH8606VC ATV TRANSMITTER WITH DUAL DRIVE, FILTER EXTERNAL VAR25=NH8606VC ATV-SENDER MIT VORSTUFEN-RESERVE, FILTER INTERN PROGNOSESENDER MOD25=NH8606VC ATV TRANSMITTER WITH DUAL DRIVE, FILTER INTERNAL VAR50=NH8606XC ATV-SENDER +++GRUNDSENDER+++ MOD50=NH8606XC ATV- TRANSMITTER ++BASIC TRANSMITTER++

A1 -A6 GG VH8600A1 UHF-VERSTAERKER 2100.6002.02 2101.5300.01

VH8600A1 UHF-AMPLIFIER VAR 04 05 24 25

A20 GSZR800T1 EINBAUS. SX800 2099.1007.22 2101.5300.01

ZR800T1 INSTAL. KIT VAR 04 05 24 25 ATV - Ausfuehrung

A21 GSZR810S1 HL - LEISTUNGSSATZ 2098.5109.26 2101.5300.01 NX8600 *

ZR810S1 HP POWER KIT NX8600 VAR 04 05 24 25 Leistungssatz fuer 6 Verstaerker

A22 GS ZR810S2 HL - NETZVERT.-SATZ 2098.5209.16 2101.5300.01

NX8600 ZR810S1 HP POWER DISTRIB. KIT NX8600 VAR 04 05 24 25 Netzverteilungssatz fuer 6 Verstaerker

A23 GS ZR800V1 VORST.SA SX800 2099.1507.03 2101.5300.01

ZR800V1 EXC.INST. KIT VAR 24 25 Vorstufensatz-ATV Comb.

A24 GSZR810R1 HLHF- 2098.5250.30 2101.5300.01

LEISTUNGSSATZ NX8600 ZR810R1 HP RF-POWER KIT NX8600 VAR 04 24 HF-Leistungssatz fuer 6 Verstaerker mit Filter extern

Sprach./Lang A.I. / C.I Blatt/Sheet

el.Kennz Part

Benennung / Hinweise Designation

Sachnummer Stock No.

Hersteller Bestellbezeichnung Manufacturer Designation

enthalten in contained in

A24 GS ZR810F1 HL HF-FILTER-SATZ 2103.4000.30 2101.5300.01 NX8600 4

ZR810F1 HP RF SET OF FILTER NX8600 VAR 05 25 HF-Filtersatz fuer 6 Verstaerker mit Filter intern

A80 GGZR810-Z HL-ZUBEHOER 2099.5102.00 2101.5300.01

NX86XX ZR810-Z ACCESS. HIGH POWER VAR 04 05 24 25

A200 GG NETCCU 800 CONTROL UNIT 2095.8007.02 2101.5300.01

NETCCU 800 CONTROL UNIT VAR 04 05 24 25

A100A GG SX800 TV EXCITER ATV COM. 2095.1502.20 2101.5300.01

INTRF SX800 TV EXCITER ATV COM. INT RF VAR 04 05 24 25

A100B GG SX800 TV EXCITER ATV COM. 2095.1502.20 2101.5300.01

INTRF SX800 TV EXCITER ATV COM. INT RF VAR 24 25 •

Spare Parts Lists

TRANSMITTER

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.

Benennung / Bezeichnung Des/gnafror?

Z Sachnummer Stock No.

Ersatzteil Subst.part

BA VH

ACHTUNG EGB/ATTENTION ESD 4 *VARIANTENERKLAERUNG 'EXPLANATION OF MODELS VAR02=ATV-AUSFUEHRUNG FUER ML MOD02=ATV VERSION FOR MP VAR03-DTV-AUSFUEHRUNG FUER ML MOD03=DTV VERSION FOR MP VAR04=DAB-AUSFUEHRUNG FUER ML MIT SX801 MOD04=DAB VERSION FOR MP WITH SX801 VAR22=ATV-AUSFUEHRUNG FUER HL MOD22=ATV VERSION FOR HP VAR23=DTV-AUSFUEHRUNG FUER HL MOD23=DTV VERSION FOR HP VAR24-DAB-AUSFUEHRUNG FUER HL MIT SX801 MOD24=DAB VERSION FOR HP WITH SX801

100 1 S W11A DXAF-KABEL W11-12-13A Z 2097.5434.00 M 0

AF-CABLEW11-12-13A VAR 02 22 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1007.01

W12A W13A

200 5 S W21A DV RG179D BNC BU-E/BNC ST Z 2097.5857.00 M

RF-CAB. 75 OHM 2000MM ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1007.01

W22A W23A W24A W31A W32A W34A W35A W42A

300 2 S W41A DV RG316 BNC-St/EBU 2000MM Z 2088.3503.00 M

RF CABLE 50 OHM 2XBNC ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1007.01

W43A 400 1 S X100A FT EINBAUADAPTER 8P.GER 1093.9122.00 B V

2XRJ45 COUPLER JACK STRAIGHT ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1007.01

410 1 S W48 DG PATCHKABEL 2M 1-1 BL 4055.6458.00 B T

PATCHCABEL2M 1-1 BL VAR 22 23 24 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1007.01

420 1 S W54A DY RACK CONT.-EXC. A W54A Z 2097.5392.00 M 0

RACK CONT.-EXC. A W54A VAR 22 23 24 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1007.01

430 1 S W55 DY RACK CONT.-NETCCU W55 Z 2097.5411.00 M 0

RACK CONT.-NETCCU W55 VAR 22 23 24 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1007.01

440 1 S W56A DG PATCHKABEL CAT6. 0.5M 0041.9283.00 B T

PATCHCABLE CAT.6. 0.5M VAR 22 23 24

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.

Benennung / Bezeichnung Designation



BA VH

## Verwendet in:

##2099.1007.01 450 1 S X54B DX BRUECKEN-ST REF.SPG.-REDUZ. z 2097.5592.00 M

A50/X7 DUMMY PLUG REDUCED REF B A50/X7 VAR 22 23 24 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1007.01

>

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

ACHTUNG EGB/ATTENTION ESD 4 *VARIANTENERKLAERUNG 'EXPLANATION OF MODELS VAR02=ATV-SPLIT AUSFUEHRUNG MOD02=ATV SPLIT VERSION VAR03=ATV-COMB. AUSFUEHRUNG MOD03=ATV COMBINED VERSION VAR04=DTV - AUSFUEHRUNG MOD04=DTV VERSION VAR05=DTV - AUSFUEHRUNG MIT ADE MOD05=DTV VERSION WITH ADE VAR06=DAB - AUSFUEHRUNG ML MIT SX801 MOD06=DAB VERSION MP WITH SX801 VAR24=DTV - KLEINLEISTUNG MOD24=DTV LOW POWER VAR25=DTV+ADE KLEINLEISTUNG MOD25=DTV+ADE LOW POWER

100 1 S A15 ED HF-STEUERS.UMSCH. Z 2095.3305.02 M O

RF-EXCITER SWITCHING VAR 02 03 05 25 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1507.01

200 1 S A15 ED RF-SWITCH Z 2095.3257.02 M O

RF-SWITCH VAR 04 06 24 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1507.01

300 1 S W11B DX AF-Kabel W11-12-13B Z 2097.5440.00 M O

AF-CableW11-12-13B VAR 02 03 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1507.01

W12B W13B

400 1 S W21B DV RG179D BNC BU-E/BNC ST Z 2097.5857.00 M

RF-CAB. 75 OHM 2000MM VAR 02 03 04 05 06 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1507.01

W22B W23B W24B W31B W32B W34B W35B W42B

500 1 S W41B DV RG316 BNC-St/EBU 2000MM Z 2088.3503.00 M

RF CABLE 50 OHM 2XBNC VAR 02 03 04 05 06 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1507.01

W43B 510 1 S MOOR ED RACK CONTROLLER SV8000 Z 2098.9740.02 M

RACK CONTROLLER SV8000 VAR 24 25 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.1507.01

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

ACHTUNG EGB/ATTENTION ESD 4 *VARIANTENERKLAERUNG *EXPLANATION OF MODELS VAR11=MIT 1 VERSTAERKER BAND III

MOD11=WITH 1 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR12=MIT 2 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD12=WITH 2 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR13=MIT 3 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD13=WITH 3 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR14=MIT 4 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD14=WITH 4 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR15=MIT 5 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD15=WITH 5 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR16=MIT 6 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD16=WITH 6 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR17=MIT 7 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD17=WITH 7 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR18=MIT 8 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD18=WITH 8 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR19=MIT 9 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD19=WITH 9 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR20=MIT 10 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD20=WITH 10 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR21=MIT 1 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD21=WITH 1 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR22=MIT 2 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD22=WITH 2 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR23=MIT 3 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD23=WITH 3 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR24=MIT 4 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD24=WITH 4 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR25=MIT 5 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD25=WITH 5 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR26=MIT 6 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD26=WITH 6 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR27=MIT 7 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD27=WITH 7 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR28=MIT 8 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD28=WITH 8 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR29=MIT 9 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD29=WITH 9 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR30=MIT 30 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD30=WITH 30 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V

10 1 S B1.ZU ZM TEMPERATURFUEHLER z 2080.9048.00 M TEMPERATURE SENSOR VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

20 0 S OGFS-RING 19X2.5 2080.9219.00 B O SEALING RING VAR11 12 1314 151617181920212223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

30 1 S OG FS-RING 52X4 0016.0963.00 B V

SEALING RING VAR 11 121314151617181920212223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

40 1 S MH HALBSCHALEN-MONTAGE-SATZ DN40 3559.6073.00 B B ASSEMBLY KIT DN40 VAR 11 121314151617181920212223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

50 1 S A50 EE RACK CONTROLLER Z 2096.4505.02 M O

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

ACHTUNG EGB/ATTENTION ESD 4 *VARIANTENERKLAERUNG *EXPLANATION OF MODELS

VAR11=MIT 1 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD1 1=WITH 1 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR12=MIT 2 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD12=WITH 2 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR13=MIT 3 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD13=WITH 3 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR14=MIT 4 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD14=WITH 4 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR15=MIT 5 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD15=WITH 5 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR16=MIT 6 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD16=WITH 6 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR17=MIT 7 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD17=WITH 7 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR18=MIT 8 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD18=WITH 8 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR19=MIT 9 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD19=WITH 9 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR20=MIT 10 VERSTAERKER BAND III MOD20=WITH 10 AMPLIFIER BAND III VAR21=MIT 1 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD21=WITH 1 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR22=MIT 2 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD22=WITH 2 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR23=MIT 3 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD23=WITH 3 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR24=MIT 4 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD24=WITH 4 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR25=MIT 5 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD25=WITH 5 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR26=MIT 6 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD26=WITH 6 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR27=MIT 7 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD27=WITH 7 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR28=MIT 8 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD28=WITH 8 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR29=MIT 9 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD29=WITH 9 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V VAR30=MIT 30 VERSTAERKER BAND IV/V MOD30=WITH 30 AMPLIFIER BAND IV/V

10 1 S B1.ZU ZM TEMPERATURFUEHLER Z 2080.9048.00 M TEMPERATURE SENSOR VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

20 0 S OGFS-RING 19X2.5 2080.9219.00 B O

SEALING RING VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

30 1 S OGFS-RING 52X4 0016.0963.00 B V SEALING RING VAR 11 12 13 14 151617 18192021 2223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

40 1 S MH HALBSCHALEN-MONTAGE-SATZ DN40 3559.6073.00 B B ASSEMBLY KIT DN40 VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

50 1 S A50 EE RACK CONTROLLER Z 2096.4505.02 M O

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

RACK CONTROLLER

VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 4

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

60 1 S X53D DX CAN ABSCHL. 15POL.X53D z 2097.5605.00 M O

CAN TERMINATING X53D VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

70 1 S W53B DX CAN ABSCHL. 15POL.X53B Z 2097.561 1 .00 M O

CAN TERMINATING X53B VAR 11 12131415161718192021 2223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

80 1 S X53A DX CAN ABSCHL. 9POL.X53A z 2097.5628.00 M O

CAN TERMINATING X53A VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

90 1 S W49 DY RACK CONTR.- CAN 3 PUMP.STEUER. z 2097.5486.00 M W49 RC - CAN 3 PUMP UNIT W51 VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

100 1 S ZM SCHLAUCHANSCHLUSS KG860H1 z 2100.8257.00 M

TUBE CONNECTION KG860H1 VAR11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

110 1 S W53D DY RACK CONTR - 5 VERST. W53D z 2097.5528.00 M

RACK CONTR - 5 AMPLIF.W53D VAR 11 12 13 14 15 21 22 23 24 25 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

120 1 S W53D DY RACK CONTR - 10 VERST. W53D z 2097.5534.00 M

RACK CONTR - 10 AMPLIF.W53D VAR 16 17 18 19 20 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

130 1 S KZ FUEHLSTIFT RD2.7X17.5 0043.5727.00 M V

GUIDE PIN VAR 14 15 18 20 24 25 28 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2100.8757.01

140 1 S MH SCHNELLVERSCHLUSSKUPPLUNG 2100.8163.00 B B

MUFFE QUICK-RELEASE FASTENER SLEEVE VAR 14 15 18 20 24 25 28 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2100.8757.01

150 1 S OF 28 DIN471 A2 2100.8863.00 B B

28 DIN471 A2 VAR 14 15 18 20 24 25 28 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2100.8757.01

160 1 S OG FLACHDICHTUNG 3/8 ZOLL 2100.8186.00 B B

WASHER 3/8 ZOLL

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2100.8757.01 ##2098.5109.01

170 1 S MH KUGELHAHN 3/8 ZOLL 2100.8170.00 B B

BALL VALVE 3/8 ZOLL VAR 14 15 18 20 24 25 28 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2100.8757.01

180 1 S OG FLEXLEITUNG 1/2 - 3/8 ZOLL 2100.8192.00 B B

FLEXIBLE PIPE 1/2 - 3/8 ZOLL VAR 14 15 18 20 24 25 28 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2100.8757.01

190 1 S MB SCHLAUCHSTUECK 3/8 ZOLL 2100.8234.00 M

TUBE CONNECT 3/8 ZOLL VAR 11 121314 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

200 1 S A41 ZE 2-FACH KOPPLER BV8602H1 Z 2101.1004.58 M

2-FOLD COUPLER BV8602H1 VAR 22 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01













270 1 S OG FLACHDICHTUNG 1/2 ZOLL AUSSEN 2100.8205.00 B B

WASHER 1/2 ZOLL VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5109.01

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

ACHTUNG EGB/ATTENTION ESD 4

*VARIANTENERKLAERUNG

'EXPLANATION OF MODELS VAR06=6 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST.

FUER MEHRGESTELL-SENDER MOD06=6 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1 . RACK FOR MULTI RACK TRANSMITTER VAR08=8 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. FUER MEHRGESTELL-SENDER MOD08=8 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1 . RACK FOR MULTI RACK TRANSMITTER VAR1 0=10 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. FUER MEHRGESTELL-SENDER MOD10=10 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK FOR MULTI RACK TRANSMITTER VAR11=1 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD11=1 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR12=2 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD12=2 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR1 3=3 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD13=3 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR14=4 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD14=4 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR15=5 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD15=5 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR1 6=6 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD16=6 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR1 7=7 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD17=7 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR18=8 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD18=8 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR19=9 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD19=9 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR20=10 VERSTAERKER IM 1. GEST. MOD20=10 AMPLIFIER IN THE 1. RACK VAR26=6 VERSTAERKER FUER MEHRGESTELL-SENDER MOD26=6 AMPLIFIER FOR MULTI RACK TRANSMITTER VAR28=8 VERSTAERKER FUER MEHRGESTELL-SENDER MOD28=8 AMPLIFIER FOR MULTI RACK TRANSMITTER VAR30=10 VERSTAERKER FUER MEHRGESTELL-SENDER MOD30=10 AMPLIFIER FOR MULTI RACK TRANSMITTER VAR40= 10 VERSTAERKER FUER MEHRGESTELL-SENDER MIT JE EINER NETZ-EINSPEISUNG MOD40=10 AMPLIFIER FOR MULTIRACK TRANSMITTER WITH SINGLE POWER FEEDING

10 1 S X.PE1 VK SCHUTZLEITERKL.35QMM 2009.7430.00 B B

GROUND WIRE CLIP VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

20 1 S XQ1.1 VK REIHENKLEMME 2.5QMM24A 2091.9744.00 B B

CLAMP VAR 06 08 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

30 1 S X20.1 VK SCHUTZLEITERKL.2.5QMM 2091.9773.00 B V

VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

X20.2

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

X20.3

X20.4 4

X20.5 40 1 S Q1 SL LEISTUNGSSCHALT.4P125A 2093.8839.00 B O

POWER SWITCH 4P124A VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

50 1 S Q1.1 SL HILFSSTROM-SCHALTER 2093.8845.00 B 0 ADDITIONAL SWITCH VAR 06 08 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

60 1 S A36 NJ SCHALTNETZT. AC90-264V 1081.0254.00 B B

POWER SUPPLY 12V/40W VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

70 1 S F1 SS SCHUTZSCHALTER T-M 1P 3A - C 2096.5030.00 B O

PROTECT SWITCH 1 P 3A - C VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

F2 F3 F5 F8

80 2 S X1 SL 3PH SAM.SCH. EINSP. LI 2096.5053.00 B B

3PH CURR. DISTRIB. LEF VAR 06 08 10 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

X2 90 1 S Q2X SL 3PH VERBINDUNGSSTECKER 2096.5082.00 B B

3PH PLUG LINK VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

Q3X Q4X Q5X Q6X Q7X Q8X Q9X Q10X Q11X

100 1 S X1.1 SL 3PH SAM.SCH. ERWEIT.3X 2096.5076.00 B B

3PH CURR. DISTRIB. 3X VAR 06 08 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

X2.1 110 1 S X3 VK KLEMMBLOCK 0.5-6QMM 2096.5124.00 B B

TERMINAL BLOCK VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

120 1 S X41 DX WAGO BRUECKEN-STECKER Z 2097.5634.41 M O

DUMMY PLUG

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

VAR 06 08 10 11 12 1314 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01


DUMMY PLUG VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01


DUMMY PLUG VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

150 1 S X33 DX WAGO BRUECKEN-STECKER Z 2097.5634.33 M 0

DUMMY PLUG VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01


DUMMY PLUG VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

170 1 S W1PH DX W1 PH VERTEILER N-NETZ Z 2096.3538.02 M

W1PH MAIN DISTRIBUTOR VAR 06 08 10 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

180 1 S A35 ED VERTEILER-N-NETZ Z 2096.3550.02 M

INTERFACE POWER DISTR. VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

190 1 S Q2 SS SCHUTZSCHALTER T-M 3P 7-10A 2096.5147.00 B B

PROTECT SWITCH 3P 7-10A VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11

200 1 S W63 DX AC A3.VERST. KAB. W63 Z 2097.5128.00 M

AC A3.AMPLIF.CAB. W63 VAR 06 08 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

210 1 S W64 DX AC A4.VERST. KAB. W64 Z 2097.5134.00 M

AC A4.AMPLIF.CAB. W64 VAR 06 08 10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

220 1 S W62 DX AC A2.VERST. KAB. W62 z 2097.5111.00 M AC A2.AMPLIF.CAB. W62 VAR 06 08 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

230 1 S W61 DX AC A1 .VERST. KAB. W61 Z 2097.5105.00 M

AC A1.AMPLIF.CAB. W61 VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

240 1 S W65 DX AC A5.VERST. KAB. W65 z 2097.5140.00 M

AC A5.AMPLIF.CAB. W65 VAR 06 08 10 15 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01


AC A6.AMPLIF.CAB. W66 VAR 06 08 10 16 17 18 19 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01


AC A7.AMPLIF.CAB. W67 VAR 08 10 17 18 19 20 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

270 1 S W68 DXAC A8.VERST. KAB. W68 z 2097.5170.00 M

AC A8.AMPLIF.CAB. W68 VAR 08 10 18 19 20 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01


AC A9.AMPLIF.CAB. W69 VAR 10 19 20 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01


AC A10.AMPLIF.CAB. W70 VAR 10 20 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

300 1 S W1PH DX W1 PH VERTEILER N-NETZ HP z 2097.5205.02 M

W1PH MAIN DISTRIBUTOR HP VAR 11 12 13 14 15 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

310 1 S F4 SS SCHUTZSCHALTER T-M 1P 10A- C 2096.5182.00 B O

PROTECT SWITCH 1 P 1 0A - C VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

F6 F7

320 1 S W4 DX W4 HL - DRAHTSATZ N / N / PE z 2097.5328.00 M

W4 HP WIRE SET N / N / PE VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 26 28 30 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

330 1 S ZM 3PH-ST NX8600 BEFEST.-SATZ z 2097.5092.00 M

3PH-PLUG NX8600 FIXING KIT

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

VAR 06 08 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920

26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

340 1 S X.Q1.1 VK DURCHGANGSKL. 35QMM 2009.7423.00 B B

TERMINAL BLOCK VAR 06 08 10 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

X.Q1.2 X.Q1.3 X.Q1.4 X.Q1.5 X.Q1.6 X.Q1.7 X.Q1.8

350 1 S Q1 SL LEISTUNGSSCHALT.4P160A 2080.9760.00 B O

POWER-SWITCH VAR 06 08 10 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5209.01

360 1 S W4 DX W4 HL - DRAHTSATZ 120A N / N / PE Z 2097.5311.00 M

VAR 06 08 10 40 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5209.01

370 1 S A2 SU UEBERSPANNUNGSSCHUTZ TYP 2 2099.3751.00 B B

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION TYP 2 VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 20 26 28 ## Verwendet in: ##2099.3700.01

380 1 S A2.2-L/N SU UEBERSPG.-ABLEITER TYP 2 L/N 2099.3980.00 B B

OVERVOLTAGE CONDUCTOR TYP 2 L/N VAR 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 16 18 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2099.3700.01

390 1 S A2.2- SU UEBERSPG.-ABLEITER TYP 2 N/PE 2099.3997.00 B B

N/PE OVERVOLTAGE CONDUCTOR TYP 2 N/PE VAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 20 26 28 30 40 ## Verwendet in: ## 2099.3700.01

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

ACHTUNG EGB/ATTENTION ESD

*VARIANTENERKLAERUNG

'EXPLANATION OF MODELS VAR23=DVB-T 2 + 3 (<= KANAL 25)

VERST. BD IV/V FUER BN 616517 MOD23=DVB-T 2 + 3 (<= CHANNAL 25) AMPL. BD IV/V FOR BN 616517 VAR24=DVB-T 3 (> KANAL 25) + 4+5 VERST. BD IV/V FUER BN 616338 MOD24=DVB-T 3 (> CANNAL 25) + 4+5 AMPL. BD IV/V FOR BN 616338 VAR25=DVB-T / ATV-COMB. 2-5 VERST.

BDIV/V MOD25=DVB-T/ ATV-COMB. 2-5 AMPL.

BD IV/V VAR26=DVB-T 6-8 VERST. BD IV/V MOD26=DVB-T 6-8 AMPL. BD IV/V VAR27=DVB-T 7+8 VERST. BDIV/V FUER BN 61 6337 MOD27=DVB-T 7+8 AMPL. BDIV/V FOR BN 616337 VAR28=VORBEREITET FUER DVB-T UMRUESTUNG ATV-COMB. 6+7 VERST. BDIV/V FUER BN61 6539 MOD28=PROVIDING TO MODIFICATION ATV-COMB. 6+7 AMPL. BDIV/V FOR BN616539 VAR29=DVB-T 10 VERST. BDIV/V FUER BN 616539 MOD29=DVB-T 10 AMPL. BDIV/V FOR BN 616539 VAR30=ATV-COMB. 6+7 VERST.

BDIV/V MOD30=ATV-COMB. 6+7 AMPL.

BD IV/V VAR40=ATV-COMB. 10 VERST. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E200C-1-2 MOD40=ATV-COMB. 10 AMPL. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E200C-1-2 VAR44=ATV-COMB. 2-4 VERST. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E140C-1-M (AC) MOD44=ATV-COMB. 2-4 AMPL. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E140C-1-M (AC) VAR45=ATV-COMB. 5 VERST. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E140C-1-2-M MOD45=ATV-COMB. 5 AMPL. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E140C-1-2-M VAR46=ATV-COMB. 6+7 VERST. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E140C-1-2-M MOD46=ATV-COMB. 6+7 AMPL. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E140C-1-2-M VAR48=ATV-COMB. 8 VERST. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E140C-1-2-M MOD48=ATV-COMB. 8 AMPL. BD IV/V COM-TECH TC4E140C-1-2-M VAR50=ATV-COMB. 8 VERST.

BDIV/V MOD50=ATV-COMB. 8 AMPL.

BD IV/V VAR70=ATV/DTV. 8 VERST.BDIV/V BN616539 / BN616539C0001-OE MOD70=ATV/DTV. 8 AMPL. BDIV/V BN616539 / BN616539C0001-OE

10 1 S ZM UEBER.RL77M/3 1/8ZOLL Z 2073.0403.00 M

Adaptor RL77M/3 1/8 Inch VAR 40 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

20 1 S ZM UEBERGANG RL58M-1 5/8EIA Z 2086.8108.00 M ADAPTER RL58M-1 5/8EIA VAR 23 24 25 26 27 44

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

## Verwendet in:

## 2103.4000.01 30 1 S ZM UEBERGANG RL58M-3 1/8EIA Z 2086.8008.00 M

VAR 28 29 30 45 46 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

40 1 S ZM KUPPL.ELEMENT 3 1/8 -E 0494.6630.00 M V

ADAPTOR 3 1/8 El A VAR 28 29 30 40 45 46 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

50 1 S FK KUPPLUNG EIA 1 5/8 0656.2279.00 B V

ADAPTOR FOR TRANSMISSION LINE 1 5/8 VAR 23 24 25 26 27 44 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

60 1 S A47 ZM TRIMMLEITUNG RL58M/R Z 2072.9559.00 M

ADJUSTING CIRCUIT RL58M/R VAR 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 44 45 46 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

70 1 S ZM KUPPLUNG RL58M/M Z 2073.0003.00 M

COUPLING VAR 23 24 25 26 27 44 45 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

80 1 S ZM WINKELSTUECK RL58M/R Z 2072.9407.00 M

VAR 25 44 45 46 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01


ANGLE RL77/MR VAR 26 27 28 29 40 46 48 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01


COUPLING VAR 40 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

110 1 S ZM WINKELSTUECK RL77M/M Z 2072.9759.00 M

RL77 90 DEGR ELBOW WITH SCREW VAR 28 29 30 40 46 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

120 1 S ZM UEBERGANG RL58M/RL77M Z 2073.0703.00 M

ADAPTER RL58M/RL77M VAR 25 26 27 28 29 30 44 45 46 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

130 1 S A45 ZM FD745 OWF - BD.4/5 Z 2092.6303.02 M

FD745 H.FILT. BD.4/5 VAR 23 24 25 26 27 44 45 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

140 1 S A45 ZM FD845HP OWF - BD.4/5 Z 2100.4500.02 M

FD845HP H.FILT. BD4/5 VAR 28 29 30 40 46 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01


Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.



Ersatzteil Substpart

BA VH

ANGLE RL58M/M

VAR 23 24 25 26 27 28 44 45 46 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

160 1 S P14 ZE GD858 MESSRICHTKOPPLER RL58 Z 2102.6000.44 M

GD858 DIRECTION COUPLER RL58 VAR 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 44 45 46 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

170 1 S R1 FJ ABSCHL.WIDERSTAND 1W 0272.4910.00 B O

TERMINATION 50 OHM VAR 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 44 45 46 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2102.6000.01 ##2102.6100.01

R2 R14C

180 1 S R14D FJ ABSCHLUSSW.50OHM SMA 0.5W 0249.7823.00 B O

TERMINATION 50 OHM VAR 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 44 45 46 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2102.6000.01 ##2102.6100.01

190 1 S P1 ZM GD800Z1 MESSSYSTEM Z 2096.6208.02 M O

GD800Z1 MEASURING SYST VAR 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 44 45 46 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2102.6000.01 ##2102.6100.01

P2 P14C

200 1 S P14D ZM GD800Z1 MESSSYSTEM Z 2096.6208.03 M O GD800Z1 MEASURING SYST VAR 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 44 45 46 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2102.6000.01 ##2102.6100.01

210 1 S P14A ZM GD800Z2 MESSSYSTEM Z 2096.6308.40 M O GD800Z2 MEASURING SYST VAR 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 40 44 45 46 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2102.6000.01 ##2102.6100.01

P14B 220 1 S P14 ZE GD877 MESSRICHTKOPPLER RL77 Z 2102.6100.44 M

GD877 DIRECTION COUPLER RL77 VAR 40 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

230 1 S A47 ZM TRIMMLEITUNG RL77 M-R Z 2100.4851.02 M

TRIMMING LINE RL77 M-R VAR 30 40 48 50 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

240 1 S ZM UEBERG. RL58R-1 5/8EIA Z 2094.1209.00 M 0 CROSS OVER RL58R-1 5/8 VAR 23 24 26 27 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

250 1 S P23 ZE GD858 MESSRICHTKOPPLER RL58 Z 2102.6000.42 M

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

VAR 23 24 26 27 28 29

## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

260 1 S P23 ZE GD877 MESSRICHTKOPPLER RL77 z 2102.6100.42 M

GD877 DIRECTION COUPLER RL77 VAR 70 ## Verwendet in: ##2103.4000.01

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

ACHTUNG EGB/ATTENTION ESD 4

*VARIANTENERKLAERUNG 'EXPLANATION OF MODELS

VAR23=DVB-T/ATSC/ATV-COMB. 2-5

VERST. BD. IV/V MOD23=DVB-T / ATSC / ATV-COMB. 2-5 AMPL. BD. IV/V VAR25=DVB-T/ ATSC /ATV-COMB. 2-5 VERST. BD. IV/V MOD25=DVB-T / ATSC / ATV-COMB. 2-5 AMPL. BD. IV/V VAR26=DVB-T 6-8 VERST. BD. IV/V MOD26=DVB-T 6-8 AMPL. BD. IV/V VAR28=WIRD ERSETZT DURCH DIE VAR 26 MOD28=SUBSTITUTES BY VAR 26 VAR29=DVB-T 9-10 VERST. BD IV/V MOD29=DVB-T 9-10 AMPL. BD IV/V VAR30=DVB-T 9-1 0 VERST. / ATSC 6-9 VERST. / ATV-COMB. 6-7 VERST. BD. IV/V MOD30=DVB-T 9-10 AMPL. ATSC 6-9 AMPL. / ATV-COMB. 6-7 AMPL. BD. IV/V VAR50=ATSC 10 VERST. /ATV-COMB. 8-10 VERST. BD. IV/V MOD50=ATSC 10 AMPL. /ATV-COMB. 8-10 AMPL. BD. IV/V VAR51=DVB-T 2X6 VERST. BD IV/V MIT FLUESSIGKEITS-ABS MOD51=DVB-T 2X6 AMPL. BD IV/V WITH LIQUID ABS VAR52=DVB-T 2X6 VERST. BD IV/V MOD52=DVB-T 2X6 AMPL. BD IV/V VAR61=DVB-T 2X8 VERST. BD IV/V MIT FLUESSIGKEITS-ABS MOD61=DVB-T 2X8 AMPL. BD IV/V WITH LIQUID ABS VAR62=DVB-T 2X8 VERST. BD IV/V MOD62=DVB-T 2X8 AMPL. BD IV/V VAR71=ATSC / ATV-COMB. 2X6 VERST. / ATSC 2X8 VERST. MIT FLUESSIGKEITS- ABS MOD71=ATSC / ATV-COMB. 2X6 AMPL. / ATSC 2X8 AMPL. WITH LIQUID ABS VAR72=ATSC / ATV-COMB. 2X6 VERST. / ATSC 2X8 VERST. MOD72=ATSC / ATV-COMB. 2X6 AMPL. / ATSC 2X8 AMPL. VAR74=DVB-T 2X10 VERST. BD IV/V MIT FLUESSIGKEITS-ABS MOD74=DVB-T 2X10 AMPL. BD IV/V WITH LIQUID ABS VAR75=DVB-T 2 X 10 VERST. BD IV/V MOD75=DVB-T 2 X 10 AMPL. BD IV/V VAR82=ATV-COMB. 2 X 8 VERST. /ATSC / ATV-COMB. 2X10 VERST. MOD82=ATV-COMB. 2 X 8 AMPL. /ATSC / ATV-COMB. 2X 10 AMPL. VAR83=ATV-COMB. 2X8 VERST. MIT FLUESSIGKEITS-ABS MOD83=ATV-COMB. 2X8 AMPL. WITH LIQUID ABS

10 1 S ZM UEBERGANG RL58M-1 5/8EIA Z 2086.8108.00 M ADAPTER RL58M-1 5/8EIA VAR 23 25 26 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01

20 1 S ZM UEBERGANG RL58M-3 1/8EIA Z 2086.8008.00 M

VAR 29 30 51 52

## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5250.01

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unif

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

30 1 S ZM KUPPL.ELEMENT 3 1/8 -E 0494.6630.00 M V ADAPTOR 3 1/8 EIA VAR 29 30 50 51 52 61 62 71 72 74 75 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5250.01

40 1 S FK KUPPLUNG EIA 1 5/8 0656.2279.00 B V

ADAPTOR FOR TRANSMISSION LINE 1 5/8 VAR 23 25 26 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01

50 1 S ZM WINKELSTUECK RL77M/R z 2072.9907.00 M ANGLE RL77/MR VAR 26 51 52 61 62 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01


RL77 90 DEGR ELBOW WITH SCREW VAR 29 30 50 61 62 71 72 74 75 82 83 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5250.01

70 1 S ZM UEBERGANG RL58M/RL77M z 2073.0703.00 M

ADAPTER RL58M/RL77M VAR 26 29 30 51 52 61 62 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01

80 1 S A45 ZM FD745 OWF/TL - BD.4/5 z 2092.6303.03 M FD745 H.FILT/T BD.4/5 VAR 23 25 26 51 52 61 62 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01

90 1 S ZM WINKELSTUECK RL58M/M z 2072.9259.00 M

ANGLE RL58M/M VAR 23 25 26 51 52 61 62 72 75 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01

100 1 S P14 ZE GD858 MESSRICHTKOPPLER RL58 z 2102.6000.44 M GD858 DIRECTION COUPLER RL58 VAR 23 25 26 29 30 51 52 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01

110 1 S P14C ZM GD800Z1 MESSSYSTEM z 2096.6208.02 M O

GD800Z1 MEASURING SYST VAR 23 25 26 29 30 50 51 52 61 62 71 72 74 75 82 83 ## Verwendet in: ##2102.6000.01 ##2102.6100.01 ##2102.6200.01

120 1 S P14D ZM GD800Z1 MESSSYSTEM z 2096.6208.03 M O GD800Z1 MEASURING SYST VAR 23 25 26 29 30 50 51 52 61 62 71 72 74 75 82 83 ## Verwendet in: ##2102.6000.01 ##2102.6100.01 ##2102.6200.01

130 1 S P14A ZM GD800Z2 MESSSYSTEM z 2096.6308.40 M O

GD800Z2 MEASURING SYST VAR 23 25 26 29 30 50 51 52 61 62 71 72 74 75 82 83 ## Verwendet in: ##2102.6000.01 ##2102.6100.01 ##2102.6200.01

Pos.-Nr. ItemNo

Menge Quantity

ME Unit

EI.Kennz Ref.Des.




BA VH

P14B 4 140 1 S P14 ZE GD877 MESSRICHTKOPPLER RL77 Z 2102.6100.44 M

GD877 DIRECTION COUPLER RL77 VAR 50 61 62 71 72 74 75 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01

150 1 S A45 ZM FD845 OWF/TL - BD.4/5 Z 2100.4500.03 M

FD845 HARMONIC FILTER / TRIM BD4/5 VAR 29 30 50 71 72 74 75 82 83 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01


COUPLING VAR 52 62 72 75 82 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01


VAR 52 62 72 75 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5250.01

180 1 S A502 ZE ABSORBERBLOCK 3,4KW Z 2089.4090.02 M

ABSORBERBLOCK 3,4KW VAR 52 62 72 75 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5250.01

190 1 S A40N ED SPLITTER Z 2090.7754.02 M O

SPLITTER VAR 51 52 61 62 71 72 74 75 82 83 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01

200 1 S ZM UEBERGANG RL98M-4 1/2E Z 2086.8295.00 M

CROSSOVER RL98M-4 1/2E VAR 82 83 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5250.01

210 1 S S1 SB DRUCKSCH.2XU KNOPF GR 0290.8043.00 B V

PUSHBUTTON .2XU KNOB GR VAR 52 62 72 75 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01

220 1 S A400 ZE 2F-GESTELLK.BILD BV340 Z 2092.3256.02 M

RACK COUPLER VISION VAR 61 62 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01


RACK COUPLER VISION VAR 51 52 ## Verwendet in: ##2098.5250.01


RACK COUPLER VISION VAR 82 83 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5250.01

250 1 S W101A DY SENDER-SENDER CAN-BUS 1 W101A Z 2097.5511.00 M

TX-TX CAN-BUS 1 W101A VAR 51 52 61 62 71 72 74 75 82 83 ## Verwendet in: ## 2098.5250.01

260 1 S R14C FJ ABSCHL.WIDERSTAND 1W 0272.4910.00 B O

TERMINATION 50 OHM

System manual

Documents

Transcript of System manual